Report

Resources and environment

Master Planning & Infrastructure and Architecture &

Engineering Consultancy Services For
Gewan Island

Design Development Report

Infrastructure Report

Rev Date Description By CHK Approved

0 05/07/2018 Approved Issue H.J / R.G A.K F.K

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0

PRC-EN-11 (F1) REV 2 page 1/1

Gewan Island
Table of Content
1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
General .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Scope of Work................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Report Objectives and Structure ................................................................................................................................... 1
Planning Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
2 ROAD DESIGN......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Design Criteria .............................................................................................................................................................. 3
Access ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4
Topography / Grading ................................................................................................................................................... 4
Road Hierarchy ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
Road Sections ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
Parking .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Road Safety.................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Pavement Finish Types.................................................................................................................................................. 5
3 UTILITIES ARRANGEMENT ................................................................................................................................ 7
Utility Cross sections ........................................................................................................................................... 7
Utility Buildings Facilities ................................................................................................................................... 7
4 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 19
Water Demand............................................................................................................................................................. 19
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 20
Pipe Sizing ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Pipe Material...................................................................................................................................................... 20
Pipe Cover ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Valves ................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Pressure Requirement ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Fire Hydrants ..................................................................................................................................................... 20
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 20
Proposed System ................................................................................................................................................ 21
Water Supply and Hydrant Network ........................................................................................................ 21
Water Reservoir and Pumping Station ..................................................................................................... 21
Water Reservoir and Pumping Station ............................................................................................................... 23
General ..................................................................................................................................................... 23
Design Criteria and Basis of Design ........................................................................................................ 23
Control Philosophy ................................................................................................................................... 23
SCADA/PLC Control Network ................................................................................................................ 23
5 WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 25
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 25
Wastewater Flows ....................................................................................................................................................... 25
Unit Wastewater Generation Rates .................................................................................................................... 25
Average Wastewater Flow ................................................................................................................................. 25
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 25
Peak Factor ........................................................................................................................................................ 25
Pipe Sizing ......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Design Velocities ............................................................................................................................................... 26
Pipe Slopes......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Flow Depths ....................................................................................................................................................... 26
Pipe Size and Material ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Pipe Cover.......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Manholes ............................................................................................................................................................ 26
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 26
Wastewater Collection Network ........................................................................................................................ 26
Pumping Stations ............................................................................................................................................... 29
General ..................................................................................................................................................... 29
Design Criteria and Basis of Design ......................................................................................................... 29
Operation Philosophy ............................................................................................................................... 29
SCADA/PLC Control Network ................................................................................................................ 29
6 STORMWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................... 31
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 31
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 31
Rainfall............................................................................................................................................................... 31
Design Storm Duration ...................................................................................................................................... 31
Network Sizing .................................................................................................................................................. 31
Pipeline Sizes and Material ................................................................................................................................ 32
Manhole Spacing ............................................................................................................................................... 32
Gullies Spacing .................................................................................................................................................. 32
Design Velocities ............................................................................................................................................... 32
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 32
7 IRRIGATION SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................... 34
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 34
Irrigation Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 34
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 34
Irrigators Selection ............................................................................................................................................. 34
Control System .................................................................................................................................................. 35
Pipe Material ...................................................................................................................................................... 35
Pipe Cover and Valves ....................................................................................................................................... 35
Hydraulic Calculations ....................................................................................................................................... 35
Pipe Sizing ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Operation Schedule ............................................................................................................................................ 35
Page i of vii
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Ambient Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 48

Proposed System Description ............................................................................................................................ 36 MV Distribution Network Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 48
Irrigation Reservoir and Pumping Station ......................................................................................................... 38 LV Distribution Network Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 48
General ..................................................................................................................................................... 38
Electrical Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................. 48
Basis of Design ........................................................................................................................................ 38
Adopted Load Densities, Demand and diversity factors. ................................................................................... 48
Operation Philosophy ............................................................................................................................... 38
Project Load Estimate ........................................................................................................................................ 48
SCADA/PLC Control Network ................................................................................................................ 38
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 52
8 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................ 39 Medium Voltage Network ................................................................................................................................. 52
Low Voltage Network........................................................................................................................................ 55
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Substation Transformer ............................................................................................................................ 55
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 39 LV distribution panels .............................................................................................................................. 55
Low Voltage Cables and Wires ................................................................................................................ 55
Existing Network ......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Conduits, Wire ways and Related Accessories for All Systems ............................................................... 55
Cooling Demand ......................................................................................................................................................... 39 Power supply arrangement ................................................................................................................................. 55
MV connection ......................................................................................................................................... 55
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 39
LV Metering (kWh energy meter) ............................................................................................................ 56
Outdoor Design Conditions ............................................................................................................................... 39
Electrical substation layout ................................................................................................................................ 57
Chilled Water Design Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 39
Emergency Power supply................................................................................................................................... 58
Chilled Water Piping Material ........................................................................................................................... 40
Uninterruptible Power Supply ........................................................................................................................... 58
Hydraulic Analysis ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Earthing System ................................................................................................................................................. 58
Maximum Velocity ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Lightning Protection System .............................................................................................................................. 58
Minimum Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 40
Indoor Lighting .................................................................................................................................................. 59
Isolation Valves ................................................................................................................................................. 40
External Lighting ............................................................................................................................................... 59
Drain and Air Vent Valves ................................................................................................................................ 40
Street lighting ...................................................................................................................................... 59
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 40 Decorative Bridge Lighting ................................................................................................................. 60
District Cooling Plant ........................................................................................................................................ 40 Tennis Court Lighting.......................................................................................................................... 61
ETS Room ......................................................................................................................................................... 40 Landscape Lighting ............................................................................................................................. 62
Chilled Water Network ...................................................................................................................................... 41 Lighting Calculations of Utility Buildings ......................................................................................................... 72

9 GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................... 43 11 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................. 95

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 43 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 95
Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 43 Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 95
Existing Network ......................................................................................................................................................... 43 Existing Network ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Gas Demand ................................................................................................................................................................ 43 Scope of Work .............................................................................................................................................................. 96
Converged Network (Telecom / ELV / Security Network) ............................................................................... 96
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 43
GSM Coverage .................................................................................................................................................. 97
Gas Properties .................................................................................................................................................... 43
CCTV ................................................................................................................................................................. 97
LPG Plant Materials and Equipment ................................................................................................................. 43
Utility Buildings Design .................................................................................................................................... 98
LPG Pipes Outside Buildings ............................................................................................................................ 43
Structured Cabling Network (SCN) ......................................................................................................... 98
LPG Pipes Inside Buildings ............................................................................................................................... 43
Fire Alarm & Detection System ............................................................................................................... 98
High Pressure Regulator - First Stage ................................................................................................................ 43
Parking Access Control System. ........................................................................................................................ 99
Medium/Low Pressure Regulator – Second Stage ............................................................................................. 44
Gas Meter........................................................................................................................................................... 44
12 SOLID WASTE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................... 100
System Description ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 100
LPG Plant .......................................................................................................................................................... 44
LPG Distribution Network................................................................................................................................. 45 Codes and Standards ................................................................................................................................................. 100
Waste Generation ...................................................................................................................................................... 100
10 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION ............................................................................................................. 47
Solid Waste Management Strategy ............................................................................................................................ 100
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 47
Design Parameters and Criteria ............................................................................................................................... 100
Existing Network ......................................................................................................................................................... 47
System Description .................................................................................................................................................... 101
Design Parameters and Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 47
Solid Waste Network ....................................................................................................................................... 101
Codes and Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 47
Solid Waste Vacuum Station ........................................................................................................................... 101

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page ii of vii

Gewan Island
13 LANDSCAPING WORKS .................................................................................................................................... 102
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 102
Landscape Typologies ............................................................................................................................................... 102
Linear Park ............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Streestscape ............................................................................................................................................................... 106
Landscape Treatment ................................................................................................................................................ 114
Softscape Palette ....................................................................................................................................................... 117
Hardscape Palette ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
Value Engineering ..................................................................................................................................................... 120
Design Principles ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
14 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN ................................................................................................................................ 125
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 125
Regional Geology ...................................................................................................................................................... 125
Geology Of Project Site ............................................................................................................................................. 125
Existing Investigations And Surveys At Gewan Island .............................................................................................. 125
Proposed Detailed Investigation Program ................................................................................................................ 126
Soil Stratigraphy ....................................................................................................................................................... 131
Groundwater Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 132
Current Groundwater ....................................................................................................................................... 132
Design Ground Water Table ............................................................................................................................ 132
Insitu And Laboratory Testing .................................................................................................................................. 132
Standard Penetration Tests............................................................................................................................... 132
Wet Sieve Analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 133
Atterberg Limits............................................................................................................................................... 133
Moisture Content ............................................................................................................................................. 133
Dry and Bulk Unit Weight of Rock ................................................................................................................. 134
Rock Quality Indices ....................................................................................................................................... 134
Total Core Recovery (TCR) ................................................................................................................... 134
Solid Core Recovery (SCR) ................................................................................................................... 135
Rock Quality Designation (RQD) .......................................................................................................... 136
Intact Rock Strength ........................................................................................................................................ 137
Unconfined Compressive Strength and Point Load Index Tests ............................................................ 137
Modulus of Elasticity ............................................................................................................................. 139
Chemical Aggressivity ..................................................................................................................................... 140
California Bearing Ratio Tests (CBR) ............................................................................................................. 140
Geotechnical Design Codes And Standards .............................................................................................................. 141
Basis For The Design ................................................................................................................................................ 141
Design Basis for Foundations .......................................................................................................................... 141
Shallow Foundation ........................................................................................................................... 141
Bearing Capacity Calculation for Shallow Foundation on Soil ......................................................... 141
Bearing Capacity Calculation for Shallow Foundation on Rock: ...................................................... 141
Settlement Calculation of Shallow Foundations ................................................................................ 142
Creep Settlement of the Reclaimed Fill ............................................................................................. 144
Seismic Site Class ............................................................................................................................................ 144
Liquefaction ..................................................................................................................................................... 145
Liquefaction Assessment ................................................................................................................................. 145
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
Pavement Design ............................................................................................................................................. 147
Subsurface Concrete ........................................................................................................................................ 147
Recommendations For Utility Buildings ................................................................................................................... 147
Generalized Soil Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 147
Rock Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 148
Utility Buildings .............................................................................................................................................. 148
Substation A ...................................................................................................................................... 148
CCTV Building.................................................................................................................................. 148
Underground Irrigation Tank ............................................................................................................. 148
Vacuum Solid Waste Station ............................................................................................................. 148
Fire Fighter Tank Building ................................................................................................................ 148
Hex Building...................................................................................................................................... 149
Substation B ....................................................................................................................................... 149
Facility Building ................................................................................................................................ 149
Substation C ....................................................................................................................................... 149
Pump Station 1................................................................................................................................... 149
Pump Station 2................................................................................................................................... 149
Pump Station 3................................................................................................................................... 149
Pump Station 4................................................................................................................................... 149
Probing and Grouting for HEX Building ......................................................................................................... 150
Excavation and Temporary Shoring................................................................................................................. 150
Dewatering ....................................................................................................................................................... 150
Site Class.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
Pavement Design ............................................................................................................................................. 151
Pavement Design with Asphalt Finishing .......................................................................................... 151
Pavement Design with Granite Setts ................................................................................................. 152
Subsurface Concrete ........................................................................................................................................ 152
Reinforced Substructure Concrete ..................................................................................................... 152
Blinding/Plain Concrete..................................................................................................................... 152
Reuse of Excavated Material ........................................................................................................................... 153
Reclaimed Fill Materials: .................................................................................................................. 153
Marine Deposits ................................................................................................................................. 153
Rock Formation ................................................................................................................................. 153
15 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FOR UTILITIES BUILDINGS .......................................................................... 154
16 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY for Utilities Buildings................................................................................................ 172
General ...................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Goals and Objectives ....................................................................................................................................... 172
DESIGN References ........................................................................................................................................... 172
Building Description ........................................................................................................................................ 172
Vacuum Solid Waste Station .................................................................................................................. 172
CCTV Building ...................................................................................................................................... 172
Electrical Substation –A ......................................................................................................................... 172
Electrical Substation –B ......................................................................................................................... 172
Electrical Substation –C ......................................................................................................................... 172
Landscape Maintenance Building .......................................................................................................... 172
Gas Plant ................................................................................................................................................ 172
Underground Water & Fire Tank with Pumping Station ........................................................................ 172
Underground Irrigation Tank with Pumping Station .............................................................................. 172
Underground HEX Building .............................................................................................................. 172
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -1 ......................................................................................... 173
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -2 ......................................................................................... 173
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -3 ......................................................................................... 173
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -4 ......................................................................................... 173
Classification of Occupancy ............................................................................................................................ 173
Page iii of vii
Gewan Island
Hazard of Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 173
Fire Brigade Access ......................................................................................................................................... 173
Fire Resistance of Structure ............................................................................................................................. 173
Building Separation and Exposure Protection ................................................................................................. 174
Means of Egress ........................................................................................................................................................ 174
Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 174
Doors: ..................................................................................................................................................... 174
Stairways: ............................................................................................................................................... 174
Corridors: ............................................................................................................................................... 174
Handrails: ............................................................................................................................................... 174
Guards: ................................................................................................................................................... 174
Number and Capacity of Means of Egress ....................................................................................................... 174
Occupant Load: ...................................................................................................................................... 174
Occupant Load for Multiple Levels ....................................................................................................... 174
Capacity of Egress Components ............................................................................................................. 174
Number of Means of Egress ............................................................................................................................ 174
Arrangement .................................................................................................................................................... 174
Discharge ......................................................................................................................................................... 175
Illumination of Means of Egress ...................................................................................................................... 175
Emergency Lighting ........................................................................................................................................ 175
Marking of Means of Egress ............................................................................................................................ 175
Internal Spread Of Fire ............................................................................................................................................. 175
Protection of Vertical Openings ....................................................................................................................... 175
Shafts ...................................................................................................................................................... 175
Exits ....................................................................................................................................................... 175
Hazard Areas ................................................................................................................................................... 175
Openings in Fire Separations /Passive Fire Protection/Fire Stopping .................................................... 176
Interior Finishes and Furnishing ...................................................................................................................... 176
Unused Material ..................................................................................................................................... 176
Limitations ............................................................................................................................................. 176
Classification .......................................................................................................................................... 176
Fire Safety Systems.................................................................................................................................................... 176
Alarm and Detection and Communication ....................................................................................................... 176
Extinguishing ................................................................................................................................................... 176
All Buildings to be Protected with: ........................................................................................................ 176
Underground HEX Building: ................................................................................................................. 176
Vacuum Solid Waste Station Building: .................................................................................................. 176
Smoke Control and Ventilation ....................................................................................................................... 176
17 UTILITY BUILDINGS FAÇADE ........................................................................................................................ 177
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
Design Criteria .......................................................................................................................................................... 177
Standards, Codes and Regulatory Bodies ........................................................................................................ 177
Local Regulations ................................................................................................................................... 177
Site Conditions ....................................................................................................................................... 177
Design Life ............................................................................................................................................. 178
Warranty Duration.................................................................................................................................. 178
Acoustic Design Criteria .................................................................................................................................. 178
Building Envelope Design ......................................................................................................................................... 179
Façade Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 179
Building Maintenance Unit Brief .............................................................................................................................. 182
Auxiliary Tools, Maximum Working Height 10m .......................................................................................... 182
Heavy Duty Professional Ladder............................................................................................................ 182
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
Auxiliary Tools, Maximum Working Height 15m ........................................................................................... 182
Tucker Telescopic Poles ......................................................................................................................... 182
18 ACOUSTICS FOR UTILITIES BUILDINGS ..................................................................................................... 183
General Reference regulations, standards and guidance documents (latest edition to be adopted) ......................... 183
Sound Isolation .......................................................................................................................................................... 184
Acoustical Separation (STC and IIC) .............................................................................................................. 184
Walls: ..................................................................................................................................................... 184
Floors:..................................................................................................................................................... 184
Doors: ..................................................................................................................................................... 184
Room Acoustics ............................................................................................................................................... 184
Reverberation Time (Rt): ....................................................................................................................... 184
Recommendations for Interior Finishes: ................................................................................................ 185
External Sound Insulation ......................................................................................................................................... 185
External noise egress........................................................................................................................................ 185
HVAC/ MEP Noise Control ....................................................................................................................................... 185
Background Noise Criteria (NC) : ................................................................................................................... 185
Acoustic Detailing ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
General ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
19 STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR UTILITY BUILDINGS ..................................................................................... 187
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 187
Design Criteria .......................................................................................................................................................... 187
Codes of Practice and Standards ...................................................................................................................... 187
Design Loads ................................................................................................................................................... 187
Dead loads .............................................................................................................................................. 187
Live loads ............................................................................................................................................... 187
Wind loads.............................................................................................................................................. 187
Seismic Loads......................................................................................................................................... 188
Temperature Loads ................................................................................................................................. 188
Earth Pressure and Ground Water Pressure ............................................................................................ 188
Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................ 188
Structural Materials .......................................................................................................................................... 189
Reinforced Concrete ............................................................................................................................... 189
Cement ................................................................................................................................................... 189
Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................................ 189
Performance criteria ......................................................................................................................................... 189
Allowable Deflection ............................................................................................................................. 189
Crack Width ........................................................................................................................................... 189
Waterproofing ........................................................................................................................................ 189
Structures Working Life ......................................................................................................................... 189
Drift and Displacement Limits ............................................................................................................... 190
Structural Systems ........................................................................................................................................... 190
Foundation system .................................................................................................................................. 190
Gravity and Lateral Load Stability Systems ........................................................................................... 190
Floor Slabs and Beams ........................................................................................................................... 190
Structural Analysis and Modeling .......................................................................................................... 190
2D and 3D Models ................................................................................................................................. 190
APPENDIX A: GEOLOGICAL CROSS SECTIONS ................................................................................................... 198
APPENDIX B: Liquefaction analysis results ................................................................................................................. 208
Page iv of vii
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX C: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF WATER SUPPLY SYSETM .................................................... 214

APPENDIX D: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF WASTEWATER SYSETM ...................................................... 222

APPENDIX E: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF STORM DRAINAGE SYSETM ............................................... 227

APPENDIX F: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF IRRIGATION SYSETM ........................................................... 234

APPENDIX G: CHILLED WATER NETWORK HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS RESULTS .......................................... 238

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page v of vii

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

List of Tables TABLE 16-7: INTERIOR FLOOR FINISH ................................................................................................................................ 176

TABLE 17-1: LIST OF STANDARDS & CODES ...................................................................................................................... 177
TABLE 17-2: DETAILS OF HEAVY DUTY PROFESSIONAL LADDER ...................................................................................... 182
TABLE 18-1: BLOCK WALL TYPES ..................................................................................................................................... 184
TABLE 18-2: GYPSUM TYPES ............................................................................................................................................. 184
TABLE 1-1: PLANNING PARAMETERS FOR GEWAN ISLAND .................................................................................................. 2 TABLE 18-3: TABLE BELOW INDICATES THE STC THAT SHOULD BE ADOPTED BETWEEN DIFFERENT ADJACENT AREAS: 184
TABLE 2-1: SUMMARY OF GEOMETRIC FEATURES OF ROAD WORK ..................................................................................... 3 TABLE 18-4: STC OF THE DOORS SHOULD BE AS INDICATED IN THE TABLE BELOW: ......................................................... 184
TABLE 4-1: POPULATION AND AREA DISTRIBUTION............................................................................................................19 TABLE 18-5: REVERBERATION TIME (RT) AS INDICATED IN THE TABLE BELOW: .............................................................. 185
TABLE 4-2: WATER CONSUMPTION RATES .........................................................................................................................19 TABLE 18-6: NRC VALUE FOR INTERIOR FINISHES INDICATED IN THE TABLE BELOW: ..................................................... 185
TABLE 4-3: AVERAGE AND PEAK DAILY WATER DEMAND .................................................................................................19 TABLE 18-7: LEVELS OF NOISE FOR RESIDENTIAL & COMMERCIAL FACILITIES: ............................................................... 185
TABLE 5-1: WASTEWATER RATES .......................................................................................................................................25 TABLE 18-8: BACKGROUND SOUND DESIGN GOALS FOR VARIOUS SPACES ARE RECOMMENDED AS FOLLOWS: ............... 186
TABLE 5-2: AVERAGE WASTEWATER FLOWS ......................................................................................................................25 TABLE 19-1: SEISMIC SPECTRAL ACCELERATIONS BASED ON QCS 2014 .......................................................................... 188
TABLE 5-3: WASTEWATER PUMPING STATIONS - PUMPS DATA ..........................................................................................29 TABLE 19-2: CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ............................................................................................................ 189
TABLE 6-1: RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR RUN-OFF COEFFICIENT (PWA DRAINAGE AFFAIRS DESIGN MANUAL) .............32 TABLE 19-3: MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CALCULATED DEFLECTIONS .................................................................................. 189
TABLE 6-2: APPROXIMATE SELF-CLEANSING VELOCITIES ..................................................................................................32 TABLE 19-4: EXTRACT FROM QCS 2014 - 1.5.2-12 ............................................................................................................ 189
TABLE 7-1: IRRIGATION WATER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................34 TABLE 19-5: EXTRACT FROM ASCE 7-10 - ALLOWABLE STORY DRIFT ............................................................................. 190
TABLE 7-2: ESTIMATED IRRIGATION PEAK DAILY DEMAND ...............................................................................................34
TABLE 8-1: GEWAN ISLAND COOLING LOAD ESTIMATE .....................................................................................................39
TABLE 8-2: ETS ROOMS SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................41
TABLE 9-1: LPG SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................................43
TABLE 9-2: SEPARATION DISTANCE FROM LPG TANKS, FROM IMPORTANT BUILDINGS, AND LINE OF ADJOINING
PROPERTY (WOQOD) ......................................................................................................................................45
TABLE 10-1: LOAD DENSITIES ..............................................................................................................................................48 List of Figures
TABLE 10-2: ELECTRICAL LOAD ESTIMATE ..........................................................................................................................49
TABLE 10-3: MV LOOP WISE LOAD ......................................................................................................................................54
TABLE 10-4: INDOOR ILLUMINATION LEVELS .......................................................................................................................59
TABLE 10-5: ILLUMINATION LEVELS AND LIGHTING CRITERIA FOR THE PROJECT ROAD TYPES .............................................59 FIGURE 2.1: PROPOSED ROAD NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 3
TABLE 10-6: ILLUMINATION LEVELS FOR BIKE PATHS AND PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS .........................................................60 FIGURE 2.2: GEWAN ISLAND ACCESSIBILITY PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT ................................................................................ 4
TABLE 10-7: MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE DROP .........................................................................................................60 FIGURE 2.3: TYPICAL ROAD CROSS SECTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 5
TABLE 10-8: ILLUMINATION LEVELS.....................................................................................................................................61 FIGURE 2.4: PARALLEL PARKING GEOMETRY .......................................................................................................................... 5
TABLE 14-1: BOREHOLES UNDER EACH PLANNED STRUCTURES ........................................................................................126 FIGURE 2.5: PAVEMENT FINISH TYPES ..................................................................................................................................... 6
TABLE 14-2: SUMMARY OF PERFORMED IN-SITU AND LABORATORY TESTS .......................................................................127 FIGURE 3.1: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION KEYPLAN ............................................................................................................ 8
TABLE 14-3: SUMMARY TABLE FOR SPT ............................................................................................................................133 FIGURE 3.2: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (1 OF 9) .................................................................................... 9
TABLE 14-4: CONSISTENCY OF NON-COHESIVE SOIL (BURT LOOK, 2007)..........................................................................133 FIGURE 3.3: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (2 OF 9) .................................................................................. 10
TABLE 14-5: SUMMARY TABLE FOR PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION ....................................................................................133 FIGURE 3.4: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (3 OF 9) .................................................................................. 11
TABLE 14-6: SUMMARY TABLE FOR MOISTURE CONTENT ..................................................................................................134 FIGURE 3.5: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (4 OF 9) .................................................................................. 12
TABLE 14-7: SUMMARY TABLE FOR TCR ...........................................................................................................................135 FIGURE 3.6: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (5 OF 9) .................................................................................. 13
TABLE 14-8: SUMMARY TABLE FOR SCR............................................................................................................................136 FIGURE 3.7: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (6 OF 9) .................................................................................. 14
TABLE 14-9: SUMMARY TABLE FOR RQD ...........................................................................................................................136 FIGURE 3.8: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (7 OF 9) .................................................................................. 15
TABLE 14-10: CORRELATION BETWEEN ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION (RQD) AND DISCONTINUITY SPACING ...................137 FIGURE 3.9: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (8 OF 9) .................................................................................. 16
TABLE 14-11: SUMMARY TABLE FOR IS(50) .........................................................................................................................138 FIGURE 3.10: TYPICAL UTILITY DISPOSITION CROSS SECTIONS (9OF 9) .............................................................................. 17
TABLE 14-12: SUMMARY TABLE FOR CALCULATED UCS .....................................................................................................138 FIGURE 3.11: UTILITY BUILDINGS FACILITIES ..................................................................................................................... 18
TABLE 14-13: SUMMARY TABLE FOR MEASURED UCS ........................................................................................................139 FIGURE 4.1: CONNECTION TO THE TEMPORARY 300MM WATER PIPE .................................................................................... 22
TABLE 14-14: STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION OF ROCK BASED ON UCS VALUES......................................................................139 FIGURE 4.2: PROPOSED POTABLE WATER NETWORK ............................................................................................................. 24
TABLE 14-15: SUMMARY TABLE FOR INTACT YOUNG MODULUS .........................................................................................140 FIGURE 5.1: PROPOSED WASTEWATER DISCHARGING INTO ASHGHAL NETWORK ................................................................. 27
TABLE 14-16: SUMMARY TABLE FOR CHEMICAL AGGRESSIVITY IN SOIL AND ROCK SAMPLES ............................................140 FIGURE 5.2: PROPOSED WASTEWATER NETWORK.................................................................................................................. 28
TABLE 14-17: SUMMARY TABLE FOR PERCENTAGE OF CHEMICAL AGGRESSIVITY IN GROUNDWATER ................................140 FIGURE 5.3: PROPOSED PUMPING STATION LOCATIONS ......................................................................................................... 30
TABLE 14-18: SUMMARY TABLE FOR PERCENTAGE OF CHEMICAL AGGRESSIVITY IN SEA WATER.......................................140 FIGURE 6.1: INTENSITY-DURATION-FREQUENCY (IDF) CURVES ........................................................................................... 31
TABLE 14-19: SUMMARY TABLE FOR CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO (CBR) .........................................................................140 FIGURE 6.2: STORMWATER DRAINAGE NETWORK ................................................................................................................. 33
TABLE 14-20: CORRECTION FACTORS (AFTER SOWERS 1979) ..............................................................................................142 FIGURE 7.1: PROPOSED IRRIGATION NETWORK ...................................................................................................................... 37
TABLE 14-21: TYPICAL RATIOS FOR SELF-WEIGHT CREEP SETTLEMENTS (GOODGER AND LEACH, 1990) ...........................144 FIGURE 8.1: CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 42
TABLE 14-22: SUMMARY OF THE GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR THE FOUNDING SOIL LAYERS ........................148 FIGURE 9.1: LPG PLANT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM .................................................................................................................... 44
TABLE 14-23: SELECTED DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR THE IDENTIFIED LAYERS .....................................................................148 FIGURE 9.2: LPG PLANT LAYOUT .......................................................................................................................................... 45
TABLE 14-24: STRUCTURE WISE SUBGRADE MODULUS FOR SHALLOW FOUNDATION..........................................................150 FIGURE 9.3: LPG SYSTEM LAYOUT ........................................................................................................................................ 46
TABLE 14-25: SUMMARY OF SPT VALUES (WITHIN TOP 30M) ..............................................................................................151 FIGURE 10.1: EXISTING MV CABLES ALLOCATED AS A MV LOOP GEWAN ISLAND ........................................................ 47
TABLE 16-1: TYPE II (000) ..................................................................................................................................................173 FIGURE 10.2: LOCATION OF THE EXISTING SUBSTATIONS AND MV CABLE ROUTE INSIDE GEWAN ISLAND .................. 47
TABLE 16-2: HORIZONTAL SEPARATION .............................................................................................................................174 FIGURE 10.3: LOCATION OF OUTDOOR SUBSTATIONS ...................................................................................................... 52
TABLE 16-3: OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR..............................................................................................................................174 FIGURE 10.4: MV LOOPS NETWORK.................................................................................................................................. 53
TABLE 16-4: ARRANGEMENT OF MEANS OF EGRESS & TRAVEL DISTANCE VERIFICATION ................................................175 FIGURE 10.5: SUBSTATION-A: EQUIPMENT LAYOUT FIGURE 10.6: SUBSTATION-B: EQUIPMENT LAYOUT ............ 57
TABLE 16-5: SUMMARY TABLE ...........................................................................................................................................175 FIGURE 10.7: SUBSTATION-C: EQUIPMENT LAYOUT ........................................................................................................ 57
TABLE 16-6: INTERNAL WALL & CEILING FINISH ...............................................................................................................176 FIGURE 10.8: ROADS TYPES IN GEWAN ISLAND ................................................................................................................ 59

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page vi of vii

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

FIGURE 10.9: CONCEPTUAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR REMOTE OUTDOOR MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR STREET FIGURE 19.5: 2D SAFE FOUNDATION MODEL OF HEX BUILDING .................................................................................... 191
LIGHTING 60 FIGURE 19.6: REVIT MODEL FOR SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 1 ....................................................................................... 192
FIGURE 10.10: BRIDGE DECORATIVE LIGHTING ..................................................................................................................61 FIGURE 19.7: SAP MODEL OF SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 1 ............................................................................................ 192
FIGURE 10.11: REFERENCE IMAGE FOR BRIDGE DECORATIVE LIGHTING .........................................................................61 FIGURE 19.8: REVIT MODEL FOR WATER AND FIREFIGHTING RESERVOIR ........................................................................ 192
FIGURE 10.12: RENDERED IMAGE FOR PARK .......................................................................................................................66 FIGURE 19.9: SAP MODEL FOR THE WATER AND FIREFIGHTING RESERVOIR .................................................................... 192
FIGURE 10.13: RENDERED IMAGE FOR PARK .......................................................................................................................67 FIGURE 19.10: SERVICE BEARING PRESSURES CONTOURS FOR WATER AND FIREFIGHTING RESERVOIR ............................. 193
FIGURE 10.14: RENDERED IMAGE FOR PARK .......................................................................................................................68 FIGURE 19.11: REVIT MODEL FOR IRRIGATION RESERVOIR ................................................................................................ 193
FIGURE 10.15: LIGHTING CALCULATIONS – SUNKEN GARDEN AND WATER FEATURE .....................................................69 FIGURE 19.12: FOUNDATION MODEL FOR IRRIGATION TANK .............................................................................................. 193
FIGURE 10.16: LIGHTING CALCULATIONS-PATHWAY .........................................................................................................70 FIGURE 19.13: SERVICE BEARING STRESSES CONTOURS FOR IRRIGATION TANK ................................................................ 193
FIGURE 10.17: RENDER FOR STREET LIGHTING AND COLUMN DETAILS.................................................................................71 FIGURE 19.14: REVIT MODEL FOR SUBSTATION A .............................................................................................................. 194
FIGURE 11.1: PRIMARY (MH-1308) & SECONDARY (MH-4307) TELECOMMUNICATION TIE-IN POINTS. ......................95 FIGURE 19.15: 3D ETABS MODEL FOR SUBSTATION A ...................................................................................................... 194
FIGURE 11.2: ROAD CROSS SECTION – TELECOM CORRIDOR...........................................................................................97 FIGURE 19.16: SAFE MODEL FOR SUBSTATION A ROOF SLAB ........................................................................................... 194
FIGURE 11.3: GSM TOWERS LOCATION ............................................................................................................................97 FIGURE 19.17: SAFE FOUNDATIONS MODEL FOR SUBSTATION A....................................................................................... 194
FIGURE 11.4: BASIC STRUCTURED CABLING NETWORK DIAGRAM ..................................................................................98 FIGURE 19.18: REVIT MODEL FOR VACUUM SOLID WASTE STATION.................................................................................. 195
FIGURE 11.5: BASIC FIRE ALARM DIAGRAM ......................................................................................................................99 FIGURE 19.19: SAFE MODEL FOR VACUUM SOLID WASTE STATION FOUNDATIONS .......................................................... 195
FIGURE 11.6: PARKING GATE BARRIER DIAGRAM ............................................................................................................99 FIGURE 19.20: SERVICE BEARING STRESSES CONTOURS FOR VACUUM SOLID WASTE STATION ........................................ 195
FIGURE 14.1: GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE GEWAN ISLAND PROJECT AREA, QATAR. (ORIGINAL SCALE 1: 2,10,000) ..........125 FIGURE 19.21: REVIT MODEL FOR CCTV BUILDING ........................................................................................................... 196
FIGURE 14.2: EXISTING SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION .......................................................................................................128 FIGURE 19.22: 3D ETABS MODEL FOR CCTV BUILDING................................................................................................... 196
FIGURE 14.3: PLANNED SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION (BOREHOLE LOCATIONS) ...............................................................129 FIGURE 19.23: 2D SAFE MODEL FOR CCTV BUILDING ROOF SLAB .................................................................................. 196
FIGURE 14.4: PLANNED SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION (TEST PIT LOCATIONS) ..................................................................130 FIGURE 19.24: SAFE MODEL FOR CCTV BUILDING FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................... 196
FIGURE 14.5: PLANNED GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION .....................................................................................................131 FIGURE 19.25: SERVICE BEARING STRESSES CONTOURS FOR VACUUM SOLID WASTE STATION ........................................ 197
FIGURE 14.6: TYPICAL CORE PHOTO FOR UNIT- U1C .........................................................................................................131
FIGURE 14.7: TYPICAL CORE PHOTO FOR UNIT- U2A .........................................................................................................131
FIGURE 14.8: TYPICAL CORE PHOTO FOR UNIT- U2B .........................................................................................................131
FIGURE 14.9: TYPICAL CORE PHOTO FOR UNIT- U3 ...........................................................................................................132
FIGURE 14.10: TYPICAL CORE PHOTO FOR UNIT- U4 ...........................................................................................................132
FIGURE 14.11: SPT VERSUS DEPTH .....................................................................................................................................132
FIGURE 14.12: DISTRIBUTION OF SPT RESULTS ...................................................................................................................132
FIGURE 14.13: MOISTURE CONTENT VERSUS DEPTH ...........................................................................................................133
FIGURE 14.14: DISTRIBUTION OF MOISTURE CONTENT RESULT FOR EACH UNIT .................................................................134
FIGURE 14.15: TCR VERSUS DEPTH.....................................................................................................................................134
FIGURE 14.16: DISTRIBUTION OF THE TCR RESULTS ...........................................................................................................135
FIGURE 14.17: SCR VERSUS DEPTH .....................................................................................................................................135
FIGURE 14.18: DISTRIBUTION OF THE SCR RESULTS ...........................................................................................................135
FIGURE 14.19: RQD VERSUS DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................136
FIGURE 14.20: DISTRIBUTION OF THE RQD RESULTS...........................................................................................................136
FIGURE 14.21: UCS VERSUS DEPTH.....................................................................................................................................137
FIGURE 14.22: IS(50) VERSUS DEPTH...................................................................................................................................137
FIGURE 14.23: UCS, DERIVED FROM IS(50), VERSUS DEPTH ...............................................................................................137
FIGURE 14.24: DISTRIBUTION OF THE MEASURED UCS RESULTS ........................................................................................138
FIGURE 14.25: DISTRIBUTION OF THE POINT LOAD INDEX RESULTS ....................................................................................138
FIGURE 14.26: UCS VALUES DERIVED FROM THE POINT LOAD INDEX RESULT ...................................................................138
FIGURE 14.27: YOUNG MODULUS VERSUS DEPTH ...............................................................................................................139
FIGURE 14.28: DISTRIBUTION OF THE YOUNG MODULUS RESULTS ......................................................................................139
FIGURE 14.29: VARIATION OF STRAIN INFLUENCE FACTOR WITH DEPTH..............................................................................142
FIGURE 14.30: SEISMIC HAZARD DISTRIBUTION MAP OF QATAR (WHO 2010) ...................................................................145
FIGURE 14.31: CORRECTION FACTORS OF THE FIELD SPT N-VALUE ...................................................................................146
FIGURE 14.32: KΣ VERSUS EFFECTIVE CONFINING PRESSURE .............................................................................................147
FIGURE 14.33: GENERALIZED SOIL PROFILE FOR UTILITY BUILDINGS .................................................................................147
FIGURE 17.1: WALL SECTIONS OF CURTAIN WALL & CMU CAVITY WALL ......................................................................179
FIGURE 17.2: 3D VIEWS OF ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION -A & B ..........................................................................................179
FIGURE 17.3: 3D VIEWS OF ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION -C & CCTV BUILDING ..................................................................180
FIGURE 17.4: 3D VIEW OF VACUUM SOLID WASTE BUILDING ...........................................................................................181
FIGURE 17.5: WALL SECTIONS WITH STONE CLADDING & ACP CLADDING ......................................................................181
FIGURE 17.6: DETAILS OF HEAVY DUTY PROFESSIONAL LADDER .....................................................................................182
FIGURE 17.7: DETAILS OF TUCKER TELESCOPIC POLE .......................................................................................................182
FIGURE 19.1: EXTRACT FROM QCS 2014 - WIND SPEED ....................................................................................................187
FIGURE 19.2: EXTRACT FROM QCS 2014 – TEMPERATURES ..............................................................................................188
FIGURE 19.3: REVIT MODEL FOR HEX BUILDING ..............................................................................................................191
FIGURE 19.4: SAP MODEL OF HEX BUILDING ...................................................................................................................191

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page vii of vii

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

REPORT OBJECTIVES AND STRUCTURE

1 INTRODUCTION
The objective of the report is to present the design development for the infrastructure works. The report is
GENERAL organized into the following sections:

The United Development Company (UDC) is leading the effort to develop the Gewan Island Project in 1 Introduction
order to transform the site into a prominent entertainment, mixed use and residential destination. 2 Road Design
3 Utilities Arrangement
The Gewan Island is located in Doha, Qatar, at the northwestern part of the Pearl Island which is one of 4 Water Supply System
UDC’s landmark projects and one of the largest real estate developments in the Gulf region. 5 Wastewater Collection System
6 Stormwater Drainage System
The land uses include a water park, a mixed use area that contains multi-family residential buildings, 7 Irrigation System
commercial and food and beverage, and single family residential villas. 8 Chilled Water System
9 Gas Supply System
UDC commissioned DAR to review the “Vision Master Plan” proposed for Gewan Island and to undertake
10 Power Supply and Distribution
the Master planning, infrastructure and Architecture services for this project.
11 Telecommunication Systems
SCOPE OF WORK 12 Solid Waste System
13 Landscaping Works
The overall project scope of work includes the following: 14 Geotechnical Considerations
15 Architectural Design for Utilities Buildings
 Master planning Services 16 Fire and Life Safety for Utilities Buildings
 Infrastructure Design Services 17 Utilities Building’s Facade
 Building Design Services 18 Acoustics for Utilities Buildings
19 Structural Design for Utility Buildings
The Infrastructure Services that cover the Concept, Design Development and Detailed Design of
Infrastructure works including: Site wayfinding is presented in a separate report as part of this Design Development Submission.

 Roads Design; PLANNING PARAMETERS

 Site Landscape;
The infrastructure design development is prepared based on the latest master plan and planning parameters
 Water Supply, Fire Fighting, Wastewater, Storm-Water Drainage and Irrigation Networks; prepared following Client confirmation on the MP changes; namely, relocation of the DCP, deletion of
 Power Networks; Theme Park replaced by Golf Course, change of Plot 2 to villas instead of F&B units and provision of new
 Telecommunication and Low Current Networks; serviced furnished apartment instead of the DCP.
 Gas Network;
 Chilled Water network;
 Solid Waste Vacuum Network;
 Utilities Buildings;
 Site wayfinding.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 1 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 1-1: Planning Parameters for Gewan Island

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 2 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

2 ROAD DESIGN
 Qatar Highway Design Manual 2015
INTRODUCTION
 Qatar Traffic Control Manual 2015
This chapter demonstrates the various elements pertaining to the design criteria and the hierarchy of the
 A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (AASHTO 2011)
road network to be constructed under Gewan Island infrastructure package.

Gewan Island development is part of the Pearl Island and located to the northwest of the manmade Island.
It will be designated for entertainment, mixed-use and residential development.
The development is connected via a road network (land bridges and water bridges) to the existing Pearl
service roads and via other links to the Abraj Quartier cluster of the main pearl island. Based on the adopted
Master Plan, the road network of Gewan Island development will consist mainly of one way system that
serve the various land uses
The proposed network with the access links is shown in Figure 2.1.
The districts of Gewan Island are dedicated for residential and leisure use.
On all road types, maximum super-elevation will be limited to 5.0% in conformance to the urban nature
of the development, while normal road cross slope of 2.0% will be used.
Furthermore, the maximum vertical grade will be limited to 6% in accordance with QHDM for this type
of development while the minimum vertical grade will be limited to 0.30% on all roads to facilitate
reasonable drainage of the site.
Table 2-1 below summarizes various geometric features of different road types within Gewan Island

Table 2-1: Summary of Geometric Features of Road Work

Road Type Minor Collector-Distributor Local

Design Speed 30 30

Design Vehicle Bus Bus

Traffic Lane Width 3.5 3.5
Parallel parking Width 2.5 N/A

Road Type Minor Collector-Distributor Local

Maximum Grade (%) 6.00 6.00

Minimum Grade (%) 0.30 0.30
Crest (Minimum) 2 2
Sag (Minimum) 2.5 2.5

Figure 2.1: Proposed Road Network

DESIGN CRITERIA

The geometric design of roads, intersections and the signing and marking have been carried out in
accordance with 2015 version of Qatar Highway design Manual (QHDM) issued by Ministry Of Transport.

Where necessary and if not covered by QHDM, the recommendations provided by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) are adopted. The following list
summarizes the names of standards:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 3 of 257

Gewan Island
ACCESS
Gewan Island development will be connected to the existing service road of the pearl main causeway at
two locations. The first access road will be provided for the traffic bound to the pearl island via a dedicated
left turn flyover that takes off from the service lanes of the main pearl entrance bridge and land adjacent
to the Golf course plot of Gewan Island development. An exit will be proposed in the opposite direction
and will join the pearl outbound traffic along the service road of the main entrance bridge.
This arrangement will allow the egress traffic to access off the existing service roads serving the existing
Pearl Island. These service roads consist of 2 travel lanes. For traffic approaching from the proposed Lusail
Underpass, traffic will be using the WBFR service road, Porto Arabia roundabout, the WBFL service road
in order to reach the development. For traffic exiting Gewan Island, all will be destined to at Lusail
Interchange at grade junction. This proposed arrangement is shown in Figure 2.2 below.
Figure 2.2: Gewan Island Accessibility Proposed Arrangement
Additional access points are provided via a short water bridges connected to the existing road network of
the Pearl Island and the island off the shore of the Ritz Hotel and provide Gewan Island development with
further connectivity.
TOPOGRAPHY / GRADING
The site allocated to Gewan Island is partially occupied with a treatment plant, cement batching plant and
construction materials in addition to temporary offices. The plants, materials and temporary offices will
be dismantled and removed to allow for the construction activities to take off. Beyond the temporary
installations and the pilled material the existing topography is fairly flat with elevations averaging around
+2.80m above sea level.
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
Reclamation works are proposed to form the final shape of the Island as per the adopted Master Plan up
to a ground level of +3.00 above sea level.
The final road grading will be based on the drainage concept where the road finished level will vary
between +3.30 and +4.90. Tentative grading levels for Gewan Island internal roads based on the site
constraints and the drainage concept was prepared at this stage and presented in the respective section of
the Storm water Drainage chapter.
The plots of the central area will excluded from the proposed rough grading due to the proposed
underground garage that extend below the whole area, also the theme park plot is excluded from the rough
grading since a large portion of this plot will be reclaimed to level +3.00 at once.
ROAD HIERARCHY
It is obvious from the different manuals that for the given corridors, one cannot propose any major collector
as they required more width to accommodate the proposed road furniture. Therefore, being an urban
development and with the expected traffic volume, part of the looping tertiary roads has been classified as
minor collector/distributor whereas the rest of the roads in this particular area have been classified as local
roads to serve the development.
The minor collector classification is given to most of the island internal stretches of road with 15 to 16m
ROW, these are the stretches that loop the island and cross from the theme park to the central area and to
the private villa plots, and this road is linked to the external main access. The minor collector/distributor
road is proposed with on-street parking provided on one side.
The remaining roads in the network have their ROW as 16m but will be classified as local roads since they
serve local traffic destined to the island villas or to the Abraj Quartier district of the main pearl island.
ROAD SECTIONS
As previously highlighted, the given corridor widths is dividing the roads in Gewan Island into two main
categories: minor collector/distributor and Local road. The general road type provided by the master plan
for the minor collector/distributor road is 2-lanes one way road while the local road is single carriageway
with ROW of 16m. All travel lanes within the network are proposed with 3.50m width and on-street
parallel parking facility is proposed as 2.5m width and provided on one side except for the local roads.
The remaining width is occupied by shared use pathway.
Figure 2.3 below illustrates the typical cross sections of different road types within Gewan Island.
Page 4 of 257
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

As far as the on-street provision is concerned, the general principle that would be applied is “on-street
parking is not permitted except in designated parking spaces”. On-street parking would be limited and
only provided in priority for users such as deliveries, taxis, and corporate visitors (where appropriate
related to a specific demand) and short-stay parking (e.g. pick-up, drop-off).

The geometry of car parking layout is provided in the below provided figure.

Figure 2.4: Parallel Parking Geometry

ROAD SAFETY

Circulation in Gewan Island Island is proposed to be one way through all the road network. Special
attention will be given in next design stage to the priority intersection where proper geometric design and
signalization will be applicable to ensure road safety.

Traffic control measures including warning signs and marking will be introduced along the road network
to emphasize the speed limit and warn users about potential hazards. Additional measures can be
introduced to enforce the speed limit if deemed required.

PAVEMENT FINISH TYPES

Two types of finishes are adopted for the Roads in the proposed development.

 Asphalt
 Granite paver blocks.

Granite paver blocks finishes have been proposed for the road at the central park area. And for all the
remaining roads asphalt finishes have been proposed.
Figure 2.3: Typical Road Cross Sections The road layout with pavement finish type is shown in Figure 2.5.

PARKING

Every vehicle trip requires parking at its destination, so parking facilities are an integrated component of
the roadway system. Parking is one of the first experiences that people have when traveling to a destination.
Convenient and affordable parking are considered a sign of welcome. Parking that is difficult to find,
inadequate, inconvenient or expensive would frustrate users.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 5 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 2.5: Pavement Finish Types

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 6 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

3 UTILITIES ARRANGEMENT

This section presents the utility sections proposed for internal roads of Gewan Island and utility building
facilities considered within Island.

Utility Cross sections

As per the adopted master plan following types of road sections are proposed for the Local roads of project:

- Local Roads with 15m ROW.

- Local Roads with 16m ROW.
- Local Roads with 17m ROW.
- Local Roads with 25m ROW.

The utility disposition was adjusted to accommodate the necessary utilities to fit the project requirements
within the proposed tight roads ROW. These sections will be further confirmed at the next design stages.

Figure 3.1 to Figure 3.5 present the proposed utilities disposition cross sections for 15m, 16m, 17m and
25m roads. Also, existing and proposed utilities corridors along the adjacent existing roads are presented
at this conceptual stage.

The utilities disposition cross sections will be fine-tuned, if required, at the next design stage.

Utility Buildings Facilities

Based on the project requirements, the below listed utility facilities are considered within the MP of Gewan
Island and presented in Figure 3.11.

- 1 Vacuum Solid Waste station located within the Utility Facility Area.
- 1 Underground Potable Water Reservoir and pumping station located under the Golf Course plot.
- 1 HEX Building located under the Club house parking.
- 1 Underground Irrigation Reservoir and pumping station located under the Club house parking.
- 4 Sewage pumping stations: 1 located under the Central Park, 1 near utility area under Golf
Course Plot and 2 within the Villas Island area.
- 2 Electrical Outdoor Substations located within the Park area.
- 1 Electrical Outdoor Substation located within the Utility Facility Area at the Golf Course Plot.
- 1 CCTV located within the Utility Facility Area at the Golf Course Plot.
- 1 Gas Plant located within the utility facility area at Golf Course Plot.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 7 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.1: Typical Utility Disposition Keyplan

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 8 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.2: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (1 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 9 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.3: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (2 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 10 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.4: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (3 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 11 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.5: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (4 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 12 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.6: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (5 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 13 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.7: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (6 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 14 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.8: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (7 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 15 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.9: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (8 of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 16 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.10: Typical Utility Disposition Cross Sections (9of 9)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 17 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 3.11: Utility Buildings Facilities

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 18 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 4-2: Water Consumption Rates

4 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Water Rates
INTRODUCTION
Villa 700 L/Capita/d
Gewan Island consists of residential, retail, public amenities and a golf course that require potable water Apartment 350 L/Capita/d
provision. This section of the report presents the proposed water supply system within the development.
Mosque 20 L/Worshiper
CODES AND STANDARDS Clubhouse 20 L/Member
Golf Course 50 L/Capita/d
The design of potable water distribution system shall follow the Rules and Regulations for the Design
Standards of Qatar General Electrical and Water Corporation-Kahramaa.

WATER DEMAND
The water consumption rates are applied to the populations and areas indicated in Table 4-1 above to
The potable water demand is calculated based on population for residential and amenities plots and based compute the average and peak daily water demands.
on area for the retail plots.
The water demand rates specified above take into consideration potable water as well as internal irrigation
Table 4-1 below summarizes the population and area distribution for the different plots. and parking demands for residential plots. Moreover, the calculated demand for the golf course, mosque
and clubhouse are based on a capita basis (i.e. per capita for golf course, per worshiper for the mosque and
Table 4-1: Population and Area Distribution per club member for the clubhouse).

In order to calculate the peak daily demand, a peak factor of 1.5 is applied to the average daily demand.
2
Property Type Population (Capita) Area (m )
The results are presented in Table 4-3 below.

Table 4-3: Average and Peak Daily Water Demand

Island Villas 325 -

Waterfront Villas 312 - Average Water Demand Peak Water Demand

Property Type
(m3/d) (m3/d)
Beachfront Villas 252 -
Island Villas 228 342
Plot 2 Villas 240 -
Waterfront Villas 218 327
Service apt. S01 150 -
Beachfront Villas 176 264
Mixed Use Apartments 2,132 -
Plot 2 Villas 168 252
Mixed Use Apartments – Retail - 10,784
Service apt. S01 53 79.5
Mosque 353 -
Mixed Use Apartments 746 1119
Clubhouse 651 -
Mixed Use Apartments - Retail 86 129
Golf Course 100 -
Mosque 7 10.5

Clubhouse 13 19.5
Based on Kahramaa design manual for water networks, Table 4-2 below displays the water consumption
rates that are adopted to calculate the water demand for Gewan Island. Golf Course 5 7.5

Total 1700 2550

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 19 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Based on the above table, the total average potable water demand of the Island is estimated at 1,700 m3/day Pipe Cover

DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA Water mains shall have a minimum cover of 1.2 m; wherever pipe cover is less, concrete protection will
be provided. Bedding of pipe shall be as per Kahramaa standard.
The potable water network consists of pressure mains traversing the roads of Gewan Island. The design of
this network is prepared based on the following design parameters and criteria. Valves

Pipe Sizing Valves shall be provided to control the flow, facilitate hydro-testing and to limit service cut-off during
maintenance, repair and interconnection works. Gate valves will be used in pipelines ranging in sizes from
The Hazen-Williams formula will be used in the analysis of pressure pipes sizing. The formula is given as 100mm to 300mm.
follows:
Gate valves shall be provided at connection points, at branches of crosses and tees and at long runs with a
Q  0.85  C  A  R S
0.63 0.54 maximum spacing of 300m as per Kahramaa guidelines. The number of valves required is one less than
the number of pipes converging at the intersection.
Where,
Washout valves shall be provided at low points to allow for draining and flushing of the pipeline. The
3
Q is the discharge within the pipe section (m /s) washout valves will be installed within a chamber. The discharge from the washout valve will be pumped
out.
C is the Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
Air valves will be installed, if required, at high points to ensure purging of entrapped air during filling and
2
A is the flow area (m ) operation. Air valves also aid in reducing the effect of surges on the pipeline. Air valves will be installed
in dedicated chambers with isolation valves.
R is the hydraulic radius (m)
All valves provision and installation shall be in accordance with the standard details of Kahramaa.
S is the friction slope (m/m) However, based on the recently received guidelines, no air valve/wash out valve is required if the pipe size
is less than or equal to 300 mm.
The hydraulic analysis for the water supply network is performed using WaterGEMS v8i to assess the
following operation conditions / scenarios. (Refer appendix C for hydraulic calculations) Pressure Requirement

The water network shall be modeled and analyzed based on two different scenarios: Average Daily As per Kahramaa requirements for distribution mains, the minimum acceptable residual pressure at any
Demand + Fire flow (ADD + Fire) and based on Peak Daily Demand (PDD). point in the system shall be 1.5 bars.

 Scenario 1: ADD + Fire
Based on the above, the average daily demand is estimated at around 1,700m3/d (i.e. 19.70L/s).
Furthermore, as per Kahramaa regulations, the water network shall be hydraulically sized to cater
for two fire events, each of which requires 17 L/s (total of 34 l/sec). This adds up to a total of
53.70L/s.
 Scenario 2: PDD
The above calculations show a peak daily demand of approximately 2,550m3/d. (i.e. 29.50 L/s)
Pipe Material
All water supply pipework is considered to be of Ductile Iron (D.I.) as per Kahramaa requirements. Hazen
William coefficient adopted for the design is 130. The minimum size of main water pipeline shall be 150
mm for this network.
House connections pipe material shall be MDPE or copper subject to Kahramaa approval for an outer
diameter of 63 mm and below.
The maximum allowable head loss at peak flow shall be 2-5m/km as per Kahramaa design manual.
Fire Hydrants
External hydrants will be provided along the streets to cover the external firefighting requirements as per
the current practice in Doha. The water supply network is sized to provide the average daily demand in
addition to the demand for two hydrants operating simultaneously estimated at 17 l/sec at each hydrant,
thus adding an additional 34 L/s to the average daily demand.
The distribution mains shall be designed to ensure a minimum residual pressure of 1.5 bars at Fire Hydrant.
Hydrants will be provided at a spacing of 150 m.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The proposed water supply network for Gewan Island is designed for both potable water and firefighting
requirements. The source for both potable water and firefighting is considered as below:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 20 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

As per the as built drawings of the Pearl, a temporary transmission pipe of 300mm diameter is installed at
the entrance of Gewan Island towards the Pearl Island side. A Tie in point to the 300mm diameter
transmission pipe is proposed to feed Gewan Island with potable water and firefighting requirements.
Figure 4.1 shows the existing 300mm diameter transmission pipe and the 300mm proposed transmission
pipe feeding the water reservoir. The length of the transmission pipe required from the connection point
to the reservoir is around 265m.
The water reservoir proposed for Gewan Island shall be of 2,000m3 capacity to cater for the water and
firefighting demands of Gewan Island. Pump required for the water reservoir and pumping station are
designed to cater for Average daily demand of 19.70L/s and two fire events, each of which requires 17
L/s (total of 34 l/sec). This adds up to a total of 53.70 L/s.
The proposed underground reservoir and pumping stations are sized based on the above water
requirements from different areas of island. The same will be constructed under the golf course plot.

Proposed System

The proposed potable water and firefighting system consists of a transmission line extending from TPQ
300mm transmission pipe and a distribution network of pressure pipes. The proposed 300mm transmission
line will be feeding a centralized underground reservoir and pumping station dedicated for the Island plots.
The transmission pipe is sized based on 24 hours supply.

The proposed water reservoir serving Gewan Island is sized based on the 1 day storage noting that 2 day
water storage tanks will be provided in buildings / villas.

Thus, the reservoir is sized based on 1-day average demand plus the volume required for firefighting. The
total capacity of the water reservoir will be estimated at 1,945m3. As advised by the Client, the proposed
underground reservoir of capacity 2,000m3 will be placed in the golf course area.

A system of pressure pipes will be traversing the roads of Gewan and supplying the different plots from
the proposed reservoir. The water network system proposed shall be looped and shall extend across the
Island. This is to ensure the minimum required residual pressure in the network and to provide a water
connections to all plots.

The hydraulic results show that the proposed water network sizing is adequate to provide the needed water
demand at suitable residual pressure (not less than 1.5 bars) at any point in the system for all scenarios
(PDD, ADD + Fire Demand).

The proposed potable water system layout is shown in Figure 4.2.

Water Supply and Hydrant Network

The proposed water and firefighting network pipe sizes vary between 200mm and 300mm.

Each plot is equipped with a domestic water tank (two day storage), which is available to cover the peak
daily water demand.

The proposed water network feeds all plots as well as the external fire hydrants distributed around Island.

Water and firefighting network is proposed to be installed along all roads in order to cover the whole site.

External hydrants will be provided along the streets to cover the external firefighting requirements as per
the current practice in Doha.

Water Reservoir and Pumping Station

The water reservoir and associated pumping station is proposed to be located in the golf course area.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 21 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 4.1: Connection to the Temporary 300mm Water Pipe

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 22 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Water Reservoir and Pumping Station All mechanical and electrical rooms will be provided with firefighting system as per the requirements of
the local civil defense regulations.
General
Control Philosophy
This section describes the design criteria and basis of design for the mechanical works related to the water
pumping station envisaged for Gewan Island development. Water pumps shall be initiated from the PLC cabinet located within the pumping station electrical room
and is automatically controlled by pressure as measured by pressure transmitter located downstream of the
Design Criteria and Basis of Design pumps.

The water pumping station will consist of an underground structure accessible from the surface level. It Upon failure of one of the duty pumps, the standby pump shall cut in and an alarm shall be activated on
will include one set of pumps which will cater for both domestic water and firefighting water demands. the PLC HMI. Water duty and standby pumps shall be alternated to maintain equal running time.

The water pump station will house three variable speed pumps with their auxiliary equipment. Out of the SCADA/PLC Control Network
three pumps, two are considered as duty pumps and shall operate in parallel to deliver the station maximum
rated flow, whereas the third pump is considered as stand-by unit. Each of the three pumpsets shall be It is envisaged that the control systems of the water pumping station will be interfaced with the OCCC
rated to deliver 27 l/s at 45 m head. FMS using site wide converged network (provided by others) using ELV network ducts.

The pump head is calculated by summing up the gravity heads, friction heads, fitting losses, valve losses, Site wide converged network for the water supply system will use the ELV network duct bank to connect
and the required residual pressure. A safety factor of approximately 10% is then added to the calculated to the Operational Command Control Center Facility Management Solution (OCCC FMS) control room
pump head. in the Pearl Qatar.

The pump room shall include an additional space for manipulation which can be used during maintenance The Water pumping station will have a dedicated standalone PLC cabinet with HMI, Dual redundant PLC
and repair works. The additional space can be also used for future expansion, if needed. will be used in the standalone PLC cabinet.

Water pumps shall be axially split case type, vertically mounted and driven by 415V air cooled electric
motors.

Pumps will be selected such that the operating point on the pumps curve corresponds to the maximum
pump efficiency range.

The pumps shall be directly coupled to their driving electric motors by means of flexible couplings. The

Pumps and electric motors shall be mounted on a common base plate.

Each pump shall be complete with suction and discharge isolating valves. Isolation butterfly valves on the
discharge side shall be fitted with locally controlled electric actuators, while isolation butterfly valves on
the suction side shall have manual actuators. A nozzle type check valve shall be also installed downstream
of each water pump.

Valves and fittings shall be well supported to avoid having their own weight carried by the suction and
discharge piping. Dismantling joints shall be provided upstream of the isolation valves, and check valves
to allow for removal of components for maintenance.

Ductile iron pipes will be used inside the water pumping station.

The water pumping station shall include a sodium hypochlorite dosing system to maintain the water quality
as per the local code requirements.

Roof mounted fresh air supply fan and exhaust fan will be provided for the pump room ventilation.

The electrical room housing the control/electrical equipment will be air-conditioned via AC split units.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 23 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 4.2: Proposed Potable Water Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 24 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 5-2: Average Wastewater Flows

5 WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEM

INTRODUCTION Property Type Average Wastewater Flow (m3/d)

Island Villas 102

This section presents the conceptual design adopted for the wastewater collection system of Gewan Island.
It includes the various design criteria and parameters used. Waterfront Villas 98
Beachfront Villas 79
CODES AND STANDARDS
Mixed Use Apartments 672
The system shall be designed as per Ashghal requirements.
Mixed Use Apartments - Retail 69
WASTEWATER FLOWS Plot2 Villas 76
Service apt. S01 47
In order to calculate the total average wastewater flow, several rates and loads are taken into consideration.
Mosque 6
Unit Wastewater Generation Rates
Clubhouse 10
There are various property types in Gewan Island. Different wastewater unit rates are used for each of the Golf Course 4
property types.
Total 1,164
The different wastewater unit rates are summarized in Table 5-1 below. Those rates are calculated based
as 90% of the water rates for residential plots (except villas) and 80% of the water rates for the rest. The As shown above, it is estimated that around an average wastewater flow of 1,164 m3/d from Gewan Island.
same wastewater generation rate adopted for apartments will be used for villas. It is to be noted that as per
PWA, the average wastewater generated flow from residential area is 315 l/cap/day. DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA

Table 5-1: Wastewater Rates The wastewater network consists of sewage house connections, gravity mains and manholes. The flow
shall be collected through sewage gravity pipes and discharged into the ultimate discharge point. The
Wastewater Rates network will be designed based on the following design parameters and criteria.
Villa 315 L/Capita/d
Peak Factor
Apartment 315 L/Capita/d
The peak flow is calculated as follows for the different land uses.
Retail F&B 6.4 L/m2
Mosque 16 L/Worshiper  Peak Flow for Population-Based Sanitary Loads
Clubhouse 16 L/Member
Babbit is applied to population-based sanitary loads coming from property types such as: villas, apartments
Golf and hotels in order to calculate the peak flow. The peak flow is calculated by multiplying the average flow
Course 40 L/Capita/d by the peaking factor.

The Babbit formula adopted for this project will be based on PWA standards as follows:

Average Wastewater Flow 5

PF = 1
𝑃5
The average wastewater flows are calculated using the population and area distribution table above (Table
5-1) and the wastewater rates stated above the following average wastewater flows are calculated. The With cutoff value of 6 for population less than 500 and min of 3.
corresponding flows are presented in Table 5-2 below.
Where P is the population in 1000.

 Peak Flow for Area-Based Sanitary Loads

As for area-based sanitary loads coming from property types such as: mosque, retail and public buildings,
multipliers to the average flows are used to calculate the peak flows in the system.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 25 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

A peak factor of 3.0 is utilized for all property types. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Pipe Sizing The proposed wastewater network consists mainly of gravity pipes that will collect sewage from the
various areas of Gewan Island as well as pressure force main pipes and sewage pumping stations. For
As per PWA manual, Colebrook White and Manning Equation can be used for the hydraulic design of every house/plot, a plot connection will be provided and will be positioned at the boundary line.
gravity sewers.
The force main pipes are used to transport the pumped flows from the sewage pumping stations across the
Design Velocities bridges and roads. Furthermore, a force main pipe will ultimately discharge the combined flow into the
external network.
In order to minimize the maintenance requirements of any given length of sewer, the gravity sewage pipes
are designed to be “self-cleansing”, achieving a velocity (of minimum 0.6 m/s) that will carry all solid The wastewater system for Gewan Island is described as follows: the sewage from the island villas will be
deposited material along the pipe at least once a day. collected using gravity pipes and transported into sewage pumping stations (PS1 and PS2). This flow is
pumped through force main pipe of 80 mm and 100 mm across the bridge separating the island villas from
The maximum allowable velocity for the sewage pipes is 2.5m/s. the rest of the island and discharged into a continued gravity system in between the waterfront and
beachfront villas.
Pipe Slopes
Sewage flow from waterfront villas, beachfront villas, and mosque and club house will be collected using
The minimum gradient recommended for the upstream stretches of the network (mainly the 200mm sewer gravity pipes and transported in to sewage pumping station 3(PS3) placed under the central park, near the
pipes) is 1 in 200 (0.50%) and 0.33% for 300 mm pipe. The maximum allowable gradient for sewer pipes electrical utilities room. The flow from PS3 shall be pumped using a force main of 150 mm and discharge
is 1 in 60 (1.67%). into a gravity system on the road adjacent the plot2 villas. Thereafter, the combined flow from project site
is transported into pumping station (PS4) placed in Golf course area. The pump station 4 (PS4) will collect
Flow Depths
the sewage flow from mixed use apartments, mixed use retails, service apartments and golf course
All sewer lines will preferably be designed with a ratio of flow depth to pipe diameter of 0.75 (i.e. d/D ≤ including the all other pump flows i.e. PS1,PS2 and PS3. This flow is further pumped through force main
0.75). pipe of 250 mm into nearby existing manhole of Ashghal sewage network.

Pipe Size and Material The below Figure 5.1 illustrates the proposed wastewater collection network discharging into municipal
network via force main pipe of 250 mm.
All gravity sewers are considered to be of vitrified clay/HDPE/GRP up to 600mm and GRP for larger
pipes and force mains. The minimum diameter of building connections is 160-200mm. Wastewater Collection Network

Pipe Cover The resulting wastewater network consists of gravity and pressure pipes with sizes ranging between 200
mm to 400 mm and 80 mm to 250 mm, that will reach the respective sewage pumping stations. The
Minimum pipe cover of 1.2m is considered as per PWA design manual. Special pipe protection is minimum diameter of building connections is 160-200mm.
considered for pipes with cover less than 1.2m or more than 5m.
The pipe material used is Vitrified Clay and GRP for all gravity and pressure pipes respectively. The
Manholes velocity in these pipes reaches a maximum of 1.00/s.

All manholes shall be located within the utility corridors along roadways and shall be accessible to permit The commercial simulation software, SewerCAD V.8i, based on the Mannings equation shall be used for
maintenance and facilitate connections. the design of the sewer network (Refer Appendix D for hydraulic calculation report).

Maximum spacing of 100m is considered between manholes. External backdrops and benching will be The resulting sewage network is shown in Figure 5.2 below.
provided in accordance with the design standards.

Manholes are provided at change in diameters, at change in pipe gradient and at the junction of pipes.

External backdrops and benching will be provided in accordance with the design standards.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 26 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 5.1: Proposed Wastewater Discharging into Ashghal Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 27 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 5.2: Proposed Wastewater Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 28 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Pumping Stations Table 5-3 summarizes the number of submersible pumps and the related flow rate and head for each of the
three envisaged wastewater pumping stations.
General
Table 5-3: Wastewater Pumping Stations - Pumps Data
This section of the report provides the design criteria and basis of design for the mechanical works related
to the sewage pumping stations envisaged for Gewan Island development.
Number of Pumps Flow Rate
Wastewater Pumping Station per pump Pump Head (m)
Design Criteria and Basis of Design Acting Stand-by (lps)
Sewage pumping stations will be designed as wet pit sumps with submersible centrifugal sewage pumps. SPS1 1 1 6 9
The sewage pumping stations will be designed to handle the projected peak influent flow rate. Pumps will SPS2 1 1 8 8
be designed and selected such that the operating point on the pumps curve corresponds to the maximum
pump efficiency range. The sump design will be done according to the recommendations of the hydraulic SPS3 1 1 20 8
institute.
SPS4 2 1 32 8
The wet well will be configured and slopped to minimize turbulence at the pump intake. The pumps wet
well shall have a minimum sump volume calculated to ensure that during worst flow conditions, any pump
installed will not exceed the maximum allowable number of starts/stops per hour. The minimum sump
volume will be calculated using the following formula: Odor control units will be provided in order to ensure that noxious gases and odors are in concentrations
lower than that required by authorities having jurisdiction and according to common practice for sewage
V = (q)/4 pumping stations near residential areas.

Where: A grinder will be provided at the inlet pipe to each wastewater pumping station in order to shred solids
into tiny pieces and protect the operation of the submersible pumps.
V = required working volume between starts (m3)
Operation Philosophy
 = minimum time between starts of one pump, minutes
Pumps operation will be controlled by the PLC cabinet housing dual redundant PLC located next to MCC
q = pump capacity, m3/min within the pumping station. The pumps operation is controlled using the liquid level. The liquid level is
measured using floating switches and level sensors which will operate the submersible pumps when the
level inside the pit reaches a pre-determined high level and it will stop them when the level in the pit
reaches a set low level limit. High and low level alarms will be provided to monitor the level limits inside
Total pumps flow is calculated taking into consideration the peak sewage flow. Pumps will be selected the wet pit.
such that the operating point on the pumps curve corresponds to the maximum pump efficiency range.
SCADA/PLC Control Network
Pump head is calculated by summing up the gravity heads, friction heads, fitting losses, valves losses and
required residual pressure if any. A safety factor of approximately 10% is also added to the calculated It is envisaged that the control systems of the three wastewater pumping stations will be interfaced with
pump head. the existing Operational Command Control Center Facility Management Solution (OCCC FMS)using site
wide converged network (provided by others) using ELV network ducts.
Piping material inside the pumping station (wet well and discharge header valve chamber) will be Ductile
Iron and will be sized taking into consideration a fluid velocity range between 1 m/s and 2.5 m/s. Side wide converged network connection (provided by others) for the wastewater pumping stations will
use the ELV network duct bank to connect to the existing OCCC FMS control room in The Pearl Qatar.
Gewan Island development will include four wastewater pumping stations: SPS1, SPS2, SPS3 and SPS4.
Each wastewater pumping station will have a dedicated standalone PLC cabinet with HMI. Dual redundant
SPS1, SPS2 and SPS3 have a relatively small inflow and thus will only have a total of 2 submersible PLC will be used in the standalone PLC cabinet.
pumps of which one is acting and one is stand-by.

SPS4 will have a total of three pumps of which two are acting and one is stand-by. Having three pumps in
the larger station will allow for better diversity of outflow depending on the inflow rate and the sewage
level inside the sump, thus operating one pump during off-peak hours and two pumps during peak hours.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 29 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 5.3: Proposed Pumping Station Locations

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 30 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Where,
6 STORMWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Q = peak discharge (m3/sec)
INTRODUCTION
C = runoff coefficient
This section presents the conceptual design of the proposed storm water drainage system within Gewan I = rainfall intensity corresponding to the time of concentration (mm/hr)
Island. Following section includes system description, and the design criteria of system.
A = area (ha)
CODES AND STANDARDS
The rainfall intensity is extracted from the IDF curve for a given time of concentration and recurrence
The proposed storm water drainage system is designed based on Public Works Authority Drainage Affairs period. The time of concentration is calculated using Kirpich Formula:
design criteria which are summarized in following sections.
Tc  (526 * n * L )  (i
1/ 3 2/3 1/ 3
*S )
DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA
Where,
The proposed storm water system is designed based on Public Works Authority Drainage Affairs design
criteria which are summarized below. Tc = Time of concentration (min)
n = Manning’s roughness coefficient
Rainfall
I = Average rainfall intensity (mm/hr)
The Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) curve, which relates the storm duration and exceedance S = Average slope (m/m)
probability to rainfall intensity will be used to calculate the runoff flows generated by rainfall events.
L = Length of flow for furthest point (m)
Design intensities are read from IDF curves, which in turn are derived from daily rainfall data. The IDF
curves to be used to determine the design intensities are presented in Figure 6.1 below. - Minimum Tc = 10 min.

Design Storm Duration

The design standards, as well as QHDM and PWA Drainage Affairs design manual recommend design
Return Periods to be adopted according to the project type and the associated allowable risk. The
recommendations of QHDM and PWA Drainage Affairs will be followed in choosing the Design Return
Period for the Storm Water Drainage System.

The storm water drainage system is designed for a 10 year return period storm.

Network Sizing

The runoff coefficient C will be based on the retention characteristics of the surface under consideration.
Runoff coefficient values as provided in PWA Drainage Affairs Design Manual are adopted for various
land uses in Gewan Island.

The commercial simulation software, StormCAD V.8i, shall be used for the design of the storm network.
(Refer Appendix E for hydraulic calculation report)

Figure 6.1: Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) Curves

This is done using the rational method, which is given by:

CI A
Q
360

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 31 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 6-1: Recommended Values for Run-off Coefficient (PWA Drainage Affairs Design Table 6-2: Approximate Self-Cleansing Velocities
Manual)
Pipe Size Self-cleansing
(mm) Velocity (m/s)
Area Description Run-off Coefficient
300 0.75
City Center C = 0.70 – 0.95 400 0.77
Suburban business C = 0.50 – 0.70
500 0.82
Industrial C = 0.50 – 0.90
600 0.86
Residential C = 0.30 – 0.70
700 0.87
Open Areas, Gardens C = 0.05 – 0.30
800 0.88
Asphalt and Concrete paving C = 0.70 – 0.95
900 0.88
Roofs C = 0.75 – 0.95
1000 0.92
Recreation Areas C = 0.05 – 0.35

Pipeline Sizes and Material

Public surface water drains should be at least 300 mm in diameter.
The pipe material for storm water mains shall be Vitrified Clay (VC) or HDPE or GRP depending on the
availability.
The minimum cover depth shall be 1.2 m as per PWA design manual. For pipes with less than the minimum
cover, protection will be provided. Reinforced concrete encasement will also be provided at road crossing,
below footings, etc. All pipe beddings shall be in accordance with Public Works Authority (PWA)
standards.
Manhole Spacing
Manholes shall be located at spacing intervals to facilitate maintenance, inspection and cleaning. Manholes
will also be provided at changes in direction, pipe size and grade.
Maximum spacing of manholes shall be 90m for non-man entry drains. For man-entry pipes up to
1,800mm diameter, the maximum spacing of manholes shall be 200m.
Gullies Spacing
Gullies spacing shall be determined in accordance with PWA and QHDM requirements.
Design Velocities
It is recommended to design the gravity mains to be “self-cleansing” at design flow, where the drain shall
be able to carry all solid deposited material without leaving remains in the invert of the drain. Therefore,
a minimum velocity of 0.75 m/s shall be achieved.
The approximate self-cleansing velocities for storm water drains vary with pipe diameter and are shown
in Table 6-2 below.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The storm water drainage system will generally follow the Storm Drainage Design Manual of the Drainage
Affairs Department in the Public Works Authority.
The design of the storm water drainage system consists of collecting the run-off generated from the streets
via gravity pipes system and discharging towards the sea through outfalls.
The storm water drainage system design was prepared based on the proposed grading plan.
The below are some guidelines for the proposed drainage system:
 Internal roads, car parks and open spaces will be drained via road gullies to the gravity system
consisting of network of pipe and manholes and grated interceptor channel.
 Soakaways will be provided in all villas to collect roof water and runoff generating from
hardscape/softscape areas within the villa plot limit. This soakaways shall percolate storm water
generate within the villa plot limits. Storm water which cannot be collected in soakaways shall be
free discharged away from the villa either on road or towards sea.
 Run-off water generated over the road that leads to the island villas shall be collected via gullies
will be allowed to percolate by discharging into soakaways.
 Run-off water generated over the buildings and the streets above the basement in the central
mixed use development area will be considered as part of the building MEP and discharged into
surrounding roads as surface flow and will then be collected through the external drainage system
through street gullies / interceptor channel. The drainage system will consist of combination of
surface and channel/piped system which will be provided only at small stretches of roads where
needed to divert the runoff to drainage outfalls.
Easements will be provided near low points to be able to discharge run-off water to the sea through the
outfalls.

Since the storm water will be discharged to the sea, treatments such as oil interceptors will be provided at
each outfall to meet MME requirements.

Figure 6.2 below presents the proposed storm water network.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 32 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 6.2: Stormwater Drainage Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 33 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 7-2: Estimated Irrigation Peak Daily Demand

7 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Quantities Daily Water Volume
INTRODUCTION (m2 or Nr) Requirement (L/Day) (m3/Day)
This section presents the Irrigation system proposed to serve Gewan Island. Ashghal Treated Sewage Trees 380 80 30
Effluents (TSE) network is considered as a main source of supply for irrigation. Palms 210 120 25
Streetscape Ground
The source of water will feed the proposed irrigation reservoir. Water from the irrigation reservoir will be 3500 12 42
Covers
pumped in the proposed irrigation network to serve the area. Total 98
Palms 10 120 1
CODES AND STANDARDS
Utility Trees 30 80 2
The design of the irrigation water system shall be based on landscape water requirements in accordance buildings Ground
Area 500 12 6
with the Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014). Covers/Lawn
Total 10
IRRIGATION REQUIREMENTS Palms 95 120 11
Trees 402 80 32
The capacity of the irrigation network should be designed to cater for the peak irrigation water demand. Linear Groundcover
The total peak daily water irrigation demand is calculated based on the softscape areas provided at park 1530 12 18
and Shrubs
preliminary design stage and the peak irrigation requirements of 12 Lit/m2: Lawn 7500 12 90
Total 152
Table 7-1: Irrigation Water Requirements Palms 60 120 7
Daily Water Requirement Central Trees 211 80 17
Plant Type
spine and Ground
Palms (Nr) 120 Lit/palm Promenade Covers/Lawn 2600 12 31
Trees (Nr) 80 Lit/tree Total 55
Large Shrubs (Nr) 20 Lit/shrub TSE water requirement for Irrigation 314
Ground Cover (m2) 10 Lit/m2 TSE water requirement considering contingencies 350
2 2
Grass (m ) 12 Lit/m Golf Considered
45830 12 550
Course softscape *

Total TSE water requirement for Irrigation considering golf

864
course
Total TSE water requirement considering contingencies 900

*As provided by Golf course designer

Based on the above, the estimated peak irrigation water requirement is around 900 m3/day. This demand
is estimated for Gewan Island project including the Golf Course but excluding planted areas within the
waterfront Villas and the island Villas.

DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA

The following are the criteria proposed for the design of the irrigation system:

Irrigators Selection

Sprinklers, bubblers, driplines and drip emitters could be used for irrigation as follows:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 34 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

 The Grass areas would be irrigated using pop-up sprayers or rotors. The commercial simulation software, WaterGEMS V.8i, based on the Hazen-William Formula shall be
used for the design of the network. (Refer Appendix F for hydraulic calculation report)
 Dense Shrubs and Ground Covers would be irrigated using pressure compensating driplines.
The Hazen-Williams formula is given as follows:
 Large Shrubs would be irrigated using pressure compensating online drip emitters.
Q  0.85  C  A  R 0.63S 0.54
 Palms and Trees would be irrigated using pressure compensating bubblers and/or pressure
compensating online drip emitters. Where,
Control System Q is the discharge within the pipe section (m3/s)
The landscape irrigation system will be designed as a fully automated system. The system automation C is the Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
should be provided by irrigation controllers that would be located in field where it is deemed appropriate.
Field controllers are all connected to a central control system (Optional) that should monitor and control A is the flow area (m2)
the operation of the whole site. The automatic control system is expected to deliver water in a timely
manner to conserve water and facilitate operation and maintenance. R is the hydraulic radius (m)

Pipe Material S is the friction slope (m/m)

HDPE pipes PN16 shall be used for TSE transmission pipe from the Tie in point to Asghal up to irrigation The Hazen Williams coefficient used for uPVC pipes is 140.
reservoirs. Un-Plasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) Class E shall be used for distribution pipes and
lateral pipes. Polyethylene pipes shall be utilized for drip lines and above ground lateral pipe installations. Pipe Sizing

Pipe Cover and Valves
Main pipes shall have a minimum cover of 1.2 m. Where pipes have to be shallower because of site
constraints and are exposed to heavy traffic circulation, concrete protection shall be provided.
Isolation valves shall be provided at each pipe branch of the main distribution lines for localized isolation
of pipe sections. Washout valves should be provided at low points and air valves at high points of pipes
with diameters equal or greater than 250 mm.
Automatic remote control (Solenoid) valves shall be provided to command the secondary network
composed of irrigators connected to lateral pipes. The size of the solenoid valve depends on the flow in
the lateral network downstream the valve. Each solenoid valve should be provided with a pressure
regulator module capable of regulating downstream pressure between 1 to 6.9 Bar (within an accuracy of
+or- 0.35 Bar) regardless of upstream pressure.
Sizing of the irrigation mainline shall take account of "worst case" operational flow conditions where a
number of solenoid valves are open simultaneously, as per operation schedule regime.
On the other hand, lateral pipe works where the operational flow will be consistent and dependent upon
the number and type of irrigation devices is not much an issue to be considered.
Operation Schedule
The design of the irrigation water system shall be based on landscape water requirements in accordance
with the Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014).
The irrigation systems shall be operated in the early morning hours as a necessary design precaution.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Quick coupling valves shall be located as necessary for hose connection near sidewalks, entryways and The source of water for irrigation will be treated sewage effluent (TSE) from PWA A Tie in point to
parking lots. Existing Ashghal TSE located at the site entrance is proposed to supply TSE water for irrigation.

Hydraulic Calculations
The distribution network is designed to deliver the peak flow from the network to the solenoid valves with
an adequate residual pressure at the valves to serve the irrigator with the highest pressure requirement. The
maximum allowable velocity shall be 1.5m/s.
- Ashghal has confirmed the feasibility of this connection and the availability of the total TSE
volume requested for irrigation.
Thus, a TSE Transmission pipe will be provided to feed the irrigation reservoir located under the Club
House parking and golf course irrigation reservoir.

Hydraulic calculations shall be carried out in order to reveal that the system should satisfy the flow of
specified water demand, operate within the required pressure of 3.0 bars, and function at acceptable
maximum velocity flow of 1.5 m/s.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 35 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Proposed System Description

An irrigation Transmission pipe shall be provided to feed the irrigation reservoir located under the Club
House parking.

TSE Transmission main pipe from Ashghal will be sized based on 12 hours of supply. Thus, a pipe with a
diameter of 200mm will be proposed from Ashghal tie in point to supply the Irrigation reservoir.

The distribution network will be designed to distribute irrigation water to Gewan Island planted areas
within the mixed use buildings podium, linear park and streets. The proposed irrigation main pipes layout
will run in a loop system.

The proposed irrigation distribution pipe sizes vary between 110mm to 160mm, and 200mm for the TSE
transmission pipe.

The landscape irrigation system should be designed as a fully automated system. The system automation
should be provided by irrigation controllers that would be located in field where it is deemed appropriate.
Field controllers are all connected to a central control system that should monitor and control the operation
of the whole site.

Planted areas within the Villas, Club house, Mosque and the Building’s roof/floors shall be supplied for
irrigation from the potable water network supplying each Villa/Building.

Figure 7.1 presents the proposed irrigation system for Gewan Island.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 36 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 7.1: Proposed Irrigation Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 37 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Irrigation Reservoir and Pumping Station
General
This section describes the design criteria for the mechanical systems related to the irrigation pumping
station, in addition to the different mechanical services necessary for the proper operation of this station.
Site wide converged IP network (provided by others) for the irrigation system will use the ELV network
duct bank to connect to the existing OCCC FMS control room in the Pearl Qatar.
The irrigation pumping station will have a dedicated standalone PLC cabinet with HMI. Dual redundant
PLC will be used in the standalone PLC cabinet

Basis of Design

The irrigation pumping station will consist of an underground structure accessible from the surface level.
It will include 3 end suction variable speed pumps (2 duty & 1 standby). The pump motors arehorizontally
mounted. Pump room will be comprised of a pressure tank, interconnecting pipework, valves, sensors,
pressure switches and electrical control panels.. Each of the three pumps shall be rated to deliver 6 l/sat 62
m head

The pump head is selected to overcome the gravity and friction heads, fitting and valve losses, and the
required discharge pressure.

Two automatic screen filters (1 acting & 1 stand-by) each with a 200 mesh size will be provided in order
to collect any impurities in the water that might clog the irrigation sprinklers. A fertilizer system is also
used to insure the adequate quality of the irrigation water.

The irrigation pump room will have a forced ventilation system.

The electrical room housing the control/electrical equipment will be air-conditioned via AC split units.

All mechanical and electrical rooms will be provided with firefighting system as per the requirements of
the local civil defense regulations.

Operation Philosophy

The irrigation pumps control shall be initiated from a dedicated irrigation control panel, which monitors
system pressure using pressure transmitters, thus automatically starting the irrigation pumps on fall of
pressure and stopping them on rise of pressure.

The operation of the irrigation system shall be based on preprogrammed schedule thru the irrigation
controller as defined by the End User. Based on the operation schedule, the irrigation controller will
command the irrigation system Remote Control Pressure Reducing Valves (RCPRV) to open or close
based on system need.

The Irrigation pumps shall run in an alternate manner over a pre-defined period taking into consideration
that there will always be one standby pump.

Upon failure of the irrigation duty pump, the standby pump shall cut-in and an alarm shall be activated at
the control panel.

SCADA/PLC Control Network

It is envisaged that the control system of the irrigation system will be interfaced with the existing
Operational Command Control Center Facility Management Solution (OCCC FMS) using site wide IP
converged network (provided by others) using ELV network ducts

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 38 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 8-1: Gewan Island Cooling Load Estimate

8 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
GFA Peak Cooling Diversified Cooling
INTRODUCTION (m2) Load (TR) Load (TR)
District cooling is quickly becoming the cooling technology of choice, as it offers a safe and efficient Mixed Use (Plot 3) 28,734 1,277 1,022
cooling practice as opposed to conventional stand-alone cooling systems. District cooling provides a 51,434 2,296 1,837
Mixed Use (Plot 4)
flexible approach to comfort, since a single cooling plant has the capability of servicing multiple buildings.
Mixed Use (Plot 5) 18,525 825 660
It is well known that district cooling system is economically more feasible in areas where both the thermal Outdoor Climate Control in Central
- 2,331 1,865
load density and the annual load factor are high. High load density is needed to cover the capital investment Spine Area
for both the cooling plant and the chilled water distribution network. The cost of district cooling decreases Mixed Use (Plot 6) 28,534 1,284 1,027
with increasing cooling density because of lower relative network cost. Accordingly, district cooling
Mixed Use (Plot 7) 11,941 532 426
system is normally adopted in areas/developments with high Floor to Area Ratio (FAR). Low density
residential areas, with FAR ≤ 4, have usually not been attractive markets for district cooling. Outdoor Climate Control in Promenade - 1,526 1,221
Mosque (Plot 8) 832 40 32
The District Cooling system operates within a closed-circuit and adopts two separate pipes; one designed
to supply buildings with chilled water, and another to return heated water back to the chillers plant. Club House (Plot 9) 2,209 105 84
Water Front Villas Type A (W01-20) 26,239 1,049 839
CODES AND STANDARDS
Water Front Villas Type B (W21-26) 11,928 477 382
The design of the chilled water distribution system will be developed in accordance with the requirements
and recommendations of the following Codes, Standards and Regulations: Beach Front Villas Type A 14,862 594 475
Beach Front Villas Type B 13,199 528 422
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers Furnished Apartment Building (Plot S1) 11,126 445 356
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials Villas Type A (2A-T) 11,952 478 382
API American Petroleum Institute Total 233,515 13,787 11,030
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
The total diversified cooling load for the facilities to be connected to the district cooling system is
QCS Qatar Construction Specifications
estimated to be 11,030 TR which should be supplied from the district cooling plant to be constructed in
TPQ, Plot LA-91.

EXISTING NETWORK
DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA
The existing chilled water network in The Pearl Qatar does not extend to Gewan Island.
The design of the chilled water distribution network will be based on the following:
COOLING DEMAND
Outdoor Design Conditions
The cooling loads of the various buildings and facilities are estimated based on their Gross Floor Area
(GFA) and the below mentioned cooling load density factors. - Latitude: 25.25 deg. North
- Longitude: 51.75 deg. East
- Mixed Use (Residential/Commercial) 25 m2/TR - Elevation: 5 meters
- Retail / F&B 10 m2/TR - Maximum Dry Bulb: 46.1 deg. C
- Villas 25 m2/TR - Maximum Wet Bulb: 32 deg. C
- Diversity Factor 80 %

Chilled Water Design Parameters

- Chilled water supply temperature – Primary side: 4.4 deg. C

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 39 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

- Chilled water return temperature – Primary side: 13.3 deg. C SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
- Chilled water supply temperature – Tertiary side: 5.5 deg. C
- Chilled water return temperature – Tertiary side: 14.4 deg. C District cooling system consists of three primary components:

Chilled Water Piping Material - The central cooling source or district cooling plant (DCP),
- The chilled water distribution network, and
Chilled water distribution network will consist of pre-insulated bonded pipe systems. Pre-insulated pipes - The consumer interconnections also known as energy transfer stations (ETS)
will consist of carbon steel service pipe, polyurethane thermal insulation and outer casing of high density
polyethylene (HDPE). District Cooling Plant

Hydraulic Analysis The district cooling plant will mainly house the chilled water generating equipment such as chillers and
all required accessories and equipment, the process pumps, expansion tanks and air separators, related
The chilled water distribution network will be hydraulically modelled and analyzed using Bentley electrical and transformer rooms, and the condenser water cooling equipment. Electric driven water cooled
WaterGEMS V8i SELECT series 5, while considering the following: centrifugal chillers will be used. The chillers condenser water will be cooled through cooling towers.

- Internal diameters of the chilled water pipes
- Hazen Williams Coefficient for steel pipes C = 120
- Pressure loss inside HEX rooms: 1.5 bar
The hydraulic analysis of the chilled water distribution network will be based on 1.8 GPM/TR in order to
account for higher flow rates due to low Delta-T syndromes.
Hydraulic analysis results are included in Appendix G.
Maximum Velocity
Erosion in water piping is mainly caused by solids impinging on the inner surface of the pipe. When solids
are entrained with the fluid at high velocities, erosion happens quickly especially in the bends. Velocity
limits should be based on maximum hours of peak velocity per year and water quality. As per ASHRAE
handbook 2009, maximum allowable pipes velocities should not exceed 4.6 m/s for operation of less than
1500 hours per year which is typically the case in Qatar where maximum peak operating velocities will
not exceed 1500 hours/year based on peak load profiles.
Minimum Cover
Chilled water mains running directly buried under the carriageway will have a minimum cover of 1.5 m
beneath finished grade levels. Concrete encasement shall be provided around pipes whenever the cover is
less than 1 m.
The district cooling system will serve all sub-developments within Gewan Island except the Island Villas
(Plot 13) and the Golf Course which will have standalone cooling system.
The estimated diversified cooling load is 11,030 TR. Thus, the new DCP at TPQ – Plot LA91 should
include 12,000 TR reserved for Gewan Island.
ETS Room
The interface between the district cooling network and the customers’ chilled water systems will be
through the Energy Transfer Station (ETS). Since the ETS is a main component of the District Cooling
System it must be designed, constructed, operated and maintained according to the requirements of the
district cooling provider.
Each ETS room will comprise the following equipment:
- Plate Heat Exchangers (PHE)
- Chilled water piping upstream and downstream of the PHE
- Variable speed chilled water tertiary pumps
- Pressurization pumps set and expansion tank
- Chemical treatment system
- Energy metering with all related instruments, controls, etc.
- Flow meters, control valves, instruments, PLCs, etc.

Isolation Valves
The Instrumentation and mechanical equipment (such as pumps and chemical dosing unit) of the chilled
Manual isolation valves installed in underground concrete valve chambers will be provided at the main water Energy Transfer Station (ETS) secondary side shall be connected to the ETS PLC provided by
chilled water pipework. These valves are intended to be closed should there be any requirement to isolate Qatar Cool. The Instrumentation and wiring works at the ETS shall fully comply with the requirements
zones, major branches, plots, etc. to allow for maintenance or testing purposes. of Qatar Cool “Customer Technical Guide”.

Drain and Air Vent Valves

Ducts are provided along the chilled water piping trenches to be used for routing fiber optic cables
Drain valves will be provided at lowest points of the chilled water distribution network and air venting connecting the ETS PLC with Qatar Cool DCP control system (to be provided by Qatar Cool)
valves at highest points.
The number and location of the ETS rooms will be as follows:
For directly buried chilled water network, drain and vent valves will be installed in dedicated valve
chambers. - ETS 1 will serve Plots 3, 4 & 5.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 40 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

- ETS 2 will serve Plots 6 & 7. The tertiary chilled water network serving the water front and beach front villas will consist of directly
- ETS 3 will serve the Water Front Villas (26 Nr.), the Beach Front Villas (21 Nr.), the villas located buried pre-insulated steel pipes running under the carriageway between the ETS room and the villas plots.
in Plot 2 (20 Nr.), the Mosque (Plot 8), and the Club House (Plot 9).
- ETS 4 will serve the furnished apartment building located in Plot S1. The chilled water distribution network layout is shown in Figure 8.1

Table 8-2 below summarizes the number, location, cooling and capacity of the ETS rooms within Gewan
Island.

Table 8-2: ETS Rooms Summary

ETS Room ETS Block Load ETS Location Plots Connected to

(TR) ETS

ETS 1 6,065 TR Within the common Plots 3, 4 & 5

basement under the central
spine area

ETS 2 3,175 TR Within the common Plots 6 & 7

basement under the central
spine area

ETS 3 3,108 TR Open space area Water front villas (Plots

W01- W26), Beach front
villas (Plots B01-B21),
Villas (Plots 2A-2T),
Mosque (Plot 8) and
Club House (Plot 9)

ETS 4 445 TR Within the furnished Furnished Apartment

apartment building (Plot S1) Building (Plot S1)

Chilled Water Network

The chilled water distribution network provides the connection between the DCP and the connected sub-
developments.

The Chilled water network will consist of primary, and tertiary loops which are hydraulically decoupled
through the heat exchangers located in the energy transfer stations (ETS). The primary loop will comprise
the chilled water piping within the district cooling plant and the chilled water distribution network within
the development site up to the energy transfer stations. The tertiary loops will comprise the chilled water
distribution systems downstream of the ETS and within the buildings.

The primary chilled water main will run directly buried under the carriageway with a minimum cover of
1.5 m beneath finished grade levels.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 41 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 8.1: Chilled Water Distribution Network Layout

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 42 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA

9 GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM
The design of the gas supply system will be based on the following:
INTRODUCTION
Gas Properties
Gas is one of the renewable and clean energy sources that can be supplied for domestic use such as cooking,
space heating and domestic hot water. LPG Calorific value 3129.39 BTU/ft3.
LPG specification will be as per WOQOD – Refer to Table below.
Nowadays, most of the new cities utilize a full integrated natural gas distribution network serving the
various districts and developments to supply gas to the different buildings and facilities. Table 9-1: LPG Specifications

CODES AND STANDARDS

The design of the gas system will be in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of the
following Codes, Standards and Regulations:

NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code

NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code
IGE/TD/3 Edition 4 Steel and PE pipelines for gas distribution
IGE/TD/4 Edition 4 PE and Steel gas services and service pipe work
IGEM/TD/13 Edition 2 Pressure regulating installations for Natural Gas, Liquefied
Petroleum Gas and Liquefied Petroleum Gas/Air LPG Plant Materials and Equipment
WOQOD Gas Department Regulations
Materials of LPG system including piping, valves, pressure regulators, emergency shut-off,
QCD Qatar Civil Defense Regulations materials/appurtenances, vaporizers, pumps/compressors, gas leak detection system shall comply with
QCS Qatar Construction Specifications NPFA 58.

LPG Pipes Outside Buildings

EXISTING NETWORK
LPG pipes installed outside the buildings and below ground should be installed 1 meter away from the
No Gas supply system exists within Gewan Island Development. buildings.
GAS DEMAND LPG Pipes Inside Buildings
As agreed with UDC, central LPG system will be provided to supply LPG for all restaurants located in the LPG piping installation may be allowed in buildings’ basement, common corridors and other rooms if the
stand alone retail plots, and provisions for individual tanks for the villas.
following conditions are met:
Residential apartments will have electrical cook hobs.
- Piping installation should be protected with metal or double containment.
The gas demand of the standalone restaurants is estimated based on the following criteria:
- Gas leak detectors must be installed inside the encasement.
- Gas usage: Cooking - The encasement must be properly vented outside the building.
- Peak gas demand: 1,115,000 Btu/hr per F&B outlet
- Operating hours per day: 10 hours The maximum operating pressure for piping inside building should not exceed 1.2 bars.
- Diversity factor: 70%
- Number of restaurants that need LPG for cooking is 17 units High Pressure Regulator - First Stage

High pressure regulator should be located near the LPG storage tank area inside an enclosure. The
The total estimated diversified gas demand for the standalone restaurants within Gewan Island enclosure should be constructed with heavy-duty aluminum sheets with approved lock and locked doors.
development is 132,685,000 Btu/day. The enclosure will include the following components:

- First stage pressure regulator (Outlet pressure up to 1.2 bars maximum)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 43 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

- Shut off valves

- Normally closed solenoid valve
- Pressure gauges
- Condensate trap

Medium/Low Pressure Regulator – Second Stage

The 2nd stage vapor pressure regulators should be sized in order to bring down the high pressure of gas to
the required pressure level (range of 0.03 to 1 bar) to cope with the equipment. The 2nd stage regulator and
associated fittings must be installed in an enclosure to protect them from the outdoor conditions.

Gas Meter

A gas meter box should be provided for each customer. The following components should be installed in
the gas meter box: Figure 9.1: LPG Plant Schematic Diagram
- Gas meter capacity (m3/hr) LPG Storage Tank
- Pressure regulator with UPSO/OPSO
- Fixing bracket for meter connection LPG storage tanks can be installed aboveground, underground or mounded type.
- Shut-off ball valve
- Meter compensation connection 1. Aboveground tanks:
It is defined as any tank that holds most of its volume above ground. This type of tanks needs low
construction and excavation cost since the tanks are installed aboveground with no need for significant
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION excavation. However, aboveground tanks will need to be provided with spray water nozzles and
monitoring system that operates automatically by fire-responsive devices to protect the tank body in case
As indicated above, the central LPG system will be provided to supply LPG for all F&B areas located in of fire.
the stand alone retail plots. The central LPG system will include the following: Moreover, aboveground tanks need high separation distance from adjacent buildings and properties (Table
9-2) which requires larger reserved area.
- LPG plant
- LPG distribution piping
2. Underground tanks:
LPG Plant
It is defined as any tank that holds most of its combined volume underground. This type of tanks needs
The LPG plant will utilize commercial LPG mixtures of Propane and Butane as the feedstock. high construction and excavation cost since the tanks should be buried underground. However,
underground tanks have higher safety level than aboveground tanks, and do not require water spray
The LPG plant system mainly include storage tanks, pumps, vaporizers, pressure regulators in addition to protection system.
gas piping and leak detection system.
Underground tanks need lower separation distance from adjacent buildings and properties (Table 9-2).
It is envisaged that the control systems of the LPG plant will be interfaced with the existing Operational
Command Control Center Facility Management Solution (OCCC FMS) using site wide converged
network (provided by others) using ELV network ducts. 3. Mounded Tanks:
Mounded tanks are almost installed aboveground but covered with adequate layer of sand and gravel.
Side wide converged network connection (provided by others) for the LPG Plant will use the ELV network
Similar to underground tanks, the mounded tanks are safer than aboveground tanks and not require water
duct bank to connect to the existing OCCC FMS control room in The Pearl Qatar.
spray protection system.
The LPG plant will have a dedicated standalone PLC cabinet with HMI. Dual redundant PLC (SIL-3) will
be used in the standalone PLC cabinet.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 44 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 9-2: Separation Distance from LPG Tanks, from Important Buildings, and Line of Adjoining
Property (WOQOD)

Based on the above, it is recommended to consider underground storage tanks for the LPG central plant
as it have more benefits than other types.

The LPG storage tanks will be sized based on 10 days storage as per WOQOD requirement. Accordingly,
two LPG storage tanks, each with 31,800 liters water capacity, will be provided.

The LPG plant will be located in a 16m x 12m plot next to the remaining utility buildings as shown in
Figure 9.2. The plant site will be designed to prevent unauthorized access and sufficient space will be
allowed for all routine maintenance activities. The plant area will be fenced for security. A wind sock will
be installed to indicate the wind direction. Appropriate signage identifying the facility and indicating the
potential hazards and prohibited activities will be posted at the station main entrance gate.

Fire extinguishers and fire hose reel located in suitable closets shall be provided at the entrance of the LPG
plant.
Figure 9.2: LPG Plant Layout
The plant area will be illuminated by explosion proof lights installed on the plant boundary wall at 1.9m
from the finish floor level. LPG Distribution Network

The LPG distribution network between the LPG plant and the restaurants located in both the central spine
and promenade areas will run in the ceiling of the common basement under the central spine area.

LPG piping running in the common basement will be steel pipes protected with metal containment with
gas leak detectors installed inside the encasement. The operating pressure of the main LPG pipes running
within the central spine common basement shall not exceed 1.2 bars.

Figure 9.3 shows the location of the LPG plant and the routing of the main LPG piping serving the
standalone restaurants.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 45 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 9.3: LPG System Layout

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 46 of 257

 Are there any corridors followed during cable routing??
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

power System Study report for the load flow ,

10 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION short circuit and Largest motor starting studies
shall be provided.
INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this section is to define the preliminary stage design details of electrical work for Gewan
Island Infrastructure. This section highlights the various applicable codes and standards and also presents
the electrical requirements related to power distribution, emergency systems, lighting, and various
electrical systems adopted in the design. The scope of electrical works includes but not limited to the
following:

• Medium voltage distribution network (11kV) as per KAHRAMAA requirement

• Low voltage distribution network (415/240V):
- Main Distribution Board (MDB)
- Motor Control Centers and Panels (MCC/MCP),
- Low Voltage authority kWH/energy meters as per KAHRAMAA requirement
- Cables, wires and related accessories, cable trench, cable trays, conduits, boxes and
related accessories
- Emergency lighting
- Indoor lighting installations
- Obstruction lighting for bridge
- Outdoor lighting including street lighting, landscape lighting, bridge decorative lighting Figure 10.2: Location of the Existing Substations and MV cable Route inside Gewan Island
• Other electrical systems covering
- Emergency standby diesel Generators for CCTV building and water reservoir and fire Accordingly, the above mentioned cables inside the Gewan Island will be utilized to supply the new
pumping station development while the existing substations will be demolished (demolishing is not part of scope).
- Space provision for mobile diesel generators for sewage pumping station and irrigation
DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA
pumping station.
- Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units for CCTV building The main objectives to develop the preliminary details of the electrical installations for the Gewan Island
- Earthing and Lightning protection systems are summarized below:
Equipment Sizing
Calculations Calculations??
• To comply with the applicable Codes and Standards,
EXISTING NETWORK • To meet the specific power requirements for the project,
• To achieve reliability and durability of systems and components,
As per the available as built drawings for TPQ’s MV network, it is noted that a dedicated loop number
• To implement safety measures for the protection and safety of people and equipment.
(C35, C37) installed from SS-2 till the entrance of Gewan Island as shown in the below figures:
Other important factors will be considered in addition to above objectives and summarized as below:

• Cost effectiveness,
• Co-ordination with other design elements,
• Simplifying installation operation and maintenance

Codes and Standards

All electrical installations will be designed based upon the requirements of applicable local authorities
Standards and regulations, in conjunction with incorporated relevant international standards and practices.
Standards will include:

• KAHRAMAA Standards and Regulations

• Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) requirements
• Code of practice for protective earthing of electrical installations (BS 7430)
Figure 10.1: Existing MV cables Allocated as a MV loop Gewan Island

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 47 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 10-1: Load Densities

• Nominal characteristics of all materials and equipment forming part of Electrical works will be
specified to confirm to International Electrical Commission (IEC) Standards, British Standards Beach
Golf Golf
Mixed Use and
(BS) or equivalent European Standards Building Island Club Underground course course
(Residential F&B Water Retails Mosque
• Requirements for electrical installations - IEE Wiring regulation Type
+ Common)
Villas
Front
House Parking (Open (Other
• Indoor and Outdoor Lighting Installations, “The SLL Code for Lighting” issued by the “The Villas
area) area)
Society of Light and Lighting.
• National Fire Protection Association Codes. Load
• Qatar highway Design manual (QHDM) for street lighting Density 120 250 200* 125 130 292** 70 30 5 292***
(W/m2)
The codes and standards listed above are minimum requirements. In case of different requirements within
the listed codes, the most stringent will be applied. * Load density for island villas includes HVAC decentralized system
** Load density is as per actual load for total built up area (ground & basement)
The applicable codes, references and standards should be reviewed and updated as the design progresses. ** Assumption based on club house load. Final load shall be as per input from golf course specialist

Ambient Conditions
The adopted diversity factors in the load estimate are as per Kahramaa requirements and as are follows:
All electrical equipment, apparatus, materials and accessories will be designed, specified and de-rated for
a continuous and trouble free operation in the ambient conditions of the state of Qatar, which are as follows: • Diversity factor at user level: 0.7
• Diversity factor between transformers: 0.9 between transformers in the same substation for villas,
• Altitude : sea-level 0.8 for apartments/retail. In case of one transformer, no diversity factor will be applied at
• The Maximum ambient temperature in summer: 52°C transformer level.
• Average maximum ambient temperature in summer : 45°C
• Diversity factor at 11kV loop level : 0.8
• Minimum ambient temperature in winter : 0°C
• Maximum Relative humidity : 97% • Diversity factor at primary substations: 0.9 (depends as per Kahramaa requirement)
• Maximum ground temperature (@1 m depth): 30°C
Project Load Estimate
MV Distribution Network Characteristics
The load estimate of Gewan Island has been computed based on the built-up area for each building type.
MV distribution network characteristics will be as follows, in accordance with KAHRAMA regulations: Different load densities (W/m2) and diversity factors, as described above, have been adopted at end user
level and 11kV for the buildings as per Kahramaa requirements.
• Supply level : 11 kV, 3-phase, 3-wire
• Frequency : 50 Hz Shall not be solidly The air conditioning electrical loads (chillers and auxiliary equipment) are excluded from the load
• Neutral : Solidly earthed earthed. estimate for all buildings except Island villas, where a decentralized air conditioning system is adopted
LV Distribution Network Characteristics in these villas. Accordingly, a load density of 200 W/m2 is estimated for each island villa as shown in
Table 10-3.
LV distribution network characteristics will be as follows, in accordance with KAHRAMA regulations:

• Supply level : 240/415 V, 3-phase, 4-wire

• Frequency : 50 Hz The Total diversified load at 11 kV = 24.5 MW
• Neutral : Solidly earthed
The Total diversified load at 11 kV (0.9 PF) = 27.2 MVA
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

Adopted Load Densities, Demand and diversity factors.

The adopted load densities in the project are listed in below. The load densities are applied at end user
level for similar buildings.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 48 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Table 10-2: Electrical Load Estimate

Total Diversified Load
Load Load Total Diversified Diversity Total Diversified Total Diversified
Parking Total Connected Diversity at Diversity Factor Number of
Building Building BUA Density Density Load at User Factor Load Load
Types Area Load Factor Transforemer Level at 11kV loop Units
Types (m2) for Building for Parking Level between at 11kV Level per at 11kV Level (kW)
(m2) per Building (kW) at User Level per Level per type
(W/m2) (W/m2) per Building (kW) Transformers Building (kW) per type
Building (kW)
W01 1,600 0 125 0 200 0.70 140 0.90 126 0.80 101 1 101
W02 1,625 0 125 0 203 0.70 142 0.90 128 0.80 102 1 102
W03 1,649 0 125 0 206 0.70 144 0.90 130 0.80 104 1 104
W04 1,681 0 125 0 210 0.70 147 0.90 132 0.80 106 1 106
W05 1,684 0 125 0 211 0.70 147 0.90 133 0.80 106 1 106
W06 1,593 0 125 0 199 0.70 139 0.90 125 0.80 100 1 100
W07 1,457 0 125 0 182 0.70 127 0.90 115 0.80 92 1 92
W08 1,453 0 125 0 182 0.70 127 0.90 114 0.80 92 1 92
W09 1,444 0 125 0 181 0.70 126 0.90 114 0.80 91 1 91
W10 1,439 0 125 0 180 0.70 126 0.90 113 0.80 91 1 91
Type A
W11 1,432 0 125 0 179 0.70 125 0.90 113 0.80 90 1 90
W12 1,433 0 125 0 179 0.70 125 0.90 113 0.80 90 1 90
W13 1,432 0 125 0 179 0.70 125 0.90 113 0.80 90 1 90
Water Front Villas
W14 1,431 0 125 0 179 0.70 125 0.90 113 0.80 90 1 90
W15 1,437 0 125 0 180 0.70 126 0.90 113 0.80 91 1 91
W16 1,440 0 125 0 180 0.70 126 0.90 113 0.80 91 1 91
W17 1,440 0 125 0 180 0.70 126 0.90 113 0.80 91 1 91
W18 1,526 0 125 0 191 0.70 134 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
W19 1,531 0 125 0 191 0.70 134 0.90 121 0.80 96 1 96
W20 1,446 0 125 0 181 0.70 127 0.90 114 0.80 91 1 91
W21 2,399 0 125 0 300 0.70 210 0.90 189 0.80 151 1 151
W22 2,311 0 125 0 289 0.70 202 0.90 182 0.80 146 1 146
W23 2,250 0 125 0 281 0.70 197 0.90 177 0.80 142 1 142
Type B
W24 2,244 0 125 0 280 0.70 196 0.90 177 0.80 141 1 141
W25 2,252 0 125 0 282 0.70 197 0.90 177 0.80 142 1 142
W26 2,260 0 125 0 283 0.70 198 0.90 178 0.80 142 1 142
Residential B01 1,741 0 125 0 218 0.70 152 0.90 137 0.80 110 1 110
B02 1,652 0 125 0 206 0.70 145 0.90 130 0.80 104 1 104
B03 1,555 0 125 0 194 0.70 136 0.90 122 0.80 98 1 98
B04 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B05 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B06 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B07 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B08 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B09 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B10 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
Beach Front Villas Type A B11 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B12 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B13 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B14 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B15 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B16 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B17 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B18 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B19 1,518 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 120 0.80 96 1 96
B20 1,517 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 119 0.80 96 1 96
B21 1,517 0 125 0 190 0.70 133 0.90 119 0.80 96 1 96
I01 5,197 0 200 0 1,039 0.70 728 1.00 728 0.80 582 1 582
I02 5,182 0 200 0 1,036 0.70 725 1.00 725 0.80 580 1 580
Type A I03 5,318 0 200 0 1,064 0.70 744 1.00 744 0.80 596 1 596
Island Villas *
I04 5,180 0 200 0 1,036 0.70 725 1.00 725 0.80 580 1 580
I05 5,282 0 200 0 1,056 0.70 739 1.00 739 0.80 592 1 592
Type B I06 10,902 0 200 0 2,180 0.70 1,526 1.00 1,526 0.80 1,221 1 1,221

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 49 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

2-A 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40

2-B 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-C 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-D 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-E 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-F 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-G 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-H 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-I 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-J 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
Residential New Villas Plot-2
2-K 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-L 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-M 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-N 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-O 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-P 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-Q 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-R 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-S 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
2-T 640 0 125 0 80 0.70 56 0.90 50 0.80 40 1 40
Residential and common 6,034 0 120 0 724 0.70 507 0.80 405 0.80 324 1 324
Plot-3
Retail 390 0 130 0 51 0.70 35 0.80 28 0.80 23 1 23
Type-A
F&B 140 0 250 0 35 0.70 25 0.80 20 0.80 16 1 16
Residential and common 6,034 0 120 0 724 0.70 507 0.80 405 0.80 324 1 324
Plot-3
Retail 390 0 130 0 51 0.70 35 0.80 28 0.80 23 1 23
Type-B
F&B 140 0 250 0 35 0.70 25 0.80 20 0.80 16 1 16
Residential and common 7,268 0 120 0 872 0.70 611 0.80 488 0.80 391 1 391
Plot-3
Retail 400 0 130 0 52 0.70 36 0.80 29 0.80 23 1 23
Type-C
F&B 135 0 250 0 34 0.70 24 0.80 19 0.80 15 1 15
Residential and common 7,268 0 120 0 872 0.70 611 0.80 488 0.80 391 1 391
Plot-3
Retail 400 0 130 0 52 0.70 36 0.80 29 0.80 23 1 23
Type-D
F&B 135 0 250 0 34 0.70 24 0.80 19 0.80 15 1 15
Residential and common 13,040 0 120 0 1,565 0.70 1,095 0.80 876 0.80 701 1 701
Plot-4
Retail 563 0 130 0 73 0.70 51 0.80 41 0.80 33 1 33
Type-A
F&B 453 0 250 0 113 0.70 79 0.80 63 0.80 51 1 51
Central Spine
Residential and common 12,055 0 120 0 1,447 0.70 1,013 0.80 810 0.80 648 1 648
Plot-4
Retail 801 0 130 0 104 0.70 73 0.80 58 0.80 47 1 47
Type-B
F&B 258 0 250 0 65 0.70 45 0.80 36 0.80 29 1 29
Residential and common 11,182 0 120 0 1,342 0.70 939 0.80 751 0.80 601 1 601
Plot-4
Retail 480 0 130 0 62 0.70 44 0.80 35 0.80 28 1 28
Type-C
F&B 470 0 250 0 118 0.70 82 0.80 66 0.80 53 1 53
Residential and common 11,182 0 120 0 1,342 0.70 939 0.80 751 0.80 601 1 601
Plot-4
Retail 480 0 130 0 62 0.70 44 0.80 35 0.80 28 1 28
Type-D
Mixed Use F&B 470 0 250 0 118 0.70 82 0.80 66 0.80 53 1 53
Residential and common 8,569 0 120 0 1,028 0.70 720 0.80 576 0.80 461 1 461
Plot-5
Retail 566 0 130 0 74 0.70 52 0.80 41 0.80 33 1 33
Type-A
F&B 154 0 250 0 39 0.70 27 0.80 22 0.80 17 1 17
Residential and common 8,557 0 120 0 1,027 0.70 719 0.80 575 0.80 460 1 460
Plot-5
Retail 609 0 130 0 79 0.70 55 0.80 44 0.80 35 1 35
Type-B
F&B 70 0 250 0 18 0.70 12 0.80 10 0.80 8 1 8
Residential and common 10,578 0 120 0 1,269 0.70 889 0.80 711 0.80 569 1 569
Plot-6
Retail 320 0 130 0 42 0.70 29 0.80 23 0.80 19 1 19
Type-A
F&B 780 0 250 0 195 0.70 137 0.80 109 0.80 87 1 87
Residential and common 7,788 0 120 0 935 0.70 654 0.80 523 0.80 419 1 419
Plot-6
Retail 170 0 130 0 22 0.70 15 0.80 12 0.80 10 1 10
Type-B
F&B 470 0 250 0 118 0.70 82 0.80 66 0.80 53 1 53
Residential and common 7,788 0 120 0 935 0.70 654 0.80 523 0.80 419 1 419
Promenade Plot-6
Retail 170 0 130 0 22 0.70 15 0.80 12 0.80 10 1 10
Type-C
F&B 470 0 250 0 118 0.70 82 0.80 66 0.80 53 1 53
Residential and common 5,023 0 120 0 603 0.70 422 0.80 338 0.80 270 1 270
Plot-7 Retail 0 0 130 0 0 0.70 0 0.80 0 0.80 0 1 0
Type-A
F&B 405 0 250 0 101 0.70 71 0.80 57 0.80 45 1 45
Residential and common 6,018 0 120 0 722 0.70 506 0.80 404 0.80 324 1 324
Plot-7
Retail 95 0 130 0 12 0.70 9 0.80 7 0.80 6 1 6
Type-B
F&B 400 0 250 0 100 0.70 70 0.80 56 0.80 45 1 45
Common Basement For Residential and Retails 0 70,966 0 30 8,958 0.70 6,270 0.80 5,016 0.80 4,013 1 4,013
Serviced Furnished Aprt. Blg. S01 11,126 4,000 120 30 1,455 0.70 1,019 1.00 1,019 0.80 815 1 815

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 50 of 257

 Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Mosque Plot-8 1,385 438 70 30 110 0.70 77 0.80 62 0.80 49 1 49

Public Facilities
Club House Plot-9 1,528 681 644 0.70 451 1.00 451 0.80 361 1 361
Golf course (open area) 74,377 0 5 - 372 0.70 260 1.00 260 0.80 208 1 208
Golf Course** Club House in Golf course area 2,000 0 292 - 584 0.70 409 1.00 409 0.80 327 1 327
Irrigation pump - 55 1.00 55 1.00 55 0.80 44 1 44
CCTV Building - - - - 80 1.00 80 0.90 72 0.80 58 1 58
Electrical Substation A - - - - 10 1.00 10 0.90 9 0.80 7 1 7
Electrical Substation B - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
Electrical Substation C - - - - 10 1.00 10 0.90 9 0.80 7 1 7
Facility Unit/Maintenance Room - - - - 15 1.00 15 0.90 14 0.80 11 1 11
GSM Tower-1 - - - - 40 1.00 40 0.90 36 0.80 29 1 29
GSM Tower-2 - - - - 40 1.00 40 0.90 36 0.80 29 1 29
HEX Building - - - - 395 1.00 395 0.90 356 0.80 284 1 284
Irrigation Reservoir & Pumping Station - - - - 52 1.00 52 0.90 47 0.80 37 1 37
LPG Plant - - - - 75 1.00 75 0.90 68 0.80 54 1 54
Utility Buildings Potable W.T & Pump St. - - - - 58 1.00 58 0.90 52 0.80 42 1 42
Sewage Pumping Station-1 - - - - 11 1.00 11 0.90 10 0.80 8 1 8
Sewage Pumping Station-2 - - - - 11 1.00 11 0.90 10 0.80 8 1 8
Sewage Pumping Station-3 - - - - 15 1.00 15 0.90 14 0.80 11 1 11
Sewage Pumping Station-4 - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
Security booth & boom barrier_water front villa - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
Security booth & boom barrier_Beach front villa - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
Security booth & boom barrier_New villa plot-2 - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
Security booth & boom barrier_Island villa entry - - - - 20 1.00 20 0.90 18 0.80 14 1 14
UPS for outdoor CCTV - - - - 9 1.00 9 0.90 8 0.80 6 1 6
Vacuum Station Building - - - - 510 0.80 408 0.90 367 0.80 294 1 294
Landscape Lighting - - - - 125 1.00 125 0.90 113 0.80 100 1 100
Street Lighting - - - - 120.00 1.00 120 0.90 108 0.80 96 1 96
Total
24,536
Load (kW)

* Load density for island villas includes HVAC decentralized system.

** Load of golf course is tentative and shall be finalised as per load received from golf course specialist /consultant.
TOTAL DIVERSIFIED LOAD @11kV (MW)= 24.5

TOTAL DIVERSIFIED LOAD @11kV (MVA) (@0.9 P.F)= 27.26

Basis of design for

this load estimations.
Are there any
calculations for the
same??

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 51 of 257

 Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Medium Voltage Network

Based on the above load estimate, the total diversified load at 11kV level for the project is 27.2 MVA.

The project will be supplied through The Pearl 11 kV Network. Each 11kV cable size is 300mm2
CU/XLPE/SWA/PVC, 6/10 (12 kV), with maximum loading capacity of 7MVA. The maximum loading
capacity for each 3-Leg loop is 14MVA and for each 2-Leg loop is 7MVA.

Accordingly, the proposed number of 11KV feeders to supply Gewan Island is two 3-Leg 11KV loops and
one 2 leg loop (8 cables; 6 new cables plus 2 existing cables (C35, C37)). These feeders will be supplied
from 66/11kV existing primary substations from The Pearl Qatar (TPQ), this is subject to coordination
with Kahramaa to advise the proper tapping point within primary substation to supply the project.

MV connection is considered for Island villas, Mixed used plots (plot-3, 4, 5, 6, 7), common basement,
DAR shall
club house, Golf course and service apartment building.
coordinate
with LV connection is considered for all villas, mosque, utilities, street lighting and landscape lighting and will
Kahramaa be supplied from three 11kV/415V standalone substations strategically located in Gewan Island
at the infrastructure. Refer to Figure 10.3 for substation locations.
earliest.
The 11kV/415V substation includes Medium Voltage Switchgear (MVSG), dry type transformer and Main
LV distribution boards (MDB). 11KV MV-switchgear shall be metal enclosed, factory built and
dispatched as a complete assembly. Switchgears shall be Vacuum insulated with incoming and outgoing Figure 10.3: Location of Outdoor Substations
motorized circuit breakers. All components shall comply with IEC standards and Kahramaa Regulations,
including Kahramaa specification for 11KV indoor switchgear panels.
Electrical corridors at the right of way of roads will be reserved for MV cables, a spacing of 75cm The MV cable loops will feed each plot throughout the site as shown in Figure 10.4:
(center to center) on two layers or 50 cm between MV cables (center to center) will be adopted among
MV cables as per Kahramaa requirements.

Electrical Corridors
shall be marked on
the drawings and
Designer shall make
sure to check any
clashes with any
other utilities

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 52 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.4: MV Loops Network

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 53 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

The below table show the loading of each loop of the project:

Table 10-3: MV Loop Wise Load

LOOP-1 LOOP-2 LOOP-3

Total Diversified Load
Total Diversified Load Total Diversified
at
Building at 11kV Level (kW) per Building Building Load at 11kV Level
11kV Level (kW) per
Type (kW) per type
type
Water Front Villas Type A 1900.96 Residential & Common Space 1,430 Villa In Plot-2 806.40
Water Front Villas Type B 864.16 PLOT-3 Retail 92 CCTV Building 58
Beach Front Villas Type A 2033.01 F&B 62 Electrical Substation C 7
Island Villas Type A 2929.68 Residential & Common Space 2,551 GSM Tower-2 29
Island Villas Type B 1221.02 PLOT 4 Retail 135 LPG Plant 54
Public Facilities PLOT 8 (Mosque) 49.32 F&B 185 Water Reservoir & Pumping Station 42
Public Facilities PLOT 9 (Club House) 360.64 Residential & Common Space 921 Sewage Pumping Station-4 14
Electrical Substation A 7.20 PLOT 5 Retail 68 Vacuum Station Building 294
Electrical Substation B 14.40 F&B 25 Street Lighting 52
Landscape Maintenance Building 10.80 Residential & Common Space 1,406 Golf Course 579
GSM Tower-1 28.80 PLOT 6 Retail 38 Serviced Furnished Aprtment Building (S01) 815
HEX Building 284.40 F&B 193 Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level (MW) 2.75
Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level
Irrigation Reservoir & Pumping Station 37.44 Residential & Common Space 594 3.06
(MVA)
Sewage Pumping Station-1 7.92 PLOT 7 Retail 6
Sewage Pumping Station-2 7.92 F&B 90
Sewage Pumping Station-3 10.80 Common Basement 4,013
Security Booth at Water Front Villa 14.40 Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level (MW) 11.81
Security Booth at Beach Front Villa 14.40 Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level (MVA) 13.12
Security Booth at New Villa of Plot-2 14.40
Security Booth at Island Villa Entry 14.40
UPS for Outdoor CCTV 6.48
Landscape Lighting 100.00
Street Lighting 44.00
Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level
9.98
(MW)
Total Diversified Load at 11 kV Level
11.09
(MVA)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 54 of 257

Gewan Island
Low Voltage Network
The LV networks will be originated from the infrastructure transformers substations and will comprise;
dry type transformers, Main distribution boards located at substations, capacitor panels, sub-main
distribution boards, motor control centers /panels and final branch circuit panel boards are located in
respective utility building.
Substation Transformer
Cast resin dry type step down transformers (11/0.415 KV) will be used in the infrastructure substations in
order to avoid fire and explosion hazards. Ventilation will be as per KAHRAMAA recommendation.
Dry type Transformers will have copper windings rated for continuous operation under worst site ambient
conditions at full load. Transformers shall comply with IEC standards and Kahramaa Regulations,
including Kahramaa specification for Dry type (Cast Resin) distribution transformers.
Kahramaa standard transformer ratings shall be considered.
LV distribution panels
Main Distribution Boards (located at the electrical substations) shall be provided to supply power to
different utility areas, motor control panels (MCP’s), external lighting and other electrically operated
equipment.
LV main distribution boards (MDB's) shall be metal enclosed, free standing type, form 3b type 2,
600/1000V to IEC 61439.
Main incoming breakers of MDB's shall be motorized, withdrawable, power air circuit breakers,
individually mounted and fitted with electronic solid state trip units having an adjustable setting for long
time current pickup and delay, short time current pickup & delay, instantaneous current pickup and earth
fault current pickup and delay, with (Sequence II) short circuit rating to IEC 60947-2 (service rating).
A power factor correction system complete with automatic controller and capacitor banks are provided in
a separate enclosure and connected to each main distribution board to maintain the overall power factor
between 0.9 lagging to unity as per Kahramaa regulations.
Sub main distribution boards (SMDB’s) or Emergency Sub main distribution boards (ESMDB’s) shall be
metal enclosed, free standing or wall mounted, with group mounted moulded case circuit breakers on the
outgoing circuits and moulded case switch.
SMDB’s & ESMDB’s shall be provided with ammeters, voltmeters (or electronic measuring unit instead)
and pilot lights.
Final branch circuit distribution boards (DB’s) shall feed final branch circuits for lighting and convenience
power outlets. Final branch circuit distribution boards (DB’s) shall be of the totally enclosed type, wall
mounted, surface or flush with hinged lockable doors to IEC 61439.
Final branch circuit distribution boards (DB’s) shall be in general three or single phase type. All panels
shall be fully rated for the available short circuit current. All bus bars shall be copper, with full size neutral
and dedicated half sized earth bus.
All DB’s & SMDB’s shall include 15-20% spare circuit breakers for possible future loads.
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
The breaking capacity of circuit breakers shall be fully rated and selected to withstand at least 125% of
the maximum expected short circuit current at the breaker location.
Motor control panels (s) are located inside mechanical rooms for the supply and control of mechanical
motors.
Motor Control panels (MCPs) shall be of the fixed construction housing required starters, control,
monitoring and short circuit protection equipment.
Low Voltage Cables and Wires
Electrical corridors at the right of way of roads will be reserved for LV cables. A spacing of 30cm (center
to center) will be adopted between LV cables as per Kahramaa regulations
Low voltage (LV) distribution network will comprise 600/1000 V Cu/XLPE, 4-core armored cables of
different sizes based on the demand load of the plots and the feeder pillars. The maximum voltage drops
to the plots/feeder pillars shall not exceed 2.5%. The LV distribution network has been designed based on
KAHRAMAA requirements along with the international approved standards.
LV cables will be routed as directly buried and in concrete encased duct banks at road crossings.
The final sub-circuit cables/wires for lighting and small power shall be rated 450/750 V, PVC insulated,
copper conductor, flame retardant drawn in conduits or trunking.
Conduits, Wire ways and Related Accessories for All Systems
The installation of electrical works has been designed and specified in compliance with the
recommendations and regulations of Kahramaa.
Cable trays/ ladders and trunking are specified as hot dip galvanized steel.
Rigid heavy gauge steel conduits (hot dip galvanized) shall be used for all exposed installations composing
lighting, power wiring, for wet areas, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, etc and
any other location / area where there is a possibility of mechanical damage or high humidity.
Rigid heavy gauge UPVC conduits to BS 4607 and BS 6099 will be used for lighting, power, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in the slabs, walls or screed.
Power supply arrangement
MV connection
MV power supply connection will be provided to below plots as part of infrastructure scope. These plots
are having dedicated MV level substation and transformer/s for further distribution which is part of
respective building/ plot design work.
MV connection is considered for following areas:
Island villas, Mixed used plots (plot-3, 4, 5, 6, 7), common basement, club house, Golf course and service
apartment building.
Page 55 of 257
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

LV Metering (kWh energy meter)

LV power supply connection to below plots will be provided through infrastructure substations.

LV meter shall be provided after main distribution panel.

Provision for one authority energy meter will be considered at PWA and KM main supply connections.

If the building demand load exceeds 350A (247KVA) then an indoor substation would be furnished into
the building/plot with incoming medium voltage supply (11kV) or two LV connections for buildings with
demand load do not exceed 494KVA (2x247kVA). LV supply (415V) will be provided from the nearest
outdoor substations (11/0.415kV) for such buildings.

LV authority meter is considered for following areas:

- Beach front and water front villas, each with one LV meter (located at respective plot entry)
- Plot-2 villas each with one LV meter (located at respective plot entry)
- All utility buildings each with one LV meter (located at substation) except HEX & vacuum
station building
- HEX & vacuum station building with two LV meters (located at substation)
- Mosque, GSM tower, pre-fabricated security booths with one LV meter (located at substation)
- External lighting with one LV meter at each feeder pillar location.

The infrastructure scope is limited to provide power supply till plot entry for all villas and mosque and
further distribution will be part of respective building design work.

For all other utilities complete design is part of infrastructure package.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 56 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Electrical substation layout

Figure 10.5: Substation-A: Equipment Layout Figure 10.6: Substation-B: Equipment Layout

Figure 10.7: Substation-C: Equipment Layout

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 57 of 257

Gewan Island
Emergency Power supply
In addition to the normal power supply by the authority, the emergency power supply in infrastructure is
considered for limited utility buildings.
The emergency power supply using fixed outdoor type standby diesel generator is considered for below
buildings. Generator shall be with appropriate acoustic canopy and sub base fuel tank. The generators will
be mounted on concrete pads and will have spring type vibration isolators.
- CCTV building
- Water and Fire pumping station
The automatic transfer switches will be of the double-throw type, having double bypass feature. In case of
the failure of the transfer switch, the main switch may be drawn out for maintenance. The bypass feature
will ensure the continuity of power flow manually to either the standby or the normal power supply sources.
In case of failure of normal power supply, automatically started fixed diesel generator will take over the
supply to above emergency loads and once the normal conditions are restored, the load is automatically
transferred back to the normal supply, and the generator will be stopped.
The only space provision is reserved for outdoor mobile generator for emergency power supply for below
buildings. The mobile generator will be provided in future by other/operator.
- Sewage pumping station-1
- Sewage pumping station-2
- Sewage pumping station-3
- Sewage pumping station-4
- Irrigation pumping station
The manual transfer switches will be considered to operate after failure of normal supply on availability
of emergency source/mobile generators.
Operator needs to coordinate with authority for power failure schedule to ensure the availability of mobile
generators for sewage pumping station as emergency power source.
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit is considered to provide no-break power supply to telecom
equipment such as computers and data network, CCTV cameras, CCTV equipment room etc.
UPS will be equipped with external manual by-pass switch (make before break) that will ensure removal
of UPS unit without disturbing the load.
UPS unit supplying telecom equipment shall be of the 60 minutes autonomy without redundancy.
UPS units shall be microprocessor based having built-in multi-functional control and display units, capable
to communicate with the BMS system. Each UPS shall comprise a battery charger, storage batteries to
take over the load, static inverter and manual by-pass switch (make before break type). UPS unit will be
backed-up by the emergency generators to ensure power continuity after the autonomy period.
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
The UPS and related batteries shall be designed and sized for worst climatic conditions. UPS rooms shall
be cooled for 22º C and 50% relative humidity. Batteries shall be of the sealed lead acid type.
UPS ratings used within the project as per system requirements are as below:
Non redundant UPS for CCTV building (60 minutes backup) - 60KVA, located in CCTV
building
 Non redundant UPS for outdoor CCTV cameras (60 minutes backup) - 10KVA, located
in substation-B
UPS requirement for Ooredoo room is not considered in scope and shall be by authority as per their
requirement.
Earthing System
A complete system of electric service grounding (TN-S) will be provided to comply with the latest British
Standard editions of BS7671 and BS7430 and local authority statutory requirement (like for substations,
HEX building etc.) taking into consideration the personnel safety and proper equipment functioning.
A complete equipment earthing system shall be provided such that all metallic structures, enclosures,
junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, metal fences, and all other conductive items
operate continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path to ground for possible fault
currents. Earthing system resistance shall be 1 ohms or less.
The earth electrode shall consist of earth rods buried in the ground around the building and
interconnected by a ring earth conductor. All grounding materials will be made of copper or approved
copper alloys.
The dedicated earthing shall be considered for electronic equipments such as racks for CCTV, UPS etc.
The dedicated earthing shall be considered for HEX building PLC cabinet as per Qatar cool requirement.
Lightning Protection System
The lightning protection system shall be as per IEC 62305 “Protection against Lightning” to achieve
maximum level of protection.
Based on this, high risk assessment was carried out for utility & substation buildings, noting that all utilities
are surrounded by high rise buildings or villas taller than utility buildings. Accordingly, no lightning
protection is required for utility buildings.
Please provide the
Risk Assessment
calculations
Page 58 of 257
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Indoor Lighting External Lighting

Indoor lighting installation for all utility buildings shall be designed to provide comfort and feeling of ease. The external lighting of Gewan Island infrastructure includes following lighting applications:
The minimum levels of illumination, type of light sources, and glare control for general indoor areas shall
comply with the recommendation of the British Code for Indoor and Outdoor Lighting Installations, “The - Street Lighting
SLL Code for Lighting” issued by the “The Society of Light and Lighting. - Bridge decorative lighting
- Landscape lighting
Accordingly Following are the recommendations for basic areas classification:

The general arrangement and type of lighting fixtures will be selected to suit the specific area requirements. Street lighting

Special attention will be given to energy conservation and maintenance access for re-lamping and repairs. The type of Gewan Island’s roads are divided into two types as per QHDM regulations:
The different types of lamps will be restricted to a low number, as practical as possible, in order to ease
future operation and maintenance of the facility.  Local road.
 Collector road.
Glare shall be kept to a minimum through the correct selection and positioning of fixtures.

Lighting fixtures used in each type of space will be determined based on the functional requirements of
the space as well as the architectural consideration.

Lighting fixtures will be the standard products of reputable manufacturers. The protection class of the
lighting fixtures will be specified in accordance with the location where they are installed.

Generally, LED lighting fixtures will be used in the whole project.

Table 10-4: Indoor Illumination Levels

Area / Building Lux level Fixture Lamp Control

Type

Electrical and Mechanical rooms 200 LED On/Off by local switch

CCTV building 500 LED On/Off by local switch

Toilet in Vacuum station building 150 LED On/Off by local switch

Figure 10.8: Roads Types in Gewan Island

Emergency lighting is considered with in-built battery having back up time of 3 hours as per authority/ The Illumination levels and lighting criteria for different road types will be as per QHDM and shown in
kahramaa requirement. the below table:

Emergency lighting will be provided to illuminate means of egress and emergency lighting circuits as per Table 10-5: Illumination levels and lighting criteria for the project road types
Standards requirements.
Road Road type Maintained Overall Longitudinal Max Surround
The emergency lighting fixtures shall be approved with local authority requirement. classification Average Uniformity Uniformity threshold Ratio, SR
Luminance Ratio (U0) Ratio (UL) Increment
(Lav) (cd/m2) (TI %)
Refer to 12.5.11 for lighting calculations.
D Collector 1.25 0.4 0.5 20 0.5
E Local 0.75 0.4 0.5 30 0.5

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 59 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

The illumination levels for Bike paths and Pedestrian walkways will be adopted based on QHDM
recommendation shown in table below

Table 10-6: Illumination Levels for Bike Paths and Pedestrian Walkways

Area Classification Maintained Average Minimum

Illumination (lux) Illuminance(lux)
Urban/Residential Area 10 2
Rural Area 5 1

As per QHDM, the maximum allowable voltage drop is shown below:

Table 10-7: Maximum Allowable Voltage Drop

Element of Circuit Considered Maximum Element of Circuit Considered Maximum

Voltage Drop Voltage Drop Figure 10.9: Conceptual Schematic Diagram for Remote Outdoor Management System for Street
Lighting
Substation to Feeder Pillar 2.5%
Decorative Bridge Lighting
Feeder Pillar to End of Circuit 2.5%
The bridge decorative lighting design approach will be moderate level & continuous lighting to add good
aesthetic look to the bridge.
According to above table, the voltage drop from substation to end of street lighting circuit shall not exceed
5 %, in accordance with Kahramaa requirements. All lamp sources will be LED type to ensure a long-life and easy to maintain lighting solution.

Street lighting control: The aim of bridge decorative lighting are as follows:

Remote outdoor lighting management will be provided in order to allow fixtures to be remotely accessed
and viewed in real time. These can be switched or dimmed to directly reduce energy use and to collect
performance data, this also can prevent light pollution.
With remote central management it is possible to provide operation and maintenance savings through
reductions in the need to visit lighting points or scout for failures. This reduction in demand on resources
can be achieved through reduced use of service vehicles as a result of checking failures or adapting lighting
remotely to events or weather conditions without the need to attend site.
The lighting control system workstation with necessary software shall be proposed in CCTV control room.
The lamp level smart controller will be installed on column which will monitor and gather all information
about the lighting fixture and perform on/off operation as per requirement and command.
There are Remote terminal units or gateways will be either part of feeder pillar or located near feeder pillar
and receives all software commands and consequently manages the lamp controller and also gather
information, monitor and control the lighting fixtures. RTU basically includes necessary controlling
devices like data concentrator, electric network analyzer, intelligent communicator etc.
 Deliver high quality and efficient lighting, which creates an attractive and safe environment on
bridge.
 Create an attractive and vibrant scheme that supports and reflects the good quality.
 Illuminate both vertical and horizontal surfaces appropriate to the specific tasks taking place,
supplying users with a comfortable operational environment.
The bridge decorative lighting includes following lighting arrangement for Ritz Carlton Bridge,
Causeway to AQ Bridge, Island Villa Bridge and bridge at existing RO pipes:
- LED strip linear lighting at parapet wall on both side of bridge throwing light downward on
parapet wall.
- Flood light for under bridge lighting
The entrance bridge from TPQ has color changing (RGBW) decorative lighting for cable stays, pylon
etc.

Remote terminal unit/ gateway communicate with control desk via IP base communication through fiber
optic cables. Refer to conceptual schematic diagram in Figure 10.9.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 60 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

The 3D renders for an example of bridge lighting is shown below: Tennis Court Lighting

The primary visual requirements in tennis court are for the players, match officials and any spectators to
see both the ball and the court together with its associated markings. It is important that a player does not
suffer from disability glare when serving or following a ball. The type of light source and positioning of
luminaires should be considered accordingly.

Sharp cut-off luminaires are preferable for tennis court floodlighting, the benefits of which include
accurate light output control, a restriction in light overspill and a reduction in direct glare for the players.

Columns should be positioned so that participants are unlikely to collide with them.

The lighting for tennis court in infrastructure is designed with lighting class-III as per LG4, The SLL
Code for Lighting, considering low-level competition; local or small club competition and Minimal or
no spectator provision.

The following design criteria is followed:

Figure 10.10: Bridge Decorative Lighting

Table 10-8: Illumination Levels

Class Horizontal illumination over principal area Glare

Eav (lux) Emin./Eav

III 200 0.6 55

Figure 10.11: Reference Image for Bridge Decorative Lighting

Bridge decorative lighting control:

Controlling the majority of the bridge decorative lighting will be via photo cell and/or timer. The photo
cell/timer and override switch will be installed in the feeder pillar.

For the entrance bridge from TPQ, DMX system will be used for color changing lighting control.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 61 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Landscape Lighting

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 62 of 257

Gewan Island
10.5.10.4.1 Lighting philosophy
The lighting design approach for the landscape spaces will be low level lighting, consisting mostly of
lighting fixtures concealed into architectural details, planters and steps. Bench seating will also have
integrated lighting which will add glamor to the landscape. Special lighting is also provided for special
occasion to make some areas look more festive.
Lighting throughout will aim to comply with or exceed current legislation and design guides. All lamp
sources will be LED only to provide a long-life, easy to maintain lighting solution. Architectural lighting
will play a subordinate role to the facade lighting with the emphasis on the effect of light - not the luminaire
itself.
The primary aims can be summarized as:
 Deliver high quality and efficient lighting, which creates an attractive and safe environment for
users.
 Create an attractive and vibrant scheme that supports and reflects the good quality.
 Illuminate both vertical and horizontal surfaces appropriate to the specific tasks taking place,
supplying users with a comfortable operational environment.
 To provide a robust design both in terms of construction i.e. Vandalism and environmental
conditions, but also the design itself needs to remain ‘current’.
 Provide a cost effective, sustainable and energy-efficient system, in terms of initial capital costs
and continuing operational use. Selecting lamp types for their efficacy, color rendition and
longevity to provide an efficient lighting solution with a predictable maintenance regime.
 Utilize lamp types appropriate for the character and function of each landscape while retaining a
coherent, rationalized illumination system in terms of lighting effect, lamp types and equipment
installed.
 Design maintainability in mind.
10.5.10.4.2 Design Parameters
The following mandatory, legislative and regulatory requirements, Codes of Practice and Best Practice
professional guidance publications will form the parameters of the lighting installations:
 Code for Lighting (CIBSE/SLL, 2012).
 Guidance For The Reduction Of Obtrusive Light,
 Institution of Lighting Professionals, 2012.
 Lighting Guides LG6 - The Outdoor Environment, CIBSE 1992.
 Fact file No. 7- Design and Assessment of Exterior Lighting Schemes, SLL, 2011.
 CIE 126 - 1997 Guidelines for minimising Sky glow, CIE, 1997.
 Technical Report 136/2000 Guide to the Lighting of Urban Areas, CIE, 2000.
 CIE Royal Fine Arts Commission
 “Lighten our Darkness” (lighting in urban Environments), HMSO, 1994
 CIE 150: 2003 Technical Report, Guide to the Limitation of the Effects of Obtrusive Light from
Outdoor Lighting Installations, CIE, 2003.
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2-Infrastructure Works
Energy Consumption
Energy efficiency shall be an inherent function of the lighting scheme. Illumination methods shall be
employed in accordance with all mandatory, legislative and regulatory requirements.
10.5.10.4.3 Maintainability and Buildability
The lighting design solution is obliged to comply with current CDM regulations and continual assessment
throughout the design development will be undertaken, including use of the appropriate documentation
and assessments.
The design, construction and location of lighting equipment shall permit ease of maintenance without
major disruption to the operation of the building; inclusive of wiring, luminaires, lamps and controls.
Wherever possible, standard luminaires that are readily available will be utilised so that they are easily
replaceable in the event of failure.
It is anticipated that LED’s (despite long-life) can prematurely fail and thus no light sources will be located
in entirely inaccessible locations.
Occasionally compromise may be required between the design aspiration and that ability of the contractor
to install the works to a high standard. Given the aspiration for a market-leading development the quality
of installation is key and the design may need to be reassessed if this occurs.
10.5.10.4.4 Lamps & Luminaires
All luminaires specified shall meet the following standards:
- All equipment supplied shall comply with the relevant local norms, and be capable of installation
in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
- The lighting installation shall be designed to utilize luminaires selected from manufacturer’s
standard ranges. Special and variant luminaires must be approved by the client.
- Luminaires shall be specified for their photometric performance, with suitable distribution,
efficiency and appropriate glare control, for effective illumination of a particular task or space.
Materials, construction and build quality shall also determine luminaire selection.
- Specified luminaires shall comply with the current relevant Qatar, European or British Standards,
principally BS EN 60 598.
- Where gear or transformers are installed remotely, care should be taken to ensure that they easily
accessible for maintenance.
- High frequency electronic control gear shall be employed as standard to eliminate stroboscopic
effects, improve lamp life and maximise energy efficiency.
- LED technology shall be given preference and used wherever appropriate.
WEEE DIRECTIVE
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment All lamps, luminaires and relevant lighting equipment must
be procured from manufacturers/suppliers registered with the WEEE directive PCS (Producer Compliance
Scheme). All these manufacturers/ suppliers must prove that they are registered by providing their PCS
registration number. The PCS registration numbers of the relevant manufacturers should be recorded as
part of the building O+M Manual.
Page 63 of 257
Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Energy efficiency shall be an inherent function of the lighting scheme. Illumination methods shall be Light Trespass: the spilling of light beyond the boundary of the property on which the light source is
employed in accordance with all mandatory, legislative and regulatory requirements. located.

10.5.10.4.5 Quality of Light Color Temperature Light Ingress: the passage of light into buildings from an external source(s)

The color temperature of a light source is conventionally stated in the unit of absolute temperature, the Obtrusive light is a nuisance to both humans and wildlife, it is a waste of energy and contributes to
kelvin, having the unit symbol K. Cool temperature over 4000K are called cool colours (bluish white) greenhouse gas emissions. The problems of unnecessary, obtrusive light can and should be reduced or
while lower colour temperatures 2700K-3000K are called warmer colours (yellowish white through red). eliminated at the design stage.

Most convivial spaces including domestic residential properties utilise warm-white colour temperatures. Over-lighting: This is avoided by conducting thorough calculations and carefully selecting the most
Typically, an old-fashion GLS light bulb has a colour temperature of approximately 2700K. appropriate lighting equipment and lamp types.

The lighting at Gewan Island Development will not deviate from this approach with LED light sources Lighting Control: To ensure luminaires are only switched on when necessary, a lighting control
being of a warm colour temperature disposition to make each space feel as warm and convivial as possible. performance specification is produced.

10.5.10.4.6 Color rendering (CRI) Sky glow ULR =5% max

CRI (colour rendering index) measures the ability of a light to truly reveal the colours of various objects Light trespass EV =10 lux
faithfully in comparison with an ideal or natural light source.
=2lux (before curfew)
CRI of different light sources can vary greatly, with lamp sources such as low-pressure sodium (used in
streetlights) being particularly poor (CRI40). Fluorescent lamp sources are of an average rating (CRI70- =10 (before curfew)
85) and incandescent lamps of an excellent rating (CRI100).
Source intensity I(kcd) =1 (after curfew)
This is particularly important when considering LED light sources as many lower–end LED’s have a very
low CRI (70-80). The very best LED lamp sources have a very good rating of CRI95. However this is still =510ave (before curfew)
not as good as incandescent light sources so at this time some compromise is given to light quality in order
to achieve long-life low-energy lighting solutions.

10.5.10.4.7 Color Consistency

Color properties of lamps may change over the life of the lamp. Color stability describes the ability of a
light source to maintain its color properties over time. One MacAdam ellipse (SDCM) describes the color
space within which the human eye cannot perceive a color difference.

Good quality LED chips have limited color shift over the life of the product and thus If the development
is to maintain quality post defects period it is important that such color consistency is considered.

10.5.10.4.8 Lighting control

Controlling the majority of the landscape lighting will be via photo cell and/or timer. The phot cell/timer
and override switch will be installed in the feeder pillar.

10.5.10.4.9 Lighting pollution

Light pollution, or obtrusive light, can create serious physiological and ecological problems. It takes
various forms:

Sky glow: the brightening of the night sky above our towns and cities,

Glare: the uncomfortable brightness of a light source in contrast to the background

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 64 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Mood Board - Residence Park Landscape

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 65 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.12: Rendered Image for Park

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 66 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.13: Rendered Image for Park

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 67 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.14: Rendered Image for Park

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 68 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.15: Lighting Calculations – Sunken Garden and Water Feature

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 69 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure
10.16:

Lighting Calculations-Pathway

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 70 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 10.17: Render for Street Lighting and Column Details

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 71 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Lighting Calculations of Utility Buildings

I) Normal lighting calculations:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 72 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 73 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 74 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 75 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 76 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 77 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 78 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 79 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 80 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 81 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 82 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 83 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

II) Emergency lighting calculations:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 84 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 85 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 86 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 87 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 88 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 89 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 90 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 91 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 92 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 93 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 94 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

- BS EN 50132 - CCTV surveillance systems for use in security applications.

11 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
INTRODUCTION
This Section in the report defines the Telecom, ELV & Security infrastructure strategy and design
guidelines for Gewan Island Development in the Pearl of Qatar, and describes the various elements related
to the infrastructure.
The primary purpose of the passive infrastructure is to provide the physical pathway that allows for the
interconnectivity of all project systems. Since the passive infrastructure is the longest-lived component of
the Telecommunications infrastructure and the system cannot be easily replaced following installation,
careful design and solid engineering practices are to be employed during the planning and design stages
of the passive infrastructure in order to provide a future-proof based design.
The design of the Telecommunication infrastructure network will includes the necessary civil works for
the network to meet the telecom and non-telecom services including SCADA system, Digital Metering
system (DMS) and Street Lighting System (SLS) in The Pearl as per the telecom service provider, UDC
requirements and recommendations for the developed area.
The telecommunication network civil works include the necessary, excavation, backfill with suitable
excavated materials, disposal of surplus excavated material, connections to hand-holes / jointing boxes /
service termination boxes, testing and cleaning, concrete duct banks, hand-holes, draw-ropes, marker tapes,
Conduits of type (uPVC) …etc.
The scope of work shall also include Telecommunication, Extra Low Voltage System & Security systems
design for all utility buildings (i.e. Electrical Sub-stations, CCTV monitoring building,etc.) to be
introduced for the Infrastructure networks.
- Local Civil Defense requirements (QCDD).
- Ministry of Interior (MOI) requirements.
- Local Telecom Service Providers requirements.
- Local Standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the other Standards.
- UDC Guidelines in the Pearl.
The different entities that the design will comply with are Ooredoo, local Civil Defense, Ministry of
Interior (MOI) and the Employer / End user requirements. Should any difference arise, the more stringent
requirements are to be followed.
EXISTING NETWORK
This section in the report includes a brief description for the Existing Telecommunication Network in the
Pearl of Qatar, and highlighting the primary and secondary tie-in points for the new development area.
The available data & as-built drawings for the existing Telecommunication Network in the vicinity of the
project location shows that the nearest manholes are MH 1308 and MH-4307. MH-1308 is located at the
main entrance & it will be consider as primary tie of point while the MH-4307 is located near to AQ which
will be considered as 2nd tie point.
This manholes will be utilized for the connection between the development area and the existing network
in the Pearl.

CODES AND STANDARDS

All Telecommunication, ELV & Security systems will be designed in compliance with the latest editions
of the following Regulations and Standards:

- International Organization for Standardization (ISO).

- TIA/EIA-568-C.0: Generic telecommunication cabling for customer premises.
- TIA/EIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted pair telecommunication cabling and components
standards.
- TIA/EIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
- TIA/EIA-606: Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
- TIA/EIA-606: Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
- BICSI-TDMM: Building Industry Consulting Services International, Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual, 14th edition
Figure 11.1: Primary (MH-1308) & Secondary (MH-4307) Telecommunication Tie-In Points.
- Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standards.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 95 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

The Telecommunication Network in the Pearl support Smart system to provide voice/data and will carry
through its backbone the Security/ Fire Alarm/ SCADA/ Metering … etc. from various parts of the
development up to the Operation Control and Command Center (OCCC).
The telecom services are currently being operated predominantly by Ooredoo in its capacity as the owner
of the telecom infrastructure.
The existing telecommunication network is fully converged. Transport access is managed by Ooredoo.
Access Layers are managed by UDC and so are non-telecom services.
uPVC Conduits has been used with diameter of 100 mm for the Telecommunication Network inside the
ducts connecting cables between manholes and between manholes & each plot, concrete encasement has
been provided for the street crossing ducts.
The Existing Telecommunication Network in the Pearl have been built based on the following parameters:
- Main Routes in the Pearl: 4-uPVC Conduit.
- Street crossing for the main routes: 6-uPVC Duct Bank.
- Plots Tie-in Points: 4-uPVC / 2-uPVC. (Depends on the plot size)
- Street crossing for the plots tie-in points: 6-uPVC / 4-uPVC Duct Bank.
- Hand-holes: JRC-14 type.
growing demand. Duct bank capacity infrastructure should allow for flexible network growth and
upgrading.
Ducts will be installed under the sidewalks and to be sand encased, however, at road crossings, concrete
encasement will be adopted to provide protection from vehicular traffic. Conduit of 100 mm diameter
uPVC will be used. Duct sizing shall cater for FTTX cabling for the telecom network, ELV Network &
MOI Network Requirements.
The civil works, which include ducting systems, manholes, hand-holes, etc., will be designed to comply
with international standards and local authorities requirements.
Main Routes
The Main Routes in Gewan Island Development will have 8 uPVC Conduits, divided as the following:
- Telecommunication Network: 4-uPVC Conduits.
- ELV Network: 2-uPVC Conduits.
- MOI Network (Security): 2-uPVC Conduits.
- Street crossing: 8-uPVC Duct Bank with concrete encasement for the three Networks.
- Hand-holes: JRC-14 type.
Plots Tie-in Points

SCOPE OF WORK The Plots Tie-in Points in Gewan Island Development will have 4 uPVC Conduits, divided as the
following:
The scope of work of the Telecommunication, Extra Low Voltage (ELV) & Security Systems shall
comprise the following systems: - Telecommunication Network: 2-uPVC Conduits.

- Converged Network - Telecom, ELV & Security Network (Civil Works) - ELV Network: 1-uPVC Conduit.

- GSM Coverage (Coordination with Telecom Service Provider) - MOI Network (Security): 1-uPVC Conduit.

- Video Surveillance (CCTV) System for the Development area. - Hand-holes: JRC-14 type.

- Structured Cabling Network (For Utility Buildings) Villas Tie-in Points

- Fire Detection & Alarm System (For Utility Buildings) Villas Tie-in Points in Gewan Island Development will have 2 uPVC Conduits, divided as the following:
- Parking Access Control System - Telecommunication Network: 1-uPVC Conduits.
- ELV Network: 1-uPVC Conduit.
Converged Network (Telecom / ELV / Security Network)
- Hand-holes: JRC-14 type.
The Telecom duct bank containments will be designed to house the Telecommunication, ELV & Security
Networks cabling in the same corridor reservation in the Master Plan. A reservation of one (1) meter in the road cross section will be considered for the Converged Network.

A dedicated conduits will be reserved for each network, concrete enactment will be provided for road
crossing ducts.

The civil and cable works infrastructure is the basic item in implementing a durable telecom system
transport network. As the evolution of technology is forcing new generation of cabling systems and
technologies to carry larger amount of bandwidth, civil works shall be designed to cope with the ever

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 96 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Figure 11.3: GSM Towers Location

CCTV

A CCTV Monitoring Building will be provided in the Utilities area, all the CCTV Cameras within the
development plan will be connected to this building.

The IP Closed Circuit TV (CCTV) system will be used in order to facilitate the operations of general
surveillance and monitoring. It will be designed according to MOI requirements and it will offer end user
video information of the different places needed to be secured such as the building entrances and public
areas. CCTV system records and stores images and can be integrated with motion detectors for even higher
security.

A CCTV System will be installed throughout the Master Plan as per the MOI requirements and
Figure 11.2: Road Cross Section – Telecom Corridor recommendations, CCTV cameras will be used to give security personnel the capability to be made aware
of or view visual events at multiple locations from a centralized remote viewing area. CCTV camera
GSM Coverage
technology makes visual information available that would normally only be available through multiple
The Design of the Master Plan part of the project will include the required coordination with the (possibly roving) human resources & because there is always a residual risk for all of the identified and
Telecommunication Service Provider to define the proper location for the GSM towers within the treated threats.
development area.
The IP CCTV system will be based on the following components:
There are two GSM towers located in the area. One GSM Tower is located at utilities area while the second
- Megapixel IP cameras of both types fixed and PTZ (wired).
GSM tower is located at open spaces area.
- IP communication, between the camera and the end-user, over the CCTV IP network,
dedicated CCTV network will be provided by having a dedicated network switches as per
MOI requirements.
- Video Management Software and high performance storage.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 97 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Utility Buildings Design

This section of the report describe the scope and extent of Telecommunication & Extra Low Voltage (ELV)
works for the Utilities Building in the Project.

The scope of work of the Telecommunication & Extra Low Voltage (ELV) Systems in the Utilities
Building shall comprise the following systems:

- Structured Cabling Network (SCN)

- Fire Alarm & Detection System.

Structured Cabling Network (SCN)

The structured cabling network will cover all the cabling methods which will be adopted in the Utilities
Buildings in the project. The system will allow for flexible distribution architecture for voice, data and
video connectivity.

The concept of the Structured Cabling Network (SCN) is to provide state-of-the-art services at the project
with advanced information infrastructure interconnecting devices to integrate the required functions.
Implementing the appropriate SCN infrastructure for the project shall ensure a robust and secure data
communication scheme.

The system shall comprise of RJ45 data outlets, Category 6A cables for horizontal cabling system, fiber
Figure 11.4: Basic Structured Cabling Network Diagram
optic cables for the backbone cabling system, all related passive equipment such as telecom racks which
will house patch panels, horizontal cross connects, and the like. Fire Alarm & Detection System
The SCN is defined as the set of non-powered components that carries the data traffic across the network Fire Detection and alarm system involves the early detection and notification of life safety threats. The
and consists of the following: Project Buildings shall have a Fire Detection and Alarm System that complies with the NPFA Standards
and the local fire code (QCDD).
- Horizontal Cabling
- Outlets The system will be designed to provide early detection, accurate localization of zones and points of origin.
The System includes a microprocessor based, non-coded, addressable fire alarm system with manual and
- Grounding and Bonding automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal
- Identification transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only including but not limited to:
- Racks and Cabinets
- Patch Panels Patch Cords and Connectors - Fire Alarm Control Panels.

- Cable Management System - Manual fire-alarm stations.

- Fire Alarm detectors.
- Notification appliances.
- Remote annunciators.
- Graphic annunciators.
- Addressable interface devices.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 98 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

- Vehicle Loop Detector and Inductive Loop Wire to detect the presence or transit of a vehicle
over an embedded loop of wire. In this case, a signal will be sent in order to activate the
automatic barrier gate.

Figure 11.6: Parking Gate Barrier Diagram

Figure 11.5: Basic Fire Alarm Diagram

The system will be connected to the civil defense by providing auto-dialer.

The Fire Detection and Alarm System will be in accordance with the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
and in compliance with NFPA requirements and other applicable codes and standards that are not in
contradiction with the local regulations.

Parking Access Control System.

A Parking Control System shall be provided to restrict entry for Villas, Island Villas areas.

The Parking Control System will consist of the following:

- Automatic operated barrier gates via a Proximity Card Reader.

- Manually operated barrier gates via a Push-button from nearby security kiosk.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 99 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

12 SOLID WASTE SYSTEM The Automated Vacuum waste collection consists of a 508mm.dia Mild Steel pipe network running along
the central spine (at high level basement where available) and along a pipe corridor where there is no
INTRODUCTION basement.

The Automated Vacuum Waste Collection system is proposed to be installed on Al Mourjan Island
development to handle the 13.864 tons of waste which is likely to be generated on the development. As
per GSAS we are proposing a two fraction system to collect and transport Organic waste and Mixed
recyclables. The bulky waste will be collected manually and baled at source. To achieve this level of
segregation it is important that all residents and retailers segregate their waste at source as any
contamination will not achieve the desired result.
- Villas – The villas district will be provided with two sets of outdoor inlets within a maximum
walking distance of 80m / 3 villas whichever is closer. Residents will access these inlets with
their segregated waste and deposit the same using access cards. The waste will be stored prior
to the collection cycle in storage sections below the inlet door.
- Island Villas – Each of the villas will be equipped with its own pair of inlets.

CODES AND STANDARDS - Stand Alone Retail – These areas will be provided with Inlets located in BOH areas. The Mixed
Recyclables and Residual and Organic waste will be fed into inlets connected to a mild steel
The Automated vacuum waste systems will be based on the standard codes relevant for Mild Steel pipe. pipe network of 508mm dia which also runs at high level basement.
The equipment and Electrical works will be installed as per applicable codes relevant to them. A new BS
standard and code for Automated Vacuum Waste System is under preparation by the British standards and - Mixed Commercial – Since these buildings are 5 – 6 floors it is assumed that they will be fitted
will be applicable once the same is finalized and issued in a few months. with Vertical Garbage chutes terminating at high level of Ground floor and the storage section
and the discharge valve will be located at Ground Floor. This will necessitate the installation
WASTE GENERATION
of two garbage chutes in each shaft. Based on the final design, for the ground floor, the final
Waste generation per land use Nos / Area Ton / Day design the inlets for retail and F&B can be located in the BOH area. These will all be connected
to the central pipe system running inside the plot. At this stage the outline network is shown
Waste per residents – villas 1.5 kg / person / day 3,411 person 5.116 only as typical connections to the central pipe net and not connected all the internal buildings
Waste for Retail 0.25 kg / sqm / day 10,784 sqm 2.696 as it is not known how many buildings will be built or where their shafts will be located. An
Waste for Club house 0.15 kg / sqm / day 2,209 sqm 0.331 estimate price per RM of pipe and per connection will be provided for budgetary purposes
Waste for Golf Course 0.23 Kg / golfer / day 300 golfers 0.0069 which can be revised as and when the detailed design is completed.
Waste for Mosque 0.15 kg / sqm / day 1,823 sqm 0.273
Waste for Utilities 0.07 kg / sqm / day - Golf Course – A connection will be provided from the primary network of the central pipe net
Waste for Open Spaces 0.06 kg / sqm / day to this plot. As and when the detailed design is developed the internal routing will be proposed.
In additional it is possible to add litter bin inlets connected to a 323mm.dia pipe to handle loose
Total Waste Generated / Day 8.486 tons litter from guests and visitors which has not been included in the budget estimate.

The unit waste generation rates for suitable waste to be deposited into an awcs were based on accumulation
of data from the Gulf Region and based on a similar affluent lifestyle, land use and similar residential base.
Retail / Commercial unit rates are from global benchmarks. Wastes for public buildings are based on
assumptions. At this point of time we design the system at 40% organic and 60% mixed recyclable and
other waste.
The design of the above solid waste management system components should take into consideration the
waste quantities estimated to be generated from various land uses within the project.
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT STRATEGY
Based on the drawings and concept MP plan available the Solid Waste Management Strategy will be as
under.
The waste will be sorted at source and collected in three fractions.
- Mixed Recyclables - Plastic / Metal / Contaminated other waste
- Mixed Residual - Rest Fraction from Residents and Retail
- Bulky Waste – cardboards, packaging, used and old furniture etc disposed from Homes and
Retail.
- Mosques and Utility Areas – Depending upon its location, and kind of waste the inlets suitable
for mixed recyclable waste will be provided as it is not envisaged that these areas will have
much organic waste generation.
Bulky Waste like cardboards, packaging, used and old furniture will be stored in respective areas in waste
rooms and collected manually and stored near the collection system where it can be baled or collected by
recycling companies.
The automated vacuum waste can provide specialized shredders connected to a special inlet in large areas
where this is generated eg F&B and Retail areas and collect the same as part of the mixed recyclables
fraction. Due to limitations in space in the foot print of the collection station to collect the same as a
separate fraction but this may interfere with the GSAS guidelines for waste management.
DESIGN PARAMETERS AND CRITERIA
The design parameters will be described in detail once the final design is finalized of the system based on
drawings, their locations and the waste generated per plot.
The design will be performance based criteria which all bidders can adopt.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 100 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

In the collection station the waste pipe will be connected to a Pipe Diverter Valve which will move towards
a Recyclable Container (MS) or Organic Container (SS304 lined ) depending upon the signal from the
inlet which needs emptying.

To conserve energy the inlets will be based on time and level sensor and can be sequenced based on
occupation and usage to ensure availability at all times for waste storage and collection.

Containers will be sensor controlled so as to inform the haulage company to pick up waste when 80% full
and timed so that there is no shortage of availability of containers when storage inlets require emptying.

Depending upon the sequence and statistics of operation time and waste collection, the supplier will
program the system operational times to suit availability of collection and emptying without hindrance to
users and residents.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Solid Waste Network

Based on the current waste load it is possible that the pipe network will be between 6-8mm thick and the
bends between 8-10mm thick based on amount of waste being transported from various locations. Mild
Steel pipes in buried areas will be quoted with 3 layer PE coating with cathodic protection and those
suspended in the basement will be epoxy / PU painted.

The two fraction inlets will be MS powder coated and Organic waste inlet doors in standalone Retail units
will be SS304. The inlet door sizes will include access card control for Retail users and opening sizes
larger than 400mm x 400mm to suit bigger bags and those for villa users will be smaller to restrict oversize
items from being deposited which could cause potential blockage.

For preliminary layout of solid waste network, inlet locations and typical details refer to drawings.

As the detailed design develops a more detailed coordination drawings with interface with other services
will be developed.

Solid Waste Vacuum Station

For the proposed collection station refer to drawing.

Since there is limited space in the utility plot there is only provision of 1 container per fraction which is
sufficient to hold 1.5 days capacity of the waste generated depending upon the recycling rate that is
achieved. In all probability the organic waste will go once in two days and the mixed recyclables will go
every day which can be timed based on collection times allowed by the local authorities and the system
timed to suit that. On weekends and holidays it may be necessary to program a daily collection to suit the
waste generation. The system will be designed and have the capability to monitor and advise the waste
collection agency to suit collection times.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 101 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

13 LANDSCAPING WORKS

INTRODUCTION

The landscape design concept of Al Gewan project is created upon the natural theme of water motion and
the way it impacts the land around it. The design concept progressively meanders through the diverse
spaces on Al Gewan Island, from the main green space, the Linear Park, while simulating the progress of
water through different patterns, diverse forms and elements. The landscape design concept follows a
formal design that is accentuated and highlighted within the Central Linear Park. A cycle track is included
along sidewalks throughout the development for accessibility and encouraging sustainable means of
commuting. When it comes to connectivity, this cycle track includes two main loops connecting to the
main residential areas and high-end island villas. The linear park, considered an extensive green space is
also connected to a central spine that includes the Central Plaza, a beach promenade and a waterfront
boardwalk promenade. The central plaza is commonly a hardscape area in comparison with the other zones,
containing the iconic shade structure that highlights the high-end nature of the area. Furthermore, in order
to ensure healthy, vibrant and high quality living environments for the residents, active and passive
activities such as sports, playgrounds, seating areas jogging routes are distributed throughout the linear
park. As for the landscape strategy, it combines recreational areas to ensure diverse activities for all
residents and visitors. It also aims at establishing a softscape network for enhancing pedestrian experience
though creating distinctive shaded walkways and seating areas. The concept further complements the
connections through the planting and material choices, as well as an interconnected circulation system that
allows visitors to access all areas of the park. The site changes through a series of shaded streetscapes from
the busy retail/residential areas in the west to outdoor activity areas and then to serene spaces in the east.
This diversity in public realm adds to the unique and dynamic experience of the user and the sense of the
place, making Al Gewan a unique island for both residents and visitors alike.

LANDSCAPE TYPOLOGIES

Different landscape characters are selected based on the planning of the urban layout, key landmarks and
the landscape concept. Each character area is further developed based on its location, unique setting and
activity program. In addition, these distinct areas are interconnected through a softscape and hardscape
material selection, and an inclusive circulation system.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 102 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

LINEAR PARK

The linear park reflects the breaking wave concept with bold and deviating patterns within the design
framework. A main pedestrian path is established to recreate the strong patterns that portray the breaking
wave movement in form, intensity and fluctuating direction. The connecting path acts as a way-finding
component that leads and encounters visitors into a diversity of interconnected spaces though an inclusive
pedestrian circulation. Each area accommodates a new experience rich in functions and activities. The
linear park is also interpreted as the breathing space of the island as it provides vistas for the villas, provides
a quiet space for the visitors to enjoy while being designed with a balance between the hardscape and
softscape material.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 103 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 104 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 105 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

STREESTSCAPE

Al Giwan streetscape is inter-connected and guided by the circulation movement while using unique,
sustainable material and paving finishes. For instance, granite finish pre-cast concrete paving is used in
order to distinguish vehicular spaces from pedestrian ones. At the same time, forming pavement designs
in order to re-enforce different character areas within each zone. Furthermore, pedestrian crossings, raised
tables are introduced to facilitate the pedestrian movement for all ages and to serve all abilities. Trees are
positioned in a linear continuous form, along with the planting and furnishing zone for shading purposes,
visual accessibility and to avoid any disturbance with underground utility corridors. In addition, seating
benches, litter bins and lighting poles are placed along sidewalks and are embedded within the pedestrian
network to offer an alternate way of commuting. On one hand, shared surfaces are integrated and are
allocated by symbol signage. While on the other hand, a cycle network is introduced, along with its proper
cycle parks/racks that connect all areas to each other in order to encourage an eco-friendly neighborhood
and promote a healthy lifestyle.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 106 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

a. Bicycle and Pedestrian Connection

Road hierarchy is illustrated in the following diagram based on different types of land uses and
ROW widths. In Al Giwan streetscape, the vehicular movement system forms an inter-connected
loop that extends and connects to the furthest areas of the island. Therefore, the roads along the
streetscape are displayed in a homogeneous way while respecting the different ROW widths,
different softscape and hardscape materials. The streetscape roads are separated into two
distinctive sides; one that provides tree planting, shade provision and a cycle lane. While the
other, caters the building interface and setback with the maximum shade needed.

Cycle Route Drop Curbs

Pedestrian crossing points Raised Tables

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 107 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

b. Streetscape Typology

Al Giwan streetscape exhibits six different road typologies that are illustrated in
the following diagram. In order of location, they are represented as the
following: Waterfront Street, Retail Street, Retail Connection, Residential
Street, Park Side Street, and High-End Villas Street.

RETAIL RESIDENTIAL ISLAND VILLAS

WATERFRONT VILLAS RESIDENTIAL

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 108 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

WATERFRONT VILLAS

SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PATTERN – 15m ROAD

SCALE 1:20

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 109 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

RETAIL

SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PATTERN – 15m ROAD

SCALE 1:20

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 110 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

RESIDENTIAL

SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PATTERN – 16m ROAD

SCALE 1:20

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 111 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

RESIDENTIAL

SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PATTERN – 16m ROAD

SCALE 1:20

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 112 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

ISLAND VILLAS

SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PATTERN – 15m ROAD

SCALE 1:20

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 113 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

LANDSCAPE TREATMENT

a. Utility area
Al Giwan streetscape provides several and different utility types; ones are allocated above ground, while others are placed under. The way utilities are disposed
affects the landscape fabric in different ways. For instance, some impact the open spaces and parks highly, specifically where electric substations and waste water
pump stations are located. Whereas others have low impact, especially where irrigation reservoirs and HEX buildings are placed. Accordingly, special treatment
is applied within the streetscape such as vegetation buffering to respect utilities disposition and in order to reduce the hazardous impact on the landscape.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 114 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

b. Landscape Buffer

The landscape treatment around the utility building is developed in order to preserve
the area and reduce green disturbance. Hence, the area surrounding the utility
building is kept unobstructed from trees in order to provide ease of access, visibility
and maintenance. A 5m clearance inside plot limits is provided for vehicular access.
Furthermore, where the underground cable lines are passing, a 4m wide space is
provided for connecting cables with clearance from trees; with only designed paved
material and low vegetation. Screening is also applied from the rear of the substation,
adjacent to the park side for site buffering and protection.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 115 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

c. Landscape above-underground utility facility

The paved landscape treatment is used above the utility area in a way to allow access
points in order to reach the facility building. In places where the facility requires
ventilation, air vents are provided in adequate and strategic locations. Furthermore,
the air vents are chosen with a particular design style that is appropriate to the purpose
and that fits the surrounding context.

Example of Air Vents

For Utilities the following principles shall apply:

 Where trees are located close to utilities, consider protecting cables/ pipes
with UPVC ducting / sleeves or root barriers root barriers.
 Where utilities are known to be present, tree species shall be selected that
do not impact on below ground utilities.
 Utility inspection boxes shall be kept out of the pedestrian through zone.
 Trees shall be planted away from utilities especially waste and surface
water pipes.
 Consider utilising raised planters where below ground excavation is not
possible.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 116 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

SOFTSCAPE PALETTE

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 117 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 118 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

HARDSCAPE PALETTE Pedestrian on grade

Dark grey color

MATERIAL TYPE SPECIFICATIONS IMAGE
Granite Banding Honed Finish

On pedestrian sidewalk 300 x 300 x 50mm

Beige Color
Granite Tiles – Type 1
Honed Finish
Vehicular road
400 x 400 x 60mm
Natural stone granite set
Granite Paver – Vehicular
Grey color
road
On pedestrian sidewalk Honed Finish

Beige Color 150 x 150 x 180mm

Granite Tiles – Type 2
Honed Finish

200 x 200 x 60mm

Vehicular road on parallel
parking

Granite Paver – Vehicular Brick color

On pedestrian sidewalk parallel parking
Honed Finish
Grey Color
Granite Tiles – Type 3 80 x 160 x 80mm
Honed Finish

100 x 100 x 60mm

On bridge sidewalks

Brick color
Pedestrian on grade Granite Paver – Bridges
Honed Finish
Light Grey Color or Beige
Granite Tiles – On Grade 100 x 100 x 80mm
Honed Finish

600 x 600 x 40mm

Primer and aliphatic

polyurethane body
Tennis Court Paving
Brick color

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 119 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

Thick loose sand

For playing areas

Sand 200mm thick

Stone Mulch

Gravel Grey color

100mm filling Paving Flag

Precast Concrete
70mm thick

For pedestrian use

Limestone/Marble Rubber Flooring for kids area

Stone Tiles
White/Light grey/Beige color

50mm thick

VALUE ENGINEERING

During the concept design phase of the project, an extensive hardscape and softscape palette was provided
Honed finish in order to assess alternative design treatment. A cost estimate was conducted in the concept stage which
included high to low cost options for various materials. During concept stage evaluation and review, there
Marble Stone White color was clear instruction by the Client to use high end material. Thus, the preliminary design development
stage has implemented the comments of the Client especially in the use of high end hardscape material
500 x 250 x 40mm (granite, marble, limestone) and this resulted in an increase of total cost estimate than the previously
submitted concept design cost evaluation.

Dark color

Light Beige color

Limestone – Type 1
250 x 500mm

Bush Hammer Finish

Limestone – Type 2 Light Beige color

500 x 500 x 40mm

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 120 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

DESIGN PRINCIPLES

1. Accessibility Principles

During the design, planning and construction of accessible spaces and buildings, a wide range of
opportunities exist not only to enhance independent access for persons with disabilities but also to improve
access for all. The major objective is to provide practical solutions on Al Mourjan Island that optimize
accessibility to buildings, facilities and spaces. The objective will be to emphasize dignity and
independence through the provision of features that will allow all people to function in their day-to-day
activities.

For Accessibility the following design principles shall apply:

 Delineate space and activity using visual contrast.

 Incorporate physical features at ground level such as tactile surface finishes.
 Incorporate intermittent or continuous physical features, above surface level such as bollards, trees,
long planters, rows of seating and railings.
 Surface gradients and cross-falls should be kept to a minimum.
 Consider the siting and provision of appropriate crossing points of routes.
 Locate building entrances so that they are convenient for pedestrians and cyclists, rather than
drivers of private cars.
 Ensure that there are appropriate safe and convenient pedestrian crossings for busy roads and
streets that relate to pedestrian desire lines.
 Consider the location of all public transport facilities, routes and stops.
 Provide waiting areas for public transport that are safe and shaded.
 Consider and cater for the needs of cyclists by providing or supporting a network of convenient
safe cycle routes, lanes and crossings.
 Incorporate high quality pedestrian and cycle facilities (including the provision of changing and
shower facilities), at key destinations such as local retail and leisure facilities, parks, Beach
Promenade and Boardwalk.
 Integrate secure cycle parking within retail and residential developments to meet the potential
cycle needs of their occupants and visitors.
 Incorporate appropriate traffic calming measures.
 Where appropriate create car free zones or ‘Home Zones’ where pedestrians have priority.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 121 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

2. Sustainable Design Principles c. Materials

Sustainability is not just about creating urban and green spaces, but about implementing design that can
benefit both humans and ecosystems simultaneously. All development impacts on the environment either
directly through the generation of carbon emissions and utilization of natural resources or indirectly by
impacting on the lifestyle decisions of communities. Development must therefore be designed and
constructed in a sustainable way, as articulated through national codes for sustainable buildings.
 Developments should maximize the use of low and zero carbon technologies, increase energy and
water efficiency, and reduce levels of waste and environmental degradation.
 New development should respect the Al Mourjan Island and sea natural environment, the local
topography with distinctive views and existing landscape structure.
 The integration of existing habitats and wildlife corridors, the provision of adequate levels of
planting and protection, should be key design features of the proposal.
In order to achieve these goals materials, water, soil and plants should be considered valuable resources
to be conserved and protected where possible.
a. Grading, Earthworks and Soils
 Ensure materials are from local sustainable sources, appropriate for Al Mourjan Island and are
harvested/produced in a sustainable manner (e.g. plants grown in local nurseries).
 Focus on the “3 Rs” when acquiring materials and supplies — reduce, reuse, recycle.
 Select materials not only to reduce the carbon foot-print of the project but also to ensure longevity,
sustainable maintenance and upkeep.
 Choose materials with regional character to cultivate a sense of place and establish a connection to
the natural history and cultural traditions of Doha area.
 Conserve, protect and re-use existing site materials.
 Select long-lasting, durable materials that require to be replaced less frequently. Select materials,
where possible and appropriate, made from recycled products e.g. plastic lumber, asphalt with
rubber tyres, concrete made from fly ash.
 Avoid materials that cannot be recycled and reused easily.
 Location and Micro-Climate
 Utilize wind funneling between buildings for cooling effect.
 Maximize use of existing shade from buildings, structures and vegetation.
 Ensure landscapes are accessible.

 Protect existing slopes and natural topography where possible.

 Encourage storm water retention, design slopes and surfaces to reduce runoff and replenish
groundwater.
 Design and manage in order to reduce material removal and wastage. All existing material should
be accommodated on site where possible.
 Design and manage construction in order to reduce soil compaction.
 Protect, conserve and re-use on site all existing topsoil.
b. Planting

 Employ a natural approach to design.

 Protect and enhance valuable ecosystems and habitats.
 Select the right plant for the location.
 Incorporate plant species that are specifically adapted to the conditions of the location, reducing
the need for supplemental irrigation and pest / disease control.
 Specify locally sourced plants of local provenance where possible.
 Practice Integrated Pest Management to reduce reliance on chemical pesticides.
 Avoid indiscriminate use of manufactured fertilizers. Utilize nutrients only according to
recommendations and after a thorough soil analysis.
 Limit use of high-maintenance turf grass and replace with lower-maintenance groundcovers.
 Plant low water requirement ground covers or drought tolerant grass and use absorbent soil
mixtures to promote infiltration and help manage storm-water.
 Avoid the introduction of invasive species into existing ecosystems.
 Strive for diversity and biomass by establishing and protecting areas of biological richness through
use of endemic species / native plants.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 122 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

3. Passive Cooling Principles
The urban climate of Al Mourjan Island can be effectively modified through restricting the amount of heat
energy absorbed, stored and transferred, and by adopting cooling strategies. Cooling strategies can be
simple design choices that can have a great impact on the temperature experienced on Al Mourjan and
help make it a more comfortable environment. The objective is to reduce the amount of heat in the Island
environment, utilizing passive cooling strategies that require little to no energy consumption.
a. Vegetation
When air flows through a vegetated area, the plants reduce temperature and increase humidity through a
process called evapotranspiration. Due to differences in pressure breezes are generated which help cool
surroundings areas. Even small parks, green spaces and garden areas can be efficient cooling sources.
c. Shaded Areas
Vegetation can be very effective as it delivers several mechanisms of cooling simultaneously and in a
Shading can reduce the temperature of paved surfaces by 11-25°C relative to peak temperatures in
complementary manner. Planting trees and plants lowers surface and air temperatures by providing shade
unshaded areas. The design including shape, angle, height and general arrangement must be taken into
and cooling through evapo-transpiration. The extent to which vegetation provides a cooling effect depends
account to provide maximum effective shade and generation of cooling breezes.
on both species selection and also arrangement. The use of trees with low foliage temperature and canopy
size, structure and density will provide greater cooling, and also influence the extent of shading. Trees can
filter pollutants and dust particles, cast shade and cool air temperatures. The crown shape of the tree is as
important as the density of its leaves. Taller, columnar trees will direct and funnel breezes while trees with
large spreading crowns will cast more shade. To achieve passive cooling using vegetation the following
guidance in the choice of trees and their location is required:
 Small-leafed tree species are more effective at cooling and maintaining lower crown temperatures
d. Further Design Considerations and Influences
than those of larger-leafed species.
 Trees with larger canopies tend to cast more shade and deliver greater rainwater management and
biodiversity benefits than smaller ornamental species. Tree species selection shall also consider the
following:
1. Native and adapted species that have high levels of heat tolerance
2. Native and adapted species that are drought tolerant
3. Native and adapted species that are pest, disease and pollution tolerant
 Rooting zone availability and sensitivity to compaction including adequate soil for growth, root
space, moisture, oxygen and nutrient availability determine the size that a tree will reach over its
life span. Trees require the growing environment to achieve full potential.
 Trees can be placed in order to directly shade buildings in order to lower summertime energy
demand and so cool the building’s indoor climate.
 Trees can be arranged in order to funnel winds and breezes such as avenue planting.
b. Cool Pavements
 Pavements with higher solar reflectance that are relatively cooler in the sun. Smooth, light colored
and flat surfaces should be specified rather than rough and dark colored which tend to absorb more
solar radiation.
 For asphalt pavements using light-colored aggregate, color pigments, or sealants, the reflectance
of conventional asphalt can be increased. Maintenance applications such as chip seals also can
increase solar reflectance.
 Permeable materials and vegetation allow cooling by evaporation. Hard impervious materials
accumulate heat. Permeable materials shall be used where possible.
 Permeable pavements and storage infrastructures are beneficial strategies for both periods of
drought and flooding. Permeable pavements shall be used where applicable.
 The addition of elements like tensile shade structures helps provide shade and cool the pavement
and therefore reduce the amount of heat absorbed. Tensile shade structures shall be used for
protection for play areas, games courts, plazas, seating areas car parking and information points.
 Pergolas and gazebos should be considered for walkways and seating areas where broken shade is
required.
 Street width-height ratio influences airflow patterns, increasing or reducing wind speed.
Ventilation is a great passive cooling strategy as it also contributes to the dispersion of suspended
particles and polluting gases.
 Vertical or horizontal green surfaces on or close to buildings can improve energy performance and
the environmental micro-climate of the surroundings. Annual energy consumption in buildings
with green roofs can be 16 percent lower than those with conventional roofs.
 Water can either cool by evaporation or by absorbing heat. Water features are a lot more effective
if the water is flowing, in movement with fountains, jets or mist. Water features are particularly
recommended in high-use gathering areas including plazas and entrances to civic buildings and
facilities.
 Building density and geometry influences the amount of solar radiation that reaches buildings and
surfaces, which can store heat and therefore increase temperature both indoors and outdoors.
Buildings cast shade, can encourage wind funneling and the generation of breezes when correctly
arranged and also benefit through the incorporation of vegetation and movable shading devices
that can be removed in winter.
 Walls, berms, vegetated banks and dunes can also provide shade, encourage breezes and so
influence cooling.

Paving materials that lower surface temperatures are available and can be utilized for footpaths, plazas,
streets, parking area and other facilities that require paved surfaces. Cool pavement options are available
for typical materials like asphalt and concrete, as well as unpaved surfaces.

There are several cool pavement alternatives:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 123 of 257

Gewan Island PK2-Infrastructure Works

4. Shade  Ensure a good balance of seating is located so as to benefit from existing shade trees and permanent
shade.
Shade is essential in Qatar, for the enjoyment of active and passive recreation pursuits and particularly  Consider the use of different intensities of shade including: full, deep, half, filtered and light shade
throughout the summer months. The simple act of walking from the house door to a local shop can be very for various locations
uncomfortable when no shade is provided. Shade from buildings, trees and structure can be invaluable
along with cooling breezes created through the arrangement of buildings, walls and structures. Types of
shade include:

Deep or Full shade: Areas subject to no direct sunlight. Spaces under the canopy of a dense tree, a roof or
an overhang. A specimen planted in these conditions must be able to thrive without any direct sun, yet
withstand high temperatures.

Open Shade: Areas that are open to the sky but do not receive any direct sun. An example of this type of
shade would be a location shaded by a tall building or wall.

Partial Shade: Locations that receive six hours or less of direct sunshine during the day. Plants located
along an east-facing wall or on the east side of taller plants receive morning sun only, and experience
cooler temperatures earlier in the day. Vegetation along a west-facing structure will get the more intense
sunlight of the afternoon hours.

Filtered or Dappled Shade: Areas beneath pergolas open-branched trees. Such areas may be relatively
bright, without receiving any direct sun.

In order to provide an environment that is comfortable to walk and relax in for the majority of the year the
following principles shall apply for providing shade:

 Shade should be provided in areas of pedestrian congregation including junctions, pedestrian

crossings and transit stops.
 Consideration shall be given to shading street parking and building entrances.
 Shade shall be provided for children’s play areas and spaces.
 The following shading requirements for future phases of development within the area of impact
shall be:

1. 75% for play areas

2. 50% for seating areas

3. 25% for primary walkways

4. 25% for plazas

5. 15% for secondary walkways

6. 10% for cycle tracks

 The majority of shade should be natural, utilizing trees, building shadows or arcade frontage.
Where possible vegetation shall be used for shading purposes.
 Appropriate spreading canopy, shade trees shall be used for natural shade.
 Lines of visibility shall be retained for natural surveillance and sight-lines for vehicles.
 Allow air to flow through the shade structures for natural ventilation.
 Ensure position of shade does not obstruct pedestrian circulation.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 124 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

14 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN

INTRODUCTION

This section presents the geotechnical related aspects of the preliminary design of the infrastructure,
Roadworks and Utility buildings within the Gewan Island Project. It provides a brief summary on the
gathered information regarding the site geology, available subsurface investigation data, and the detailed
subsurface investigation works performed for the project area. This report also presents the analysis of
subsurface investigation results, basis of design along with preliminary foundation design, and its related
geotechnical recommendations, the criteria for selecting the most suitable cement type and adequate
protection measures for concrete elements in contact with soil and groundwater.

REGIONAL GEOLOGY

Qatar sits on the eastern edge of the Arabian Peninsula, and forms a part of the western Arabian Gulf Basin.
This basin is essentially composed of rather thick carbonate sequences overlying the basement rocks and
may reach up to 10 km in thickness.

Most of Qatar in general, and Greater Doha in particular, are underlain by the Simsima Limestone Member
(Edm2SM) of the Upper Dammam Formation. The Simsima Member may reach up to 25m in thickness
and consists of crystalline limestone and dolomitic limestones with vugs and pores that might be filled
with silty/clayey materials. Underlying the Simsima Formation are the Lower Dammam Midra Shales,
with clays and limestone intercalations. The Dammam Formation overlies the Rus Formation. The
prevailing geology is masked by a thin natural soil cover consisting of sand and gravel.

Given the presence of sulphate facies within the Rus Formation, some collapse structures might be locally
encountered. These are thought to be initiated by the dissolution of the anhydrite/gypsum beds of the
underlying Rus Formation. In addition, cavities that may be infilled with clayey material may be
encountered within the Simsima Member. As such, the potential for cavities within the Simsima Member
should be investigated during the subsequent stages.
GEOLOGY OF PROJECT SITE
The project area is located in Gewan Island inside the Arabian Gulf, which is approximately 10 km north
of Doha City and 6 km south of Lusail. The present project area is lying over a reclaimed and filled area.
As per the available Site investigation reports the thickness of these fills varies approximately from 2.0 to
5.0 m.
The available subsurface investigation data suggests that, the geology of the project area comprises mainly
of Limestones and Dolomitic Limestones of Simsima member (ranges from 4.0 to 20.0m BGL), which is
overlain by marine deposits comprising of calcareous sand, silt and gravels of limestone and calcarenite
(ranges from 1.0 to 4.0m BGL), followed by artificially filled materials. At the depth of around 20 to 25m
BGL, Shales of Midra shale member and Limestone and Dolomitic Limestones of Rus Formation are also
encountered below the Simsima Limestones.
Figure 14.1: Geological Map of the Gewan Island Project Area, Qatar. (Original Scale 1: 2,10,000)
EXISTING INVESTIGATIONS AND SURVEYS AT GEWAN ISLAND
Available Subsurface Investigation programs, performed nearby Gewan Island were considered at early
design stage to assess the nature of the founding terrain within the project area. These investigations are
as follows:
 Preliminary subsurface investigation West Bay Island (ref. PQ/1080/03/02V1-FUGRO)
 Geotechnical investigation West Bay Island-Phase2 (ref. PQ/0771/04/04-FUGRO)
 Geotechnical investigation West Bay Island (ref. GD/1493/SI-GULF LABS)
 Vibro-core Campaign (ref. 3609/FDP/250404/04-DREDGING INTERNATIONAL)
 Preliminary Geotechnical Site Investigation for Temporary Island at the Pearl Qatar
(ref.S16000111-rev0-ACES)
Figure 14.2 shows the location of the previously performed boreholes within the surrounding areas. Out
of these existing data, Gewan Island related data comprised 10 onshore boreholes executed on the main
island, with depths varying from 8m to 15m, and 10 trial pits which were 3m in depth. For the marine
elements, 4 offshore boreholes along the coast of the main island and 14 boreholes in the vicinity of the
marina island were considered. The depth of these boreholes were varying between 3m to 15m. Several
vibrocores were used as well.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 125 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

The outcomes of the available investigations were considered while preparing the detailed subsurface Laboratory tests are being carried out on soil/rock samples according to the relevant local standards,
investigation for this project. ASTM, and British standards. The tests include:

PROPOSED DETAILED INVESTIGATION PROGRAM  Classification tests such as grain size analysis (1 to 2 tests/BH), selected sedimentation tests,
determination of Atterberg limits (approx.. 1 test/BH), determination of natural moisture
A detailed Geotechnical subsurface investigation program is planned to define the prevailing subsurface content and of natural density on selected samples,
conditions, and to provide necessary information for the proposed works and to understand the mechanical
and engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials. Figures 14-3 and 14-4 shows the proposed  Mechanical tests such as shear tests (direct tests) (1test/2BH), consolidation tests in the
borehole and test pits locations on updated master plan. oedometer
 Moisture content / Dry density relationship (1 test/BH)
The site investigation works comprised the following activities:  4-day soaked CBR test (1 test/trial pit)
 Selected chemical testing on soil and groundwater samples (PH, Sulphate and Chloride) to
 Drilling of 57 onshore boreholes with depths varying between 10m and 25m,
assess their possible aggressiveness on concrete and reinforcement
 Drilling of 59 offshore boreholes with depths varying between 10m and 25m,
 Uniaxial compression tests when RQD allows selecting sample (1 test/BH) along with
 Excavating 10 test pits along the axes of the proposed paved areas to a depth of 3m so as to
determination of Young’s Modulus (1 test/BH) and Point Load tests on the rock samples (1 to
explore the shallow subsurface stratigraphy
2 tests/BH),
 Installing 8 piezometers within selected boreholes to measure and monitor the ground water
 Environmental sampling/testing program
level during the investigation period
 Carrying out In-situ Standard Penetration Tests within all boreholes at 1.0 m intervals Approximate proposed total counts of tests are:
 Locating natural ground water table encountered in each borehole  Classification tests: 90
 Carrying out in-situ permeability tests to determine the permeability of the foundation soils and  Atterberg limits: 32
bedrock  Moisture content: 27
 Direct shear tests: 20
Table 14-1: Boreholes Under Each Planned Structures
 CBR tests: 10
Name of Structure No of Boreholes Borehole Depth (m)  Chemical tests: 15
Golf course* 3 10  Uniaxial compression test: 72
Utilities 4 10 to 20
 Point load index tests: 115
Villas 5 10
Mixed Use Buildings –Central Spine 19 12 to 25 The environmental investigation on soil and groundwater samples include the following required tests for
(Commercial + Residential) each of the 5 boreholes and 6 tests pits selected.
Mixed Use Buildings –Promenade (Commercial 10 13 to 25
+ Residential)  Organic compounds
Water front villas 8 10 to 25  pH
Beach front villas 5 10 to 25  Major nutrients - nitrogen (N)
Mosque 2 10 to 12
Club House 2 10 to 25  Phosphorus (P)
Entrance bridge from TPQ 6 18 to 25  Potassium (K)
Bridge (Causeway to AQ) 2 25  Secondary nutrients - e.g. sulphur
Ritz Carlton Bridge 2 25  Calcium
Island Villas Bridge Spanning over Navigational 3 25
 Magnesium
Channel
Bridge crossing Pipes 2 20  Minor nutrients - e.g. iron, manganese
Quay Wall (Main Island) 6 12  Copper
Navigation Channel Relocation 9 10  Zinc
QQ9 8 25  Boron
Revetments/Groynes/Beaches (Marina ISLAND) 11 10
 Aluminium
Revetments/Groynes/Beaches (MAIN ISLAND) 13 10
 Mercury
 Lead
 Electrical conductivity

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 126 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

 Soil organic matter

 Moisture content
 Soil and groundwater contaminants (e.g., VOC, TPH, BETX)
The above mentioned environmental investigation is prepared to comply with the requirements of the
Environmental Assessment process of Qatar as laid down in Decree Law No 30, 2002 for the protection
of the environment and its executive by law and the Ministry of Municipality and Environment (MME)
requirements.

The below table summarizes the performed in-situ and laboratory investigation program till date. The
results of these investigations are analysed in this report in the aim of determining the geotechnical design
parameters characterizing the founding soil layers.

Table 14-2: Summary of Performed In-Situ and Laboratory Tests

Description Quantity

Drilling and Coring

Boreholes 88
Trial Pits (not exceeding 3 m deep) 10
In-situ Testing
SPT (N) 505
TCR,SCR,RQD 1197
Laboratory Testing
Wet Sieve Analysis 83
Atterberg Limits 22
Moisture Content 27
Bulk Density 13
Dry Density 13
Unconfined Compressive Strength 70
Modulus of Elasticity 34
Point Load 118
Chemical Analysis on Soil and Ground Water Samples
Sulphate (as SO3) on soil sample 15
Sulphate (as SO3) on water sample 5
Chloride (as Cl) on soil sample 15
Chloride (as Cl) on water sample 5
pH in Soil 15
pH in Water 5

The geotechnical investigation results obtained from the Subsurface Investigation program are analysed
and interpreted in the following sections so as to deduce the design parameters of the founding soil/rock
and provide recommendations for the preliminary foundation design of the planned structures,
infrastructure services, pavement design, and associated earthworks.

The geotechnical subsurface investigation is in progress. The summary of in-situ and laboratory tests
(Table 14-2) will be updated upon receipt of all the in-situ and laboratory test results.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 127 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 14.2: Existing Subsurface Investigation

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 128 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 14.3: Planned Subsurface Investigation (Borehole Locations)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 129 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 14.4: Planned Subsurface Investigation (Test Pit Locations)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 130 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

In addition to the extensive subsurface investigation program, Seismic Refraction Survey was conducted
in March 2018 along four lines altogether by using 24 geophone configurations (having spacing of 3m).
This investigation is performed in order to identify the subsurface conditions and to identify the top of the
rock and profile the ground.
The geophysical investigations consist of about 1.2 Km of seismic refraction survey, located at the quay
wall location (onshore side) as shown in Figure 14.5.
Highly weathered, off white to light grey, weak Simsima Limestone.
4. Simsima Limestone (Unit U2b):
Slightly to moderately weathered, off white to light grey, weak to strong Simsima Limestone.
5. Midra Shale (Unit U3):
Slightly weathered, light brownish grey, weak to strong Limestone (Midra Shale).

6. Rus Formation (Unit U4):

Slightly weathered, light yellowish brown, weak to strong Limestone (Rus Formation).

The typical core photos of units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3 and U4 are shown in Figure 14-6 to 14-10.

Figure 14.6: Typical Core Photo for Unit- U1c

Figure 14.5: Planned Geophysical Investigation

Figure 14.7: Typical Core Photo for Unit- U2a
SOIL STRATIGRAPHY

Based on the results of the performed investigations and collected geological information, the following
sub-surface units are encountered within Gewan Island site area:

1. Fill Material (Unit U5):

Medium dense to dense, creamy to light brown, fine to coarse grained, silty Sand with Gravel of
limestone, intermixed with some shell fragments.

2. Marine Deposits (Unit U1) / Caprock (Unit U1c) :

Light grey, very silty, shelly, fine to coarse, silicious carbonate marine Sands interbedded with
slightly weathered, grey to black, fine to coarse, weak Calcarenite (Caprock) and localized loose Silt Figure 14.8: Typical Core Photo for Unit- U2b
layers.

3. Weathered Simsima Limestone (Unit U2a):

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 131 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

SPT [N]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0

U1
5 U1C
U2a
10 U2b

Depth [m]
U3
Figure 14.9: Typical Core Photo for Unit- U3
15 U4
U5

20

25

Figure 14.11: SPT Versus Depth

The histogram below shows the distribution of the SPT results for samples retrieved from U1, U1c, U2a,
Figure 14.10: Typical Core Photo for Unit- U4 U2b, U3, U4, and U5 units.

Appendix A of this report presents the geological cross sections prepared based on the received subsurface 100
investigation results to date. 90 U1 U1C U2a U2b U3 U4 U5

80
GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS
70

Percentage [%]
Current Groundwater 60
50
Groundwater was encountered in all boreholes at variable depths ranging between 2 m to 3.55 m below
40
the existing ground surface, which correspond to levels between -0.72 and +0.82 m QNHD.
30
Design Ground Water Table 20
10
The preliminary water level to be considered in the design for Gewan Island (i.e. the Design Ground Water
0
Level, DGWL) is +2.55 m QNHD. <4 4-10 10-30 30-50
SPT [N]
INSITU AND LABORATORY TESTING

Standard Penetration Tests Figure 14.12: Distribution of SPT Results

During borehole drilling, Standard Penetration Tests were performed every 1m in the upper soil layers and The table below summarizes the statistical analysis of the SPT test results for U1, U1c, U1s, U2, U3, U4,
in highly weathered layers encountered in depth within the caprock and bedrock formations. The aim of and U5.
the Standard Penetration Test is to obtain the blow counts “N”, to evaluate/deduce the shear strength and
the compressibility parameters of the soil.

The SPT (N) values, relevant to each soil/rock formation, are plotted versus depth on the figure below.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 132 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 14-3: Summary Table for SPT Table 14-5: Summary Table for Particle Size Distribution
SPT U1 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5 Unit Gravel Sand Silt Clay Number of
Minimum 0 0 0 50 36 14 1 Tests
Maximum 50 50 50 50 36 50 50 U1 31 44 23 2 31
Average 16 45 49 50 36 32 24 U1c 60 25 14 1 2
Standard Deviation 17 13 6 0 - 25 15 U2a 64 23 12.3 0.7 6
Average - 0.5×Std Dev 7 38 46 50 - 19 16 U5 47 38 14.4 0.6 44
90th Percentile 50 50 50 50 36 46 50
Based on the above summary table, it can be observed that in all the units comprise dominant gravel and
10th Percentile 0 29 50 50 36 18 6
sand formation with some fines content which are silty in nature.
Number of Tests 121 79 182 9 1 2 110
Atterberg Limits
Table 14-4 presents the guidelines that correlate the consistency of non-cohesive soils for a given range of
SPT values. Nine (9) Atterberg’s limits (Liquid Limit (LL) and Plastic Limit (PL)) tests were performed in accordance
with ASTM D 4318-10 testing procedures on U1 and U5 samples collected from the boreholes from
Table 14-4: Consistency of Non-Cohesive Soil (Burt Look, 2007) various depths. The majority of these tests have reported Non-Plastic soils and in one test the soil has been
reported to be medium plastic.
Term Symbol SPT-N-values Density Index
Very Loose VL <4 <15 Based on the Sieve analysis and Atterberg limits results, it can be deduced that the subsurface soil at the
Loose L 4-10 15-35 Gewan Island site can be generally classified as sandy GRAVEL with non-plastic silt.
Medium Dense MD 10-30 36-65
Dense D 30-50 65-85 Moisture Content
Very Dense VD >50 >85
Cemented C >50 N/A Moisture content tests were performed on U1, U2a and U5 samples collected from the boreholes from
different depths and following ASTM D2216-10 testing procedure.
Based on the above results, it can be observed that the SPT values for soil units (U1, U1c and U5) vary
The figure below shows the variation of moisture content values with respect to depth for each of the
between 0 and 50, with an average of 16, 45, and 24 respectively. It reflects that U1 and U5 exhibit medium
above mentioned units.
dense soil layers while U1c represents dense soil layer. Few SPT tests were performed wherever soil
inclusions/lenses were encountered within the rock units. The average SPT values for rock units (U2a and
Moisture Content (%)
U2b) are close to 50. The majority of the reported values are exceeding 50 (as can be depicted from 10th
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
percentile values which are equal to 50) revealing very dense highly weathered rock formations. 0

Wet Sieve Analysis

5 U1
In order to identify the soil classification of the encountered soil layers, particle size analysis tests were

Depth [m]
conducted on soil samples retrieved from soil layers U1, U1c and U5, and from weathered rock layer U2a, 10
following BS 1377 Part 2 : 1990 testing procedures. The particle size distribution is determined by wet U2a
sieving.
15
Referring to the table below, the “gravel ” group represent the particles that were retained by sieve No.4 U5
(4.75 mm size), the “sand” group represent the particles passing sieve No.4 and retained by sieve No.200
20
(75μm size), and the “fines” group represent the particles passing the No.200 sieve. The fines group was
further sub-divided into silt (particle size ranging between 75μm to 2 μm) and clay (particle size finer than
2 μm) based on the results of wet-sieve tests. 25

The table below shows the average particle size distribution of units U1, U1c, U2a, and U5 based on the Figure 14.13: Moisture Content Versus Depth
retrieved samples.
The histogram below shows the distribution of the moisture content results for each unit.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 133 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Rock Quality Indices

120
The Total Core Recovery (TCR), Solid Core Recovery (SCR) and Rock Quality Designation (RQD) have
been measured and recorded from the retrieved rock cores and certain number of cores retrieved from soil
100
unit U5 which represents dredged fill.
U1
80 The variations of TCR, SCR and RQD values, within each unit, versus depth are plotted and summarized
Percentage [%]

as per below sections.

60
U2a Total Core Recovery (TCR)

40 The figure below shows the TCR index with respect to depth for units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3, and U4 from
the extracted cores within the layer.
U5
20
TCR [%]

0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
<20 20-40 40-90 0

Moisture Content [%] 5

10
Figure 14.14: Distribution of Moisture Content Result for Each Unit
15
The table below summarizes the moisture content statistics for each unit.
20

Depth [m]
Table 14-6: Summary Table for Moisture Content
25
Moisture Content (%) U1 U2a U5
Minimum 10 20 1 30
Maximum 31 20 26
Average 21 20 12 35
Standard Deviation 7 - 8
Average + 0.5 x Std Dev 25 - 16 40
U1C U2a U2b U3 U4
90th Percentile 30 20 20
45
10th Percentile 11 20 1
Number of Tests 15 1 11 50

Based on the above figures and table, the average values of the moisture content results for all the units Figure 14.15: TCR Versus Depth
fall between 1 and 31%.

Dry and Bulk Unit Weight of Rock

Dry and Bulk Unit Weight of rock were measured while performing the unconfined compression tests (in
accordance ASTM D 7263-09 (Volumetric Method-B) on certain samples retrieved from the rock units
U2a and U2b. The dry unit weight values ranged between 18 kN/m3 and 23 kN/m3 while the bulk unit
weight values ranged between 19 kN/m3 and 23 kN/m3.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 134 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

The histogram below shows the distribution of the TCR results for each unit.
SCR [%]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
0
100

U1C U2a U2b U3 U4 5

90
10
80
15
70
20
Percentage [%]

Depth [m]
60
25
50
30
40
35
30
40
20 U1C U2a U2b U3 U4
45
10
50

0
0 - 25 25 - 50 50 - 75 75 - 90 > 90 Figure 14.17: SCR Versus Depth
TCR [%] The histogram below shows the distribution of the SCR results for each unit.

80
Figure 14.16: Distribution of the TCR Results U1C U2a U2b U3 U4
70
The table below summarizes the TCR results for each unit.
60
Table 14-7: Summary Table for TCR

Percentage [%]
50
TCR (%) U1C U2a U2b U3 U4
40
Minimum 0 0 0 0 0
Maximum 100 100 100 100 100 30
Average 83 77 95 94 87
Standard Deviation 20 26 9 13 16 20
Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 73 64 90 87 80
10
90th Percentile 100 100 100 100 100
10th Percentile 54 41 87 89 59 0
Number of Tests 98 674 352 38 35 0 - 25 25 - 50 50 - 75 75 - 90 > 90
SCR [%]
The average values of TCR are most often above 75% for all rock units indicating a good quality of drilling
of rock core within all five units.
Figure 14.18: Distribution of the SCR Results
Solid Core Recovery (SCR)
Table 14-8 summarizes the statistical analysis of the SCR results for each unit.
The figure below shows the SCR index with respect to depth for units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3 and U4.
14

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 135 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 14-8: Summary Table for SCR

100
SCR (%) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4
90
Minimum 0 0 0 0 0
Maximum 100 96 100 98 98 80

Average 53 17 60 68 56 70
Standard Deviation 30 21 24 30 27

Percentage [%]
60
Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 38 6 48 53 43
90th Percentile 88 49 92 97 88 50
th
10 Percentile 0 0 26 22 18
40
Number of Tests 98 674 352 38 35
30

The above table indicates that the average values of SCR are around 60% for all the units except U2a for 20
which the SCR average values are 17%. It is indicates that the rocky strata in U2a is highly weathered.
10
Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
0
0 - 25 25 - 50 50 - 75 75 - 90 > 90
Rock-quality designation (RQD) is a rough measure of the degree of jointing or fracture in a rock mass,
measured as a percentage of the drill core in lengths of 10 cm or more, per given meter of rock cores. RQD [%]

The figure below shows the RQD index with respect to depth for units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3 and U4. The Figure 14.20: Distribution of the RQD Results
values of RQD are relatively scattered for each of the five rock units.
The table below summarizes the RQD results for each rock unit.
RQD [%]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Table 14-9: Summary Table for RQD
0
RQD (%) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4
5 Minimum 0 0 0 0 0
Maximum 92 90 100 98 75
10
Average 39 7 42 57 33
15 Standard Deviation 28 14 28 33 24
Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 25 0 28 41 21
20
90th Percentile 75 27 81 95 66
Depth [m]

25 10th Percentile 0 0 0 0 0
Number of Tests 98 674 352 38 35
30

35
The five classes of the histogram correspond to the rock mass classification based on the range of RQD
values (Very Poor: 0-25, Poor: 25-50, Fair: 50-75, Good: 75-90, and Excellent: >90).
40
Accordingly, the rock can be classified as Very Poor within U2a (average of 7%) and classified as Poor
45 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 within U1c (average of 39%), U2b (average 42%) and U4 (average 33%), whereas the rock can be
classified as Fair within U3 which reveals an average RQD above 50%.
50
Further, typical correlation between RQD values and discontinuity spacing in rocks is presented in the
Figure 14.19: RQD Versus Depth table below.
The histogram below shows the distribution of the RQD results for each rock unit.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 136 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 14-10: Correlation between Rock Quality Designation (RQD) and Discontinuity Spacing
Is(50) [MPa]
RQD (%) Description Fracture frequency per Typical Mean Discontinuity 0 1 2 3 4 5
Metre Spacing (mm) 0
0-25 Very poor >15 <60
5
25-50 Poor 8-15 60-120
50-75 Fair 5-8 120-200 10
75-90 Good 1-5 200-500 15
90-100 Excellent ≤1 >500
20

Depth [m]
Based on this table and the average values of RQD for the rock units described herewith, it can be observed 25
that the fracture frequency per meter is greater than 15 per meter for U2a, 8 to 15 per meter for U1c, U2b 30
and U4, and 5 to 8 meter for U3. Whereas the typical mean discontinuity spacing is less than 60mm for
35
U2a, 60 mm to 120 mm for U1c, U2b and U4, and 120 mm to 200 mm for U3. This correlation is further
discussed in Section 5.3.8.2 for calculating the Rock Mass Rating for each rock unit. 40

45
Intact Rock Strength
50
U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5
Unconfined Compressive Strength and Point Load Index Tests 55

The Unconfined Compressive Strength and point load index tests were performed on samples retrieved 60
from rock units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3 and U4 in accordance with ASTM 7012-14 and ASTM D 5731-16
testing procedure, respectively. Figure 14.22: Is(50) Versus Depth

The directly measured UCS and Is(50), and the derived UCS from Is(50) values are plotted versus depth
UCS from Is(50) [MPa]
in the figures below.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
The UCS were derived from the Is(50) using the following equation: UCS= 10 x Is(50) 0

5
UCS [MPa]
10
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0 15

5 20

Depth [m]
25
10
30
15
35
20
Depth [m]

40
25
45
30
50
35 55 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5
40 60

45 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4

Figure 14.23: UCS, Derived from Is(50), Versus Depth
50

Figure 14.21: UCS Versus Depth

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 137 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

The histograms below show the distribution of the measured UCS and Is(50) values as well as the UCS 120
derived from Is(50) results, for each rock unit.
U1c

100 100 U2a

90 U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U2b

80

Percentage (%)
80 U3

70 60 U4
Percentage [%]

60 U5

50 40

40
20
30

20 0
<0.1 0.1 -0.3 0.3 - 1 1-3
10
Calculated UCS [MPa]
0
<1 1-5 5-25 >25
UCS [MPa]
Figure 14.26: UCS Values Derived from the Point Load Index Result

The tables below summarize the measured UCS, Is(50) and derived UCS from Is(50) results, for each
Figure 14.24: Distribution of the Measured UCS Results rock unit.

120 Table 14-11: Summary Table for Is(50)

U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5 Is50 (MPa) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5
100 Minimum 0.48 0.10 0.05 0.04 0.17 1.14
Maximum 3.84 5.88 6.28 0.82 1.83 2.05
Average 1.82 1.54 1.60 0.33 0.78 1.60
80
Percentage (%)

Standard Deviation 1.02 1.46 1.69 0.28 0.78 -

Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 1.31 0.81 0.76 0.19 0.38 -
60 90th Percentile 3.31 3.90 4.23 0.64 1.55 1.96
10th Percentile 0.82 0.37 0.16 0.09 0.18 1.23
40 Number of Tests 16 50 40 6 4 2

Table 14-12: Summary Table for Calculated UCS

20
Calculated UCS (MPa) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 U5
0 Minimum 4.8 1 0.5 0 1.7 11.4
<0.1 0.1 -0.3 0.3 - 1 1-3 3-10 >10 Maximum 38.4 58.8 62.8 8.2 18.3 20.5
Is(50) [MPa] Average 18.2 15.4 16 3.3 7.8 16
Standard Deviation 10.2 14.6 16.9 2.8 7.8 6.4
Figure 14.25: Distribution of the Point Load Index Results Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 13.1 8.1 7.6 1.9 3.8 12.7
90th Percentile 33.1 39 42.3 6.4 15.5 19.6
10th Percentile 8.2 3.7 1.6 0.9 1.8 12.3
Number of Tests 16 50 40 6 4 2

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 138 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 14-13: Summary Table for Measured UCS Modulus of Elasticity [MPa]

UCS (MPa) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000
Minimum 4 4 3 3 8 0
Maximum 16 29 51 14 19 5
Average 11 14 16 8 13
Standard Deviation 4 10 10 4 8 10

Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 9 9 11 6 10 15

90th Percentile

Depth [m]
15 24 27 12 18
20
10th Percentile 5 6 6 4 9
Number of Tests 12 5 45 6 2 25

30
The UCS value of rock is one of the important parameters for classifying the intact rocks based on its
strength. The table below presents the UCS classification of intact rocks proposed by ISRM (1979). 35

Table 14-14: Strength Classification of Rock based on UCS values 40

U1c U2a U2b U3 U4
45
UCS (MPa) Strength
1-5 Very Low 50
5-25 Low
25-50 Moderate Figure 14.27: Young Modulus Versus Depth
50-100 Medium
The histogram below shows the distribution of the Young modulus results for each rock unit.
100-250 High
250-700 Very high
100

Based on the above table and considering the average measured values of UCS for various rock units, it 90
can be noted that all the rock units U1c, U2a and U2b can be described as low strength rock. U1c
80
Modulus of Elasticity 70 U2a

The Rock Young’s modulus was measured as part of the Unconfined Compression tests which were

Percentage [%]
60
performed in accordance with ASTM D 7012-14. The purpose of the Young’s modulus measurement is U2b
50
to obtain an estimation of the deformability and elasticity of the rock material under normal stresses during
the elastic phase of the test. 40
U3

The figure below shows the measured Young modulus values versus depth for units U1c, U2a, U2b, U3 30
and U4. 20 U4

10

0
<500 500-1000 1000-2000 >2000

Modulus of Elasticity [MPa]

Figure 14.28: Distribution of the Young Modulus Results

The table below summarizes the Young modulus results for each rock unit.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 139 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 14-15: Summary Table for Intact Young Modulus Table 14-17: Summary Table for Percentage of Chemical Aggressivity in Groundwater
Young’s Modulus (MPa) U1c U2a U2b U3 U4 Water Sample Chloride (%) Sulphate (%) pH
Minimum 21870 2000 590 960 590 Minimum 0.04 0.11 7.45
Maximum 73860 59390 104710 1440 590 Maximum 0.57 0.21 7.73
Average 55287 18950 23282 1200 590 Average 0.29 0.15 7.59
Standard Deviation 29000 27261 24198 339 - Standard Deviation 0.27 0.05 0.20
Average - 0.5 x Std Dev 40787 5319 11183 1030 - Average + 0.5×Std Dev 0.42 0.18 7.69
90th Percentile 73114 44915 42094 1392 590 90th Percentile 0.51 0.20 7.70
10th Percentile 31522 2381 1508 1008 590 10th Percentile 0.09 0.11 7.48
Number of Tests 3 4 24 2 1 Number of Tests 3 3 3

Chemical Aggressivity
Chemical tests were conducted on soil, rock and groundwater samples to determine the degree of
contamination in the ground and groundwater. Procedures prescribed in BS 1377 Part 3 (AMD 9028) were
followed in performing these tests on all collected samples.
As perceived from the results, the chloride content ranges between 0.004% and 0.57% while the sulphate
content ranges between 0.11% and 0.21% for the groundwater samples.
The percentage of chlorides and sulphates of the tested sea water samples summarised in the table below.
Table 14-18: Summary Table for Percentage of Chemical Aggressivity in Sea Water

Water Sample Chloride (%) Sulphate (%) pH

The chemical tests comprised the measurement of the Chloride, Sulphate and pH values on samples
Minimum 2.19 0.28 8.22
extracted from boreholes across the site summarised in the table below.
Maximum 2.45 0.29 8.26
Table 14-16: Summary Table for Chemical Aggressivity in Soil and Rock Samples Average 2.32 0.29 8.24
Standard Deviation 0.18 0.01 0.03
Soil Sample Chloride (%) Sulphate (%) pH Average + 0.5×Std Dev 2.41 0.29 8.25
Minimum 0.01 0.02 8.30 90th Percentile 2.42 0.29 8.26
Maximum 0.18 0.12 9.80 10th Percentile 2.22 0.28 8.22
Average 0.03 0.04 8.97 Number of Tests 2 2 2
Standard Deviation 0.04 0.03 0.51
Average + 0.5×Std Dev 0.05 0.05 9.22 As perceived from the results, the chloride content ranges between 2.19% and 2.45% while the sulphate
90th Percentile 0.03 0.06 9.70 content ranges between 0.28% and 0.29% for the groundwater samples.
10th Percentile 0.01 0.02 8.42
Number of Tests 15 15 15 California Bearing Ratio Tests (CBR)

Ten CBR tests were performed along the road alignment on soil samples. Results are summarized in the
As perceived from the results, the chloride content ranges between 0.01% and 0.18% and the sulphate following table.
content ranges between 0.02% and 0.12%, for soil and rock samples. Table 14-19: Summary Table for California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

In addition, the percentage of chlorides and sulphates of the tested groundwater samples across the site CBR
TP NO
summarised in the table below. Depth (m) 10 Blows 25 Blows 56 Blows
TP 01 2.8 26 74 104
TP02 1.45 22 72 103
TP03 1.45 48 101 226
TP04 0.975 23 84 167
TP05 2.4 23 49 102
TP06 0.35 28 74 99
TP07 1.4 23 64 104
TP08 2.5 24 87 169
TP09 2.05 49 99 210
TP10 0.6 46 117 166

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 140 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS Bearing Capacity Calculation for Shallow Foundation on Soil

The Geotechnical design is developed in compliance with the below listed standards, design manuals and Bearing capacity failures are rarely observed in foundation design. This is mainly due to the following
international references in practice. main factors:

Country codes:  settlement mainly governs the foundation design, the limitation of the settlement to limit
tolerable limits and/or allowable angular distortions in the superstructure;
 Qatar Construction Specifications 2014.  the Factor of Safety of 3 that is relatively high and thus allowing for sufficient margin of safety;
Foundation Design:  the minimum footing sizes also enhance the stability of the foundation
 U.S. Corps of Engineers – Foundation Design The ultimate bearing capacity of the foundation soils under the structure’s shallow foundations can be
estimated using Meyerhof (1963) equation:
 Braja M. Das, Principles of Foundation Engineering
Soil classification: qult= c Nc sc dc ic + γ D Nq sq dq iq + 0.5 γ B Nɣ sɣ dɣ iɣ

 AASHTO Soil Classification System The allowable bearing capacity =

𝑞𝑢𝑙𝑡
with (FS = 3.0)
𝐹𝑆
 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
 Relevant European Standards Where,
Other acknowledged references:
 C is undrained shear strength
 EPRI Manual on estimating soil properties (Kulhawy and Mayne, 1990),  B is the width of foundation
 Ground Engineer's reference book (Bell, 1987),  D is embedment depth
 Burt Look (2007), Hand book of Geotechnical Investigation and Design Tables  γ is the Effective unit weight (submerged unit wt. if below water table) of soil
 Nc, Nq, Nɣ are the Bearing Capacity factors
BASIS FOR THE DESIGN  dc, dq, dɣ are the Depth factors
This section presents the design basis for the foundations of various proposed structures, site class,  ic, iq, iɣ are the Load Inclination factors.
Pavement Design, subsurface concrete and evaluation of liquefaction potential of top soil layers. The first term accounts for the cohesive shear friction of the soil located below the footing.

Design Basis for Foundations
The selection of foundation type will be based on the soil/rock conditions encountered on Site and
magnitude of structural stresses applied to the ground. Shallow foundations are expected for the proposed
utility buildings. The following sections presents the design basis for shallow foundations.
Shallow Foundation
Shallow Foundations shall satisfy the following criteria:
The second term accounts for the soil located above the bottom of the footing. The term Ɣ x D represents
a surcharge pressure that helps to increase the bearing capacity of the footing.
The third term accounts for the frictional shear strength of the soil located below the footing.
Bearing Capacity Calculation for Shallow Foundation on Rock:
The ultimate Bearing capacity for shallow foundations resting on rock can be estimated using Buisman-
Terzaghi method.

Stability Considerations: A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be considered to safeguard against the The ultimate bearing capacity for the general shear mode of failure can be estimated from the traditional
occurrence of a bearing capacity failure of the foundation soil under the imposed loads. Buisman-Terzaghi (Terzaghi 1943). This is equation is valid for long continuous foundations with length
to width ratios in excess of ten. The equation for calculating ultimate bearing capacity is as follows:
Serviceability Considerations: The settlement induced by the structural service loads should not impair the
functionality of the structure. The total and differential settlements of shallow foundations shall be q ult = cNc + 0.5γBNγ + γDNq
controlled within permissible limits. Using the calculated allowable bearing pressure value, the total Where,
settlement (short term + long term) for isolated/strip footing and raft foundation shall be within 25mm &
50mm respectively.  qult is the ultimate bearing capacity
 γ is the effective unit weight (submerged unit wt. if below water table) of the rock mass
Foundation depth: The foundation shall be embedded not less than 1.0m under the ground surface.
 C is undrained shear strength
 B is the width of foundation

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 141 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

 D is embedment depth
 c is the cohesion intercepts for the rock mass
 φ is the Angle of internal friction for the rock mass

N∅, Nq, Nc, Nγ are bearing capacity factors calculated as follows:

∅
N∅ = tan2 (45 + 2)
𝑁𝑞 = 𝑁∅ 2
Nc = 2N∅1/2 (N∅ + 1)
Nγ = N∅1/2 (N∅ 2 − 1)

The correction factors applied for Nc and Nγ are listed as follows:

𝑞𝑢𝑙𝑡
The allowable bearing capacity = 𝐹𝑆 with (FS = 3.0)

Table 14-20: Correction Factors (after Sowers 1979)

Foundation Shape Nc Correction NΥ Correction

Circular 1.20 0.70

Square 1.25 0.85
Figure 14.29: Variation of Strain Influence factor with depth
Rectangular
L/B = 2 1.12 0.90 2. Detailed Settlement Analysis of Structural foundations involving adjacent
L/B = 5 1.05 0.95 footings
L/B = 10 1.00 1.00 The detailed settlement analysis for the planned structures is conducted using an analytical software based
on one-dimensional settlement analysis, which allows the determination of the settlement induced by
Settlement Calculation of Shallow Foundations complex load geometries, and within multi-layered founding soils. The resulting settlement is computed
and presented in a 3D graphic presentation.
1. Evaluation of Immediate settlement for isolated foundations (Schmertmann)
Theoretical computation of settlement
The adopted foundation system shall satisfy the tolerable settlements which is determined based on the
influence factor method Schmertmann and Hartmann (1978), as follows: Settlement mainly depends on the effective stress, i.e. the total stress due to gravity and external loads,
minus the pore water pressure. The vertical effective stress, σ′, at any point is simply:
Se= C1C2C3 qnet ∑ {(Iz / Es). Δz}
σ ′ =σ – u,
Where,
Where σ is the total vertical stress and u is the pore water pressure.
 C1 is the correction factor for the depth of foundation embedment = 1-0.5(q/qnet),
 C2 is the correction factor to account for creep in soil = 1+0.2 log (time in year /0.1), The initial stress is first computed by considering gravity loading. Total stress is as such evaluated at any
 C3 is the shape factor = 1.03-0.03(L/B) point by summing the weights of the above material layers. The weight of any given layer is the unit
weight, γ, times the layer thickness. Accordingly, the initial total stress at any point is presented as follows:
 Q is the stress = γ D
 Es is the modulus of elasticity σi = ΣγH
 Iz is the strain influence factor
The strain influence factor Iz is determined based on the below sketch. The external loads, such as structural loads or embankment/fill weights, induce a change in the total initial
stresses within the founding soils, the magnitude of which is a function of the geometry and magnitude of
Determining Iz: these external loads. The stress change is calculated using the Boussinesq Method.

The Boussinesq method uses the theory of elasticity to calculate the vertical stress under a point load Q in
a homogeneous, semi-infinite half space:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 142 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

𝑖 = 𝑖+1 + ε𝑖 h𝑖

The figure below presents the summation of the computed settlement within each layer:
Where σL is the induced loading stress at any point of the founding soil.

The vertical stresses at any depth (z), induced by a uniform load over a rectangular, square or polygonal
area (rather than a point load), are generated by the software by integrating the original Boussinesq
equation over the load area.
The strain for each element presented in the form of a string can then be easily calculated from the 1D
modulus ES (or constrained modulus) and the effective stress. The relationship between the 1D modulus
ES and 3D Young’s modulus E, is:
Where ν is the Poisson’s Ratio.
The vertical strain in each sub-layer is calculated by:
The following two design considerations were also adopted in the detailed settlement analysis of this
project:
 The software allows specifying at any point a minimum amount of induced loading stress that
is required to induce settlement. This minimum loading stress is defined as a fraction of the in-
situ effective stress. If the loading stress at depth drops below the specified fraction of the in-
situ effective stress, then no settlement will be considered below this point. This threshold value
is defined as the ratio of loading stress/in-situ stress, and is considered in our analysis as 0.2.
As such when the additional load increment (as induced by the structural loads) at a certain
depth is lower than 20% of the initial overburden pressure at this depth, no settlement is
considered below this point.
 An unload/reload modulus is also considered in the detailed settlement analysis. When
unloading occurs (such as that induced by the structural excavation) then the unload/reload
modulus (Esur) is used in place of Es in the above equation. If the soil is then reloaded, Esur
continues to be used until the soil sub-layer reaches its previous stress state, starting from which
Es is again used in the above equation to compute strain as shown. In this analysis the
unload/reload modulus Esur is considered as 3 x Es.

Where,

 Δσ is the change in vertical total stress.

 Es is Young’s modulus of the soil.
Initial settlement is then calculated from the strain values. For each string, the bottom point is assumed to
be fixed, and the vertical displacement  of the second point from the bottom is then:

 = εh

Where h is the original thickness of the bottom sub-layer. The settlement of the ith point is then the
settlement of the point below (i+1) plus the settlement in sub-layer i:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 143 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Design Output

The software allows deducing the predicted settlement at each node of the founding soil and its relevant Table 14-21: Typical Ratios for Self-Weight Creep Settlements (Goodger and Leach, 1990)
total loads. Accordingly the modulus of subgrade reaction is computed at the foundation’s bottom level as
the ratio of the total structural loads over the predicted settlements. Compaction Material Self-Weight Settlement

The modulus of subgrade reaction is as such computed within each area of the designed foundations. Well graded sand and gravel 0.5% H

Since the predicted settlement within the central parts of the foundations is higher than that along its Shale, chalk and rock fills 0.5% H
periphery, softer k values will be obtained within the center of the foundations and higher k values will be
obtained along the foundation’s periphery. Accordingly variable k values will be obtained under each Well compacted
Clay 0.5% H
foundation. These will be presented in form of contour lines with values expressed in kN/m3.
Mixed refuse 30% H
Iterative process of the Detailed Settlement Analysis
Well Controlled Domestic refuse 10% H
In order to evaluate the foundation behavior under the anticipated structural loads, an iterative process is placed in layers
carried out by the structural and geotechnical engineers. The detailed settlement analysis is conducted in
Medium Compacted Rockfill 1.0% H
4 steps:
Lightly Compacted Clay and Chalk 1.5% H
Step 1, the Structural Engineer conducts a finite element computer analysis of the foundation using
the Geotechnical Engineer's best estimate of the modulus of subgrade reaction "K". In the first Clay placed in deep layers 1.0-2.0 % H
analysis a uniform value of "K" is used over the entire foundation footprint.
Compacted by scrapers Opencast Backfill 0.6-0.8% H
Step 2, using the structural load distributions from Step 1, the Geotechnical Engineer calculates the
soil settlement at each node of the foundations. A new modulus of subgrade reaction is computed at Nominally Compacted Opencast Backfill 1.2% H
each node.
Uncompacted Sand 3.5% H
Step 3, using the geotechnical modulus of subgrade reaction computed for each node in Step 2, the
Structural Engineer conducts a new analysis and a new pressure distribution is obtained. Clay fill (Pumped) 12% H

Step 4, the Geotechnical Engineer computes new settlements at each node using the pressure Poorly Compacted Chalk 1.0%
distributions from Step 3, and the "K" values are refined accordingly.

Creep Settlement of the Reclaimed Fill

Self-weight/creep settlement is expected to occur in all types of fills and will take place over a period of
10 years as generally cited in the literature.
Usually the self-weight settlement is estimated to be 0.5% to 1% of the fill thickness.
Consequently, the total settlement estimated for all structures resting of fill will be checked by considering
an additional settlement equal to 0.5% of the fill height.
Seismic Site Class
According to QCS 2014, the seismic design for all building structure shall be based upon local seismic
accelerations recommended as per ASCE 7-10, IBC 2012 or BS EN 1998-1:2004. Local seismic spectral
accelerations based upon uniform hazard response spectra for 475 year as shown below.
Soil profile type and amplification factors may be adopted for the design as measured from the tests carried
out on site as well as the results of the drilled boreholes in accordance with the classification set in the IBC
and based on the average of the top 30 meters below the ground level.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 144 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

This will be applied to the design of foundations and stability of embankments under extreme load cases. The design ground water table is assumed at the surface. Magnification factor is taken as 1.3, for the Site
Class C, as per table 11.8-1 given in ASCE/SEI 7-10.
Liquefaction

Qatar is located on the tectonically stable Arabian Platform. Literature review indicates that the seismic
activity within the area is minimal and earthquake risk is little. The World Health Organization (WHO
2010), published a map that suggests that seismic hazard in Qatar is very low over most of the country
area, increasing to low and moderate in the northern third of the peninsula (see Figure 14.30).
Liquefaction Assessment
The Factor of Safety against liquefaction (FS) is calculated using the Cyclic Resistance Ratio (CRR) and
the Cyclic Stress Ratio (CSR) as shown below. A Magnitude Scaling Factor (MSF) is incorporated in the
equation to allow for the application of the procedure for earthquakes with magnitudes different than 7.5.
Also an overburden correction factor K is introduced to account for soil layers subjected to large
overburden pressures.

CRR 7.5
FS = ( ) × MSF × K σ
CSR
Where,

 CRR7.5 is Cyclic Resistance Ratio for moment magnitude of earthquake (Mw) = 7.5
earthquakes;
 CSR is Cyclic Stress Ratio;
 MSF is Magnitude Scaling Factor;
 K is Correction Factor for soil layers subjected to large static normal stresses.
Cyclic Stress Ratio (CSR)

The Cyclic Stress Ratio (CSR) is calculated from Seed and Idriss (1971) equation as shown below:
𝜏𝑎𝑣 𝑎𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝜎𝑣𝑜
𝐶𝑆𝑅 = ( ′ ) = 0.65 × ( ) × ( ′ ) × 𝑟𝑑
𝜎 𝑣𝑜 𝑔 𝜎 𝑣𝑜
Figure 14.30: Seismic Hazard Distribution Map of Qatar (WHO 2010)
Where,
This is further strengthened by the fact that the absence of prominent faults in Qatar peninsula provides
additional evidence to the low level of seismic risk in this country. As per the QCS Specification 2014,  amax is the Peak Horizontal Acceleration at the ground surface generated by the earthquake;
the local seismic spectral acceleration (PGA) based upon uniform hazard response spectra PGA in the  g is the acceleration due to gravity;
Qatar ranges between 0.045 g for a return period of 475 years to 0.1 g for a return period of 2475 years.
 σvo is the total vertical overburden stresses;
The evaluation of liquefaction potential is carried out by using LiquefyPro software. Simplified method  σ'vo is the effective vertical overburden stresses;
originally developed by Seed and Idriss (1971) is used for calculation of factor of safety. Generally, the  rd is the stress reduction coefficient.
adopted method depends on the evaluation of: In order to estimate the average values of the stress reduction coefficient, rd, the following equation
developed by NCEER, 1997 is used for ease of computation:
 The earthquake induced Cyclic Shear Stress Ratio (CSR);
 The liquefaction resistance of the soil, cyclic resistance ratio (CRR), rd = 1.0-0.00765.z for z ≤ 9.15m
 Factor of safety against liquefaction (CRR/CSR). Liquefaction evaluation is based on soil
characterization such as, in-situ Standard Penetration Tests (SPT), soil bulk density, rd = 1.174-0.0267.z for 9.15 m ≤ z ≤ 23m
Magnitude, fines content and Peak ground acceleration. rd = 0.0744-0.008.z for 23 m < z ≤ 30m
The soil liquefaction analysis is based on the findings of the boreholes that were received to date. A
comprehensive study was conducted to assess liquefaction potential for local seismic spectral acceleration rd = 0.5 for z > 30m
(PGA) 0.045 g for a return period of 475 years (similar to the return period used in the analysis of the
buildings in this project). A Richter magnitude of 6 is considered based on relationship between
acceleration and Equivalent modified Mercalli intensity. The average fine content is considered as 15%.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 145 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Cyclic Resistance Ratio (CRR)  CE is the correction factor for hammer energy ratio (ER);
 CN is the overburden correction factor.
𝐶𝑅𝑅7.5 is the Cyclic Resistance Ratio for moment magnitude of earthquake Mw = 7.5 earthquakes. Blake
(1997) method is used to determine the CRR7.5 as per the following equation: The Figure 14.31 presents the above listed correction factors of the field SPT N-value.

The overburden correction factor (CN) can be estimated using Liao and Whitman (1986) equation:
a + c. x + e. x 2 + g. x 3
CRR 7.5 =
1 + b. x + d. x 2 + f. x 3 + h. x 4 𝑃𝑎
𝐶𝑁 = (𝜎′ ) 0.5 ≤ 1.7
𝑣0
Where,
Where,
 x = (N1)60,f
 a = 0.048  Pa is Atmospheric pressure = 100 (kPa);
 b = -0.1248  σ'vo is Effective overburden stress (kPa).
 c = -0.004721
 d = 0.009578
 e = 0.0006136
 f = -0.0003285
 g = -1.673*10-5
 h = 3.714*10-6
I.M. Idriss and R.B.Seed developed an equation for the correction of (N1)60 to an equivalent clean-sand
value (N1)60,f. The equation is as follows:

(𝑁1 )60,𝑓 = 𝛼 + 𝛽 × (𝑁1 )60

Where,

 (N1)60 is the corrected Standard Penetration Resistance;

 α, β are the coefficients that are functions of fines content, used to correct (N1)60 to (N1)60,f.
With,

α = 0 and β = 1 for FC ≤ 5%
2 )]
α = 𝑒 [1.76−(190⁄𝐹𝐶 for 5% < FC < 35%

β = [0.99 + (𝐹𝐶 1.5 ⁄1000)]

α = 5 and β = 1.2 for FC ≥ 35%

The measured SPT value in the field (N) is corrected not only for overburden stress, but also for rod length,
samplers, borehole diameter, and hammer energy ratio:
Figure 14.31: Correction Factors of the Field SPT N-Value
𝑁1(60) = 𝑁. 𝐶𝑁 . 𝐶𝑅 . 𝐶𝑆 . 𝐶𝐵 . 𝐶𝐸
Magnitude Scaling Factor (MSF)
Where,
The magnitude scaling factor is given by the following equation:
 N is the measured Standard Penetration Resistance;
 CR is the correction factor for rod length; 10(2.24)
𝑀𝑆𝐹 = (2.56)
 CS is the correction factor for samplers with or without liners; 𝑀
 CB is the correction factor for borehole diameter (65mm ≤ B ≤ 115mm);

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 146 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Where, Subsurface Concrete

 M is Earthquake Magnitude which is taken to be 6.0 for the area of study The results of the chemical tests on soils and groundwater samples will be considered to determine the
Overburden Correction Factor 𝐊𝛔 severity of exposure and measures to be adopted in order to protect the concrete and reinforcement from
chemical aggressiveness in the ground and groundwater.
The correlation between the overburden correction factor ( Kσ) and effective confining pressure is shown
in Figure 14.32. The exposure will be classified in accordance with Part 5 Section 6 of QCS 2014, BS 8500-1 standard and
the “Concrete Society Guide to the Design of Concrete Structures in the Arabian Peninsula”.

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR UTILITY BUILDINGS

The subsurface investigation performed within and around the footprint area of the Utility Buildings is the
basis for determining the soil stratigraphy. Figure 14.33 below present a generalized schematic view of the
founding soil layers for utility buildings.

Figure 14.32: Kσ Versus Effective Confining Pressure

In the chart, the effective confining pressure 𝝈′ 𝒎 can be calculated using:

𝜎 ′ 𝑚 = 0.65 𝜎 ′ 0

Where:

 𝜎 ′ 0 is Effective Overburden Pressure (tsf)

Liquefaction analysis was carried out on the basis of received borehole information till date. The
comprehensive study was conducted to assess liquefaction potential for an earthquake magnitude of 6.0
while a Peak Ground Acceleration PGA of 0.045g with an amplification factor of 1.3. The results of the
study as reflected in the computed factor of safety against liquefaction for the actual subsurface conditions
are presented in Appendix B.

The computed factor of safety within the studied boreholes showed a factor of safety more than 1.0 at
various depths.

Pavement Design

The pavement design will be carried out for the various road categories to cater for the anticipated traffic
loading while accounting for existing subgrade soil properties. The design will be prepared according to
international and local design standards, including the empirical design procedures stipulated in the
AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures, as well as the mechanistic approach based on the
multi-layered elastic theory, incorporating internationally recognized failure criteria. Relevant local Figure 14.33: Generalized Soil Profile for Utility Buildings
standards, such as the Qatar Highway Design Manual 2015 (QHDM-2015) and IAN 101, will also be
Generalized Soil Parameters
considered in the Design process.
The analysis of the in-situ and laboratory test results presented in section 9.8 of this report allowed
determining the design parameters of the encountered founding soil layers at the exact location of Utility
buildings. A summary of these parameters is provided in the below table. For the soil, the selection of
design parameters is based on characteristic value of SPT (N) corresponding to average-0.5*standard

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 147 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

deviation (EN 1997-1 & Schneider, 1999). The following generalized design parameters were used for structural pressures are in the range of 2.8 t/m2 to 6.0 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
most of the buildings. preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.

Table 14-22: Summary of the Geotechnical Design Parameters for the Founding Soil layers CCTV Building

Unit Characteristic Density (kN/m3) ɸ’ (°) Elastic Modulus E The topography of terrain of CCTV building is around +2.88 m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level
SPT (N) (MPa) is +2.97m QNHD.
U5 16 18 28 15 The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole EBH-03 and BH-06. Based on the
U1 7 18 28 8 available information about the stratigraphy from EBH-03 and the preliminary building elevation and
functional requirement, Strip foundation system is proposed for the CCTV building. The ground water
level encountered in the borehole at depth of 3.35 below existing ground level. The preliminary design
Rock Parameters groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The applied structural pressures are in the range of 7.0
t/m2 to 8.4 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the
Four rock formations (U2a, U2b, U3 and U4) were identified within the site. The in-situ and laboratory anticipated settlements.
test results are interpreted to derive the design parameters of these rock layers, such as Rock Modulus (E)
and the characteristic strength parameters (UCS, C and ɸ). The selected design parameters for U2a and Underground Irrigation Tank
U2b rock formations are summarized in the below table.
The topography of terrain is ranging from +2.6m to +2.85 m QNHD. The soil lithology is considered based
Table 14-23: Selected Design Parameters for the Identified Layers on the findings of borehole BH-30 and BH-35 which are near the location of underground irrigation tank.
The ground water level encountered in the borehole at depth of 3.3m below existing ground level. The
Unit U2a U2b preliminary design groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -2.0m
UCS 2 6 QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is -0.1m QNHD.
ɸ’ (°) 23 30
C (kPa) 45 150 Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-30and BH-35 and the preliminary
Em (MPa) 125 250 building elevation and functional requirement, shallow foundation (Raft) is proposed for underground
irrigation tank. The applied structural pressures are in the range of 5.6 t/m2 to 10 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows
As can be noted the upper simsima rock layer U2a presents lower strength and deformation parameters the recommended preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
with respect to the lower simsima limestone formation U2b.Thus this formation will be considered as
completely weathered rock in this analysis. Vacuum Solid Waste Station

The design parameters shown in the tables 14-22 and 14-23 are preliminary and will be further updated
once the complete set of test results are received.
Utility Buildings
The different types of utility buildings are Vacuum solid waste station, CCTV Building, Heat and
Exchange building, 3 Substations, Underground irrigation tank, 4 Pump Stations, Facility Building and
Fire fighter tank Building.
Substation A
The topography of terrain within the stretch of substation A is around +2.7m to +2.8 m QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-43 which is at the location of
substation A. The ground water level encountered in the borehole at depth of 2.8m below natural ground
level. The preliminary design groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at
-3.75m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is +1.6m QNHD.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-43 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, Raft foundation system is proposed for the substation A. The applied
The location of vacuum solid waste station is in the new reclaimed fill and the approximate fill height is
around 5m based on sea bed level and proposed finished level. The sea bed level is around -1.06 m QNHD.
The bottom of foundation level is +2.57m QNHD and it is resting on new reclaimed fill.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole MBH-05 which is near the location of
vacuum solid waste station. Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from MBH-05 and
the preliminary building elevation and functional requirement, shallow foundation system is proposed.
The applied structural pressures are in the range of 6.8 t/m2 to 8.8 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the
recommended preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Fire Fighter Tank Building
The topography of terrain is around +3.07m QNHD. The soil lithology is considered based on the findings
of borehole BH-38 which is near the location of Fire fighter tank building. The ground water is encountered
in the borehole at depth of 2.9m below existing ground level. The preliminary design groundwater table is
considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -4.0m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is -
0.6m QNHD.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-38 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, shallow foundation (Raft) is proposed. The applied structural

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 148 of 257

Gewan Island
pressures are in the range of 6.0 t/m2 to 11 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended preliminary
modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Hex Building
The topography of terrain is around +2.6m to +2.84 m QNHD. The soil lithology is considered based on
the findings of borehole BH-30 and BH-28. The groundwater is encountered in the borehole at depth of
2.75m below existing ground level. The preliminary design groundwater table is considered at +2.55m
QNHD. The bed rock level is at -2.06m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is -4.225m QNHD and
it is resting on rock.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-30and BH-28 and the preliminary
building elevation and functional requirement, shallow foundation (Raft) is proposed. The applied
structural pressures are in the range of 7.5 t/m2 to 20 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Substation B
The topography of terrain within the stretch of substation B is around +2.88 m QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-39 which is at the location of
substation A. The ground water is encountered in the borehole at depth of 3.1m below existing ground
level. The preliminary design groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at
-2.07m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is +2.45m QNHD.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-39 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, Strip foundation is proposed for the substation B. The applied
structural pressures are in the range of 3.6 t/m2 to 6.0 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Facility Building
The topography of terrain within the stretch of Facility building is around +2.88 m QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-39 which is near the location of
Facility Building. The ground water is encountered in the borehole at depth of 3.1m below existing ground
level. The preliminary design groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at
-2.07m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level is +2.95m QNHD.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-39 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, Strip foundation is proposed for the Facility Building. The applied
structural pressures are in the range of 3.2 t/m2 to 5.6 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Substation C
The topography of terrain within the stretch of substation C is varying from +2.8m QNHD to +2.88 m
QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-06. The preliminary design
groundwater table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -1.72m QNHD. The bottom
of foundation level is +2.445m QNHD.
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0
PK2 – Infrastructure Works
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-06 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, Strip foundation system is proposed for the substation C. The applied
structural pressures are in the range of 2.5 t/m2 to 5.3 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Pump Station 1
The location of Pump Station 1 is in the new reclaimed fill and the approximate fill height is around 7m
based on sea bed level and proposed finished level. The sea bed level at Pump Station 1 is varying from -
6.37 to -6.59 m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -9.59 to -13.12m QNHD .The bottom of foundation level
is +0.92 and -0.59m QNHD and foundation is expected on reclaimed fill.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole MBH-36 and MBH-38. Based on the
available information about the stratigraphy from MBH-36 and MBH-38 and the preliminary building
elevation and functional requirement, Raft foundation system is proposed for the Pump Station 1. The
applied structural pressures are in the range of 5.6 t/m2 to 10.0 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Pump Station 2
The location of Pump Station 2 is in the new reclaimed fill and the approximate fill height is around 4.95m
based on sea bed level and proposed finished level. The sea bed level at Pump Station 2 is around -4.45 m
QNHD. The bed rock level is at -5.9m QNHD .The bottom of foundation level is +0.5 and -0.59m QNHD
and foundation is expected in reclaimed fill.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole MBH-01. Based on the available
information about the stratigraphy from MBH-01 and the preliminary building elevation and functional
requirement, Raft foundation system is proposed for the Pump Station 2. The applied structural pressures
are in the range of 5.6 t/m2 to 9.2 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended preliminary modulus of
subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Pump Station 3
The topography of terrain within the stretch of Pump Station 3 is around +2.97m to +3.07 m QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-41 and BH-44. The ground water is
encountered in the borehole at a depth of 3.1 m below ground level. The preliminary design groundwater
table is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -1.68m to -2.38 m QNHD. The bottom of
foundation level is 0.68m and -1.6m QNHD.
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-41 and BH-44 and the preliminary
building elevation and functional requirement, Raft foundation system is proposed for the Pump Station
3. The applied structural pressures are in the range of 4.0 t/m2 to 10.0 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the
recommended preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements.
Pump Station 4
The topography of terrain within the stretch of Pump Station 4 is around +3.07 m QNHD.
The soil lithology is considered based on the findings of borehole BH-38. The ground water is encountered
in the borehole at a depth of 2.9 m below existing ground level. The preliminary design groundwater table
Page 149 of 257
Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

is considered at +2.55m QNHD. The bed rock level is at -3.53m QNHD. The bottom of foundation level  The depth of the probes into limestone bedrock shall be at least as stated above if no cavity is
is +0.6m and -1.6m QNHD. encountered, and shall be extended into limestone by 5m below the last cavity encountered
(unless otherwise directed by the engineer).
Based on the available information about the stratigraphy from BH-38 and the preliminary building  Secondary probe drilling shall be performed whenever probe drilling records reveals the
elevation and functional requirement, Raft foundation system is proposed for the Pump Station 4. The existence of a cavity and/or whenever the volume of injected grout exceeds 2.5 times the
applied structural pressures are in the range of 3.0 t/m2 to 10.0 t/m2. Table 14-24 shows the recommended theoretical volume of the drilled hole. The aim of these secondary probes is to determine the
preliminary modulus of subgrade reaction and the anticipated settlements. extent of a detected cavity and allow its treatment.
 Four secondary probes shall be performed around each primary probe in which cavity has been
Following table lists the applied range of structural pressure, predicted settlement and subgrade modulus identified. Secondary probes shall be located at a mid-span between the concerned primary
for the shallow foundations. probe and the four surrounding primary probes.
The other utility buildings are coming mostly in the soil and the average applied pressures is less
Table 14-24: Structure Wise Subgrade Modulus for Shallow Foundation than=in the range of 50 to 100 75 kPa. One probe is proposed under each column location to detect the
Structure Structural Foundation Level Recommended Predicted presence of any cavities.Hence, probing and grouting is not considered. Four secondary probes shall be
Pressure Subgrade range of performed around each primary probe in which cavity has been identified.
Modulus, k Settlement
(t/m2) m, QNHD t/m3 mm Excavation and Temporary Shoring
Substation A 2.8-6.0 +1.6 330 10-15
CCTV Building 7.0-8.4 +2.97 300 12-27 Open excavation can be done with a side slope of 1.5H: 1V for the utility buildings to reach the targeted
Underground Irrigation Tank 5.6-10.0 -0.1 290 20-25 foundation levels. Wherever open excavation is not feasible, temporary shoring shall be considered.
Vacuum Solid Waste Station 6.8-8.8 +2.57 200 25-30 Temporary shoring system is required particularly for the support of the excavation of HEX building.
Fire fighter tank building 6.0-11.0 -0.6 320 15-25
Hex Building 7.5-20.0 -4.05 700 7-12 Preliminary shoring design is performed for the excavation of HEX building and the details were shown
Substation B 3.6-3.0 +2.45 350 6-12 in the drawing.600 mm diameter secant pile wall is advised on a preliminary design to retain the soil and
Facility Building 3.2-5.6 +2.95 250 9-17 groundwater.
Substation C 2.5-5.3 +2.445 240 8-18
Pump Station 1 5.6-10.0 +0.92 and -0.59 160 55-58 A water tight temporary shoring system shall be designed, provided, installed, operated, maintained and
Pump Station 2 5.6-9.2 +0.5 and -0.59 160 37-43 dismantled (upon completion of works) by the Contractor. The Engineer will ensure the review of the
Pump Station 3 4.0-10.0 +0.68 and -1.29 300 10-26 Contractor’s relevant design notes, method statement, and Quality Control system.
Pump Station 4 3.0-10.0 +0.60 and -1.6 350 7-17
The temporary shoring (secant pile wall) will be analyzed using Wallap software or equivalent.
The above recommendations for the shallow foundation system are preliminary and will be updated
considering the complete set of subsurface investigation results, final structural loads and foundations The following items will be assessed before the construction of the temporary support:
levels.
 The potential for piping below the shoring wall or within the excavation slope
Also, the settlement analysis was performed for the seismic case considering the short term parameters  The effect of differential water elevations behind and in front of the shoring wall on wall and
and we note that static (dead + live) loading case is governing the geotechnical aspects of foundation slope stability
design/anticipated settlements.  Due to the temporary nature of the structures and cut slopes in shoring design, long-term
The dynamic modulus values were considered as two times the static modulus for the granular materials degradation of material properties. Regarding soil properties, it is customary to ignore any
(Clause 11.5 Handbook of geotechnical investigation, Burt Look). cohesion present for permanent structure and slope design (i.e., fully drained conditions).
 If it is planned to conduct soil modification activities that could temporarily or permanently
Probing and Grouting for HEX Building disturb or otherwise loosen the soil in front of or behind the shoring (e.g., stone column
installation, excavation), the shoring shall be designed using the disturbed or loosened soil
In view of the cavity hazard associated with the simsima limestone formation and that is also confirmed
in one of the boreholes (bh-24), cavity detection by probing to be performed. The depth of the probe shall properties.
be 10 to 15 m into rock. The grid of the probes will be spaced to ensure that cavities are detected. If a
cavity is encountered during probe drilling, then it shall be filled with concrete or grout, as specified. Dewatering

The probe drilling criteria shall be as follows: The water table was encountered in all the received onshore boreholes at an elevation ranging from -0.7
to +0.8 m QNHD. When the excavation works on site are to reach elevations lower than the ground water
The spacing between primary probes should respect the following criteria- level, dewatering systems should be installed and it should be noted that in parts of the site it will be
Probes shall be performed at a spacing of 2.25m and to a depth of 15m below foundation level.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 150 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

necessary to pre-drill / excavate through the sand and gravel layers in order to be able to install the Table 14-25: Summary of SPT Values (within top 30m)
dewatering system to the required depth.
Strata Description Thickness (di) Average N value (Ni)
Selection of dewatering system and its design is based on the height of groundwater table above the base
Reclaimed fill/ Marine deposit 4m 23
of excavation and the permeability of the soil/rock layers within and surrounding the planned excavation
area. Caprock 1.5 m 51

In case of utility buildings, mainly dewatering is needed for HEXB building, Pump stations 3 and 4. For Weathered Simsima Limestone 6.5 m 64
HEXB building, the height of water table above foundation level is 4.1 m. Secant pile wall is proposed as Simsima Limestone 17.5 m 100
an excavation support and cut off for the dewatering. Deep wells shall be used for dewatering of HEXB
building along with secant pile wall. For the other two utility buildings, height of water table above
The average field standard penetration resistance for the top 30m is determined using the following
foundation level are 1.3, and 1.8 m respectively. For these two pump stations, dewatering can be done
equation:
with sump pits and trenches.

The dewatering should remain in operation until the weight of the structure is greater than the uplift
pressure exerted by the groundwater returning to its natural level.

Precautions should be taken during dewatering, such precautions should include, but not necessarily be
limited to controlling the rate at which the groundwater table is drawn and ensuring that fine particles are
not being drawn out of the soil. To ensure a dry, firm base to the excavations it is considered that the draw
down level should be maintained at not less than 0.5 meter below formation level. Care should be taken Where:
during dewatering to ensure that fines are not removed during pumping since this could result in
unpredictable settlements of the surrounding ground and associated structures if any.  di is the thickness of Layer i in m.
 Ni is the standard penetration resistance of soil layer.
Site Class
Substituting the values presented in the table 3.1 in Equation, the average field standard penetration
The project site seismic class is evaluated following the IBC 2012 and AASHTO LRFD specifications. resistance for the top 30m (N) was found to be equal to 61.
SPT results were used to determine the project’s site seismic class. The extensive available SPT results
As per the table 1613.5.2 of IBC 2012, the obtained characteristic N30 value corresponds to ‘very dense
that were performed throughout the four packages of the investigation program across the site.
sand and soft rock’, for which the project site Seismic Class will correspond to Class Sc.
As noted by the IBC code, the top 30m soil profile below the final grading level across the entire site shall
Site Class as per EN 1988-1, Table 3.1 is SE.
be considered.

Based on the analysis, it was observed that the top 30m of the site profile below final grading level Please refer to Structural design report for the importance type and importance coefficients. Return period
comprises around 5.5m of soil layer (relevant to reclaimed fill, marine deposit and caprock) overlying the of 475 years and peak ground acceleration of 0.045g is considered for the seismic design of buildings.
bedrock. Thus, 24.5m of rock formation are considered in the analysis. It is worth highlighting the below
considered assumptions in this analysis. Pavement Design

 N equal to 50 is considered for N values reported as “>50” in the borehole logs and N equal to
100 is considered for N values reported as “>100” in the borehole logs,
 Where SPT values are reported in the bore hole logs (except >50 and >100), the actual reported
values of SPT are considered in the analysis.
Table 14-25 presents the summary of SPT values within the top 30m of the site profile.
The pavement structures for the roads were designed for two traffic load categories (0.5M ESAL and 3.0M
ESAL).
Pavement Design with Asphalt Finishing
The pavement design sections with asphalt finishing have been developed based on the latest edition of
the AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures. The adequacy of the resulted pavement section
was also verified using the Everstress Software that is based on finite element techniques and processes
mechanistic analysis methods based on the multi-layered elastic theory approach and the internationally
recognized failure criteria established by the USACE, and are as follows:

For Main Road (3.0 Million ESAL):

 55mm Polymer Modified Bituminous (PMB) Colored Wearing Course

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 151 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

 Tack Coat The exposure is classified in accordance with Part 5 Section 6 of QCS 2014, BS 8500-1 standard and the
 100mm Bituminous Base Course Class A “Concrete Society Guide to the Design of Concrete Structures in the Arabian Peninsula”, as follows:
 Prime Coat  QCS 2014: X5/S2 Exposure
 150mm Aggregate Base Course, compacted to 100% M.D.D., CBR ≥ 80%  BS 8500-1: XS3/DC3 (DS-4/AC-4) Exposure
 150mm Aggregate Sub-base Course, compacted to 100% M.D.D., CBR ≥ 70%  Concrete Society Guide: “Extreme/S3” Exposure
 Subgrade Layer, laid and compacted as specified. The protection measures for substructure concrete elements (concrete elements within the tidal zone or
For Local Road (0.5 Million ESAL): less than 3 meters above ground level) to ensure durable and very dense concrete against potential chemical
and chloride attacks are as below:
 50mm Polymer Modified Bituminous (PMB) Coloured Wearing Course
 Tack Coat Reinforced Substructure Concrete
 70mm Bituminous Base Course Class B Following is the preliminary concrete recommendation for the sub-structures in direct contract with soil
 Prime Coat and groundwater.
 150mm Aggregate Base Course, compacted to 100% M.D.D., CBR ≥ 80%
 150mm Aggregate Sub-base Course, compacted to 100% M.D.D., CBR ≥ 70%  From durability perspective, the required minimum concrete compressive strength class shall
 Subgrade Layer, laid and compacted as specified. be C40/50 (40 MPa cylinder strength).
 Use of Triple Blend Cement: Moderately Sulphate Resisting Cement conforming to ASTM
C150 Type II or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I 42.5N, with C3A content ranging from 5% to 8%.
Pavement Design with Granite Setts Silica fume (5% to 10% of cementitious weight in combination with either Fly ash (25% to 35%
of cementitious weight) or GGBS (50% to 60% of cementitious weight) shall be added to the
The pavement structures with granite setts finishing have been developed based on the BS 7533 standard Concrete mix.
and for the main road as follows:
 Maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.35.
For Main Road (3.0 Million ESAL):  Minimum Cementitious Content of 380 kg/m3.
 The Concrete mix shall satisfy the permeability test requirements for high durable concrete
 180mm thick Natural Stone Granite Setts (maximum width of 150mm & maximum length of specified in QCS 2014 Section 5 – part 6 Clause 6.5.7 item 4, as follows:
300mm), conforming to BS EN 1342 with a minimum flexural strength of 12 MPa. Laid according o Water Penetration of 5 mm as per BS EN 12390-8;
to BS 7533 Part 4 and Part 7 standard requirements. The joint width shall be 10mm to 15mm, with o Resistance to Chloride ion Penetration (RCP) of 500 coulombs as per ASTM C 1202;
minimum compressive cylinder strength of 32 MPa; o Chloride Migration of 2.0 x 10-12 m2/s as per NT Build 492;
o Water Absorption of 2% as per BS 1881: Part 122.
 40mm thick Moist Bedding Mortar Laying Course (Type B), with minimum compressive cylinder
o The minimum Cover to Reinforcement of 75 mm for concrete in contact with blinding.
strength of 28 MPa and satisfying the requirements of Table 3 of BS 7533 Part 7 standard;  Full tanking/waterproofing membrane shall be applied to all structures in contact with
 200 mm thick Cement Bound Base Course laid and compacted in 2 equal lifts with minimum soil/water.
average 7-day compressive cylinder strength of 12 MPa (minimum individual 7-day compressive The above concrete is also suitable for Massive concrete. For massive concrete, the heat of hydration of
strength of 8.0 MPa); the cement shall not exceed 260kj/kg when tested in accordance with ASTM C186. The temperature
 150mm Aggregate Sub-base Course, compacted to 100% M.D.D, CBR ≥ 70%; variation differences within massive concrete shall be as specified in the structural report/specifications.
 Subgrade Layer, laid and compacted as specified
Blinding/Plain Concrete

For plain blinding concrete, the following protection measures are recommended for Exposure Class XAS
Subsurface Concrete
(according to BS 8500-1 standard and Concrete Society Guide):
The chemical test results of soil samples revealed negligible sulfates and chlorides. However, the test
results of the seawater samples revealed very high levels of chlorides in the tested samples and high  Minimum compressive strength Grade of C28/35 (28 MPa cylinder strength)
sulphate concentrations. The exposure and concrete protection measures, to be considered for the various  Sulphate resisting cement to ASTM C150 TYPE V or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I
concrete structures, are as below: 42.5N/SR3 (C3A content lower than 3%) shall be used.
 Minimum cementitious content of 300 kg/m3.
For the substructure concrete elements of the various buildings and villas within the scope of the project  Maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.55.
(shallow foundations and basement walls) the following shall be considered:

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 152 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Reuse of Excavated Material

Based on the available borehole logs and laboratory test results, the excavated material consists of
reclaimed fill/dredged fill, Marine deposits and rock formation. The assessment of these materials were
done for the suitability of filling works following the requirements given in the QCS Specification 2014.

From the available laboratory test results, it has been observed that both reclaimed fill and Marine deposits
are non-plastic, and locally with low plasticity.

Reclaimed Fill Materials:

The encountered fill materials on site were identified between approx. +3.0 and -1.0 QNHD. Based on the
available investigation results these fills are satisfying the gradational and Atterberg limits requirements
given in QCS Specification 2014 (Table 3.1) for fill materials under roadworks and general grading works.
Hence, the existing upper fill layer is suitable to be re-used for general filling/reclamation works. It is
worth noting that the materials of this upper layer are not constantly meeting the requirements for fill under
buildings/foundations.

Marine Deposits

As for the lower Marine deposits (encountered between approx. +0.5 and -2.0 QNHD), they show
relatively high fines content and which were randomly exceeding those allowable for filling works. Hence,
the utilization of marine deposits will require treatment (screening and/or mixing) so as to meet the QCS
requirements.

Rock Formation

The currently planned excavation works within the common basement area will also extend within the
rock formations. The calcarenite caprock of variable thickness (0.5m to 2m) is interlayered with sand and
silt; it can be used, subject to treatment (breaking, screening and mixing) to meet QCS requirements. The
top part of the Simsima limestone is highly weathered, and embodies clay material; it is not recommended
for use in fill material, as it would cause long term creep.

In any case, the re-use of excavated materials from site shall be done with strict field quality control
measures in line with the QCS specification requirements. If any large stones or boulders encountered in
the excavated material, the screening of large size particles shall be done according to QCS specification
2014 before reuse of the excavated material for the filling works.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 153 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

15 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FOR UTILITIES BUILDINGS

This section presents the design development stage of architectural design for the following utility
buildings.

- Electrical Substation-A
- Electrical Substation-B
- Electrical Substation-C
- Vacuum Solid Waste Station
- CCTV Building
- Landscape Maintenance Building
- Gas Plant
- Hex Building
- Irrigation Reservoir and Pumping Station
- Water Reservoir and Pumping Station
- Sewage Pumping Station (1)
- Sewage Pumping Station (2)
- Sewage Pumping Station (3)
- Sewage Pumping Station (4)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 154 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Gewan Master Plan – Utility

Buildings
Design Objective: KEY PLAN
The main design objective is to
present the design development
stage of architectural theme
proposed for aboveground
utilities buildings for client
approval in order to be
developed in next stage.

In addition, underground utility

buildings also being included for
client approval in order to be
developed in next stage.

Design Development Brief:

The size of each utility building is

in Design development stage
and further development will be
done in next stage according to
project development.

The architecture language and

image of utility buildings is
designed to match the
architecture image & characters
of Gewan Island project in
general, using simple modular
forms and finishing materials
matching the concept of other
buildings such as the Mixed Use
buildings, but in a simpler way.

To achieve such concept,

modularity in forms, finishing
material, and color theme are
used in architectural language as
shown for each building.

Finishing materials are Stone

cladding as majority and
aluminum cladding in small
areas of facades which may be
replaced with a less costly
material such as plaster & paint.
In addition Metal louvers and
Metal Doors are used where
applicable for each building.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 155 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

KEY PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 156 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Electrical Substation-A

Plot Area (sqm):

582.7

No. of Floors:

PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Total Built-up Area (sqm):

272

Building Height (m):

4.6

SIDE ELEVATION

MAIN ELEVATION GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 157 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Electrical Substation-B

Plot Area (sqm):

582.7

No. of Floors:

PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Total Built-up Area (sqm):

272

Building Height (m):

4.6

SIDE ELEVATION

MAIN ELEVATION GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 158 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Electrical Substation-C

Plot Area (sqm):

582.7

No. of Floors:

PERSPECTIVE
Total Built-up Area (sqm):

230

Building Height (m):

4.6

SIDE ELEVATION

MAIN ELEVATION GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 159 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Vacuum Station Building

Plot Area (sqm):

597

No. of Floors:

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

Ground Floor: 264

First Floor: 180

Building Height (m):

14
FIRST FLOOR PLAN

GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 160 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Vacuum Station Building

Plot Area (sqm):

597

No. of Floors:

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

Ground Floor: 264

First Floor: 180 PERSPECTIVE SIDE ELEVATION

Building Height (m):

14

MAIN ELEVATION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 161 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

CCTV Building

Plot Area (sqm):

532

No. of Floors:

Total Built-up Area (sqm): PERSPECTIVE SITE PLAN

110

Building Height (m):

3.75

MAIN ELEVATION

SIDE ELEVATION GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 162 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Landscape Maintenance
Building

Plot Area (sqm):

583

No. of Floors:

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

25

GROUND FLOOR PLAN SITE PLAN

Building Height (m):

3.25

MAIN ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 163 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Gas Plant

Plot Area (sqm):

190

No. of Floors:

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

88.33

GROUND FLOOR PLAN SITE PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 164 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Water Reservoir & Pumping

station

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

965

Roof Plan
Plan

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 165 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Irrigation Reservoir &

Pumping station

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

400

ROOF PLAN
PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 166 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Hex Building

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

390

PLAN ROOF PLAN

c

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 167 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Sewage Pumping Station-1

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

25

PLAN ROOF PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 168 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Sewage Pumping Station-2

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

25

PLAN
ROOF PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 169 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Sewage Pumping Station-3

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

25

ROOF PLAN

PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 170 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Sewage Pumping Station-4

Total Built-up Area (sqm):

35

PLAN
ROOF PLAN

SECTION

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 171 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Electrical Substation –C
16 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY FOR UTILITIES BUILDINGS
 “Electrical Substation -C” is a 5m high Utility building with a total habitable height of 3.95m, it
GENERAL consist of Ground Floor only.
 “Electrical Substation -C” is established as follow:
Goals and Objectives - Ground floor: 225m2; housing MEP services like MV Room,LV Room and Transformer
Room
The primary goals of the safety measures indicated hereinafter are life safety and property protection from
fire and similar emergencies. The goals are achieved by providing an environment for the occupants inside Landscape Maintenance Building
and near the project that is reasonably safe and by providing reasonable safety for fire fighters and
emergency responders during search and rescue operations.  “Landscape Maintenance building” is a 3.25m high Utility building with a total habitable height
of 3.0m, it consist of Ground Floor only.
DESIGN References
 “Landscape Maintenance building” is established as follow:
The project is designed according to QATAR Code and NFPA Codes mainly NFPA 101 and 5000 edition - Ground floor: 95m2; housing Storage, Pantry and Toilet.
2018. In addition to other NFPA codes and standards.
Gas Plant
Building Description
 “Gas Plant” has boundary wall with a height of 2.2m, it consist of Underground LPG tanks and
Vacuum Solid Waste Station two sheds over the ground.
 “Gas Plant” is established as follow:
 “Vacuum Solid Waste Station” is a 14m high Utility building with a total habitable height of 4.45m, - Ground floor: 190m2; housing MEP services like Underground LPG tanks, Air compressor
it consist of (2) floors i.e. Ground Floor and First floor. shed and Fire Hose shed.

 “Vacuum Solid Waste Station” is established as follow:
- 1st floor: 185m2; housing Exhauster Room and Processing Areas.
- Ground floor: 264m2; housing Processing Areas, Filter room, Control room & Toilet &
Shower facilities.
CCTV Building
 “CCTV building” is a 3.75m high Utility building with a total habitable height of 3.0m, it consist
of Ground Floor only.
 “CCTV building” is established as follow:
- Ground floor: 110m2; housing MEP services like CCTV Control Room,CCTV Equipment
Room and Orredco Room.
Electrical Substation –A
 “Electrical Substation -A” is a 5m high Utility building with a total habitable height of 3.95m, it
consist of Ground Floor only.
 “Electrical Substation -A” is established as follow:
- Ground floor: 265m2; housing MEP services like MV Room,LV Room and Transformer
Room
Electrical Substation –B
 “Electrical Substation -B” is a 5m high Utility building with a total habitable height of 3.95m, it
consist of Ground Floor only.
 “Electrical Substation -B” is established as follow:
- Ground floor: 265m2; housing MEP services like MV Room,LV Room and Transformer
Room
Underground Water & Fire Tank with Pumping Station
 “Underground Water & Fire Tank with pumping station” is a buried structure with a total depth of
5.3m with a total habitable height of 4.0m.
 “Underground Water & Fire Tank with Pumping station” is established as follow:
- Underground Water & Fire Reservoir: 850m2; housing Water & Fire Reservoir
- Underground Pumping station: 110m2; housing MEP services like Pump Room and
Electrical Room
Underground Irrigation Tank with Pumping Station
 “Underground Irrigation Tank with pumping station” is a buried structure with a total depth of
5.3m with a total habitable height of 3.25m.
 “Underground Irrigation Tank with pumping station” is established as follow:
- Underground Irrigation Reservoir: 265m2; housing Irrigation Reservoir
- Underground Pumping station: 135m2; housing MEP services like Pump Room and
Electrical Room
Underground HEX Building
 “Underground HEX building” is a buried structure with a total depth of 7.8m with a total habitable
height of 6.0m.
 “Underground HEX building” is established as follow:
- Underground Structure: 380m2; housing MEP services like MCC Room and ETS Room.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 172 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Underground Sewage Pumping Station -1 Fire Brigade Access

 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-1” is a buried structure with a total depth of 4.75m with a These buildings shall be accessible to fire brigade. Coordination with the civil defense authority shall be
total height of 3.6m & 2.1m. provided.
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-1” is established as follow: The minimum here below dispositions will be provided and in accordance with the Qatar Code:
- Underground Structure: 25m2; housing MEP services.
 A fire appliance access road shall be available on 1/6 the perimeter (minimum 15m) of
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -2 each building.
 Each building is not farther than 45m from a fire engine access road.
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-2” is a buried structure with a total depth of 4.0m with a
total height of 3.1m & 2.0m.  Fire engine hardstanding of dimensions (15mx6m) minimum shall be provided between 2
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-2” is established as follow: meters and 10 meters from building façade.
- Underground Structure: 24m2; housing MEP services.  The width of the fire access road shall not be less than 6m.
 The clear unobstructed height shall not be less than 4.5m.
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -3  Dead end fire department access roads in excess of 46m in length shall be provided with a
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-3” is a buried structure with a total depth of 5.1m with a turnaround provisions.
total height of 4.1m & 2.1m.  Minimum turning inner radius for maneuvering is 7m.
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-3” is established as follow:  Maximum gradient slope 1:15
- Underground Structure: 25m2; housing MEP services.  Every part of the fire engine hardstanding and/or access road is located within maximum
an unobstructed distance of 50m from any fire hydrant
Underground Sewage Pumping Station -4

 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-4” is a buried structure with a total depth of 4.7m with a Fire Resistance of Structure
total height of 3.8m & 2.1m.
Based on classification, height, area requirements, the minimum construction type required is Type
 “Underground Sewage Pumping Station-4” is established as follow: II (000)
- Underground Structure: 35m2; housing MEP services.
Therefore the following fire resistance is respected:
Classification of Occupancy Table 16-1: Type II (000)
 CCTV building, Electrical Substation –A,B &C, Underground Water & Fire Tank with Component Fire Resistance (hr)
Pumping station, Underground Irrigation Tank with pumping station, Underground HEX Exterior Bearing Walls
building and Underground Sewage Pumping Station-1, 2, 3 &4 are classified as Industrial Supporting more than one floor, columns, or other bearing walls 0
Occupancy. Supporting one floor only 0
 Vacuum Solid Waste Station are classified as Industrial Occupancy with ancillary Supporting a roof only 0
Business Occupancy. Interior Bearing Walls
 Landscape Maintenance building is classified as Storage Occupancy. Supporting more than one floor, columns, or other bearing walls 0
 Gas Plant is classified as Industrial Occupancy with High Hazard Classification. Supporting one floor only 0
Supporting roofs only 0
Hazard of Contents Columns
Supporting more than one floor, columns, or other bearing walls 0
 The hazard of contents of the buildings shall be classified as Ordinary Hazard as materials Supporting one floor only 0
are likely to burn with moderate rapidity or give up a considerable volume of smoke. Supporting roofs only 0
 The hazard of contents of the Gas Plant building shall be classified as High Hazard Beams, Girders, Trusses, and Arches
Occupancy where the quantity and combustibility of contents are very high and dust, lint, Supporting more than one floor, columns, or other bearing walls 0
or other materials are present, introducing the probability of rapidly developing fires with Supporting one floor only 0
high rates of heat release. Supporting roofs only 0
Floor Construction 0
Roof Construction 0

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 173 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Building Separation and Exposure Protection Guards:

Fire resistance rating of exterior walls are based on the construction type fires resistance rating or the Guards, not less than 107 cm high, are provided at the open sides of means of egress that exceed 76 cm
below table, whichever is greater. above the floor or grade below; Guards have intermediate rails such that a sphere 10 cm in diameter is
not be capable of passing through.
Table 16-2: Horizontal Separation
Number and Capacity of Means of Egress
Occupancy Classification Horizontal Separation (m)
0 to 1.5 >1. 5 to ≤3 > 3 to ≤9 >9 Occupant Load:
Business 1 1 0 0
Industrial and Storage with ordinary hazard contents 2 1 0 0 Occupant Load in the project or part thereof is calculated based on the occupant load factors indicated by
NFPA as follow:

For Underground Gas Plant building as per NFPA58, it should be distant of minimum 15m from other Table 16-3: Occupant Load Factor
surrounding buildings.
Occupancy Occupant Load Factor
MEANS OF EGRESS
Solid Vacuum waste station 1 person/ 9.3 m2
Components Offices 1 person/ 9.3 m2
CCTV Station, Electrical Substations, Pumping stations and HEX building 1 person/ 27.9 m2
Doors:
Landscape Maintenance building 1 person/ 27.9 m2
Doors respect the minimum width of 81 cm stipulated by NFPA

As required, all of the following doors open in the direction of escape:

 Where the door serves a high hazard contents area Occupant Load for Multiple Levels
 Where the door serves an area with an occupant load of more than 50 persons. As per NFPA and Qatar guidelines, the following is considered:
 Final exit doors that lead to the outside of the building.
The occupant load of each story is used in computing the required capacity of the exit stairways and exit
Stairways: doors at each story.

Stairways respect the minimum dimensional criteria stipulated by NFPA as follow: Capacity of Egress Components

 Minimum width 91.5 cm As per NFPA, capacity of means of egress is calculated as follow:
 Maximum height of risers 18.0 cm
 The required width of stairways is calculated on the basis of 1 person 7.6 mm with a
 Minimum tread depth 28.0 cm
minimum of 91.5cm
 Maximum height between landings 366.0 cm
 The required width of exit doors is calculated on the basis of 5 mm per person with a
Corridors: minimum of 81cm of clear door width

Corridors respect the minimum width of 915 cm stipulated by NFPA Number of Means of Egress

Means of egress headroom is not less than 2285mm with projections from the ceiling not less than 2030 Number of means of egress shall be not less than 2 from any story or portion thereof unless the occupant
mm. load is less than 50 people and travel to reach an exit is within the allowable common path.

Handrails: Arrangement

Handrails are provided at a height of 90 cm on both sides of exit stairways and they are continuous for the Exits and exit access doors are placed at a distance from one another not less than one-third the length of
full length of flights, and at turns of stairs, and between flights at landings. the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the floors and areas served

Each space is provided with access to the required exits without passing through rooms that can be locked.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 174 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Exit accesses are arranged so that distances do not exceed the maximum allowable by NFPA in the case INTERNAL SPREAD OF FIRE
of unsprinklered building as follow: In order to limit the horizontal spread of fire and smoke, the building is sub-divided by means of fire
barriers as follow:
Table 16-4: Arrangement of Means of Egress & Travel Distance Verification
Occupancy Travel Distance Common Path Dead End Protection of Vertical Openings
Industrial (NS) 60m 15m 15m Shafts
Industrial (S) 76m 30m 15m
Storage (NS) 61m 15m 15m In order to limit the vertical spread of fire and smoke, shafts are enclosed with fire barriers as follow:
 Electro-mechanical and service shafts to constitute protected shafts that accommodate all
(NS) Non sprinklered (S) Sprinklered of the vertical ducts pipes and conduits connecting less than three stories; the shafts are
separated from the rest of the building by means of 1-hour fire barriers and 1 hour self-
Discharge closing fire resistant access doors and panels.
Not less than 50 % of the required exits number and capacity shall terminate directly to outside or at a Exits
public way.
In order to limit the vertical spread of fire and smoke, and to protect evacuation, exit stairways are enclosed
Illumination of Means of Egress with fire barriers as follow:
 Protected exit stairways connecting less than three stories are separated from the rest of
Illumination of stairways, corridors and passageways that lead to the public way, is continuous from an
emergency generator to values of at least 1 ft-candle (10 lux) measured at the floor. the building by means of 1-hour fire barriers and 1 hour self-closing fire resistant doors.

Emergency Lighting Hazard Areas

Emergency lighting for of stairways, corridors and passageways that lead to the public way, is provided  The building spaces are subdivided by internal fire barrier separation to limit the spread
by means of an emergency illumination system that is arranged to provide illumination automatically in of fire.
the event of any interruption of normal lighting due to any of the following:  Every opening in fire barrier is protected to limit the spread of fire and restrict the
movement of smoke from one side to another.
 Failure of a public utility or other outside electrical power supply
 Control Room and Filter room are separated from Processing Areas by 2H fire resistant
 Opening of a circuit breaker or fuse
rated barrier.
 Manual act(s), including accidental opening of a switch controlling normal lighting
 Exhauster Room and Processing Area are separated by 2H fire resistant rated barrier.
facilities
 CCTV Control room, CCTV Equipment Room and OOREDOO room are separated from
The delay of changing into the emergency mode is not more than 10 seconds. each other by 2H fire resistant rated barriers.
 Transformer room, LV Room and MV room are separated from each other by 3H fire
The emergency lighting system is arranged to provide initial illumination that is not less than an average resistant rated barriers.
of 1 ft-candle (10 lux) and, at any point, not less than 0.1 ft-candle (1 lux), measured along the path of
 MCC Room and ETS Room are separated by 2H fire resistant rated barrier.
egress at floor level.
 Electrical Room and Pump Room are separated by 2H fire resistant rated barrier.
Emergency power system for emergency lighting should operate for not less than 1.5hours and in  Fire resistant doors will be equipped with door closer.
accordance with NFPA 110. Table 16-5: Summary Table
Marking of Means of Egress Component Fire Resistance Rating Fire Doors Assemblies Fire Windows
Walls (hr) Rating (hr) Assemblies Rating (hr)
Exits are marked by exit signs and directional signs with a directional indicator are provided in corridors Exit stairways 1 1 hour SC NP
and pathways at every change in circulation. Signs are continuously illuminated. Shafts 1 1 hour SC NP
1 ¾ hour 3/4 hour
Fire barriers 2 1 ½ hour SC NP
3 3 hour SC NP

SC: Self-Closing , NP: Not Permitted

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 175 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Openings in Fire Separations /Passive Fire Protection/Fire Stopping Class I and Class II shall have the following characteristics as tested by reference to NFPA 253 or ASTM
E 648:
 The openings within the fire barriers shall be fire protected by fire stopped systems tested
in accordance with ASTM e 814, standard test method for fire test of through penetration
fire stops, or UL 1479. Table 16-7: Interior Floor Finish
 Conduits & pipes crossing fire resistant barriers are designed not to impair the fire Classes Critical Radiant Flux
resistance of the barriers and equipped with fire stopping systems.
I not less than 0.45 W/cm2
 Ducts and air-transfer openings penetrating walls or partitions having a fire resistance
rating of 2H or more and 1h fire resistance rated shafts will be equipped with fire dampers II not less than 0.22 W/cm2
where fire dampers doesn’t conflict with the purpose design of the duct.
FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Alarm and Detection and Communication

Interior Finishes and Furnishing
Buildings are provided with a fire alarm system.
Unused Material

The following materials are not used in internal finishes:  Initiation shall be by one of the following:
o Manual fire alarm box placed in an approved location.
 Textile and expanded vinyl Materials o Automatic sprinkler system
 Cellular or Foamed Plastic. o Smoke detector
 Light-Transmitting Plastics.  Notification signals for occupants to evacuate shall be audible and visible.

Limitations
Extinguishing
Classes of internal finishes are limited to the following:
All Buildings to be Protected with:
Industrial and Business:
 Portable Fire Extinguishers shall be provided in accordance with SBC 801 and NFPA 10.
 Exit stairways and exit access corridors:  Fire Hose Reels
o Walls and Ceilings: A or B  Fire Hydrants

 Elsewhere Underground HEX Building:

o Walls and Ceilings: A, B or C
Class I Standpipe system shall be provided in accordance with NFPA101 and NFPA 14.
Classification
Vacuum Solid Waste Station Building:
Internal Wall & Ceiling Finish
Shall be protected throughout with an electrically supervised automatic sprinkler system, otherwise
common path of travel shall be limited to 15m.
Table 16-6: Internal Wall & Ceiling Finish
Smoke Control and Ventilation
Class Flame Spread Smoke Developed
A 0–25 0–450 Smoke control is not required. To provide adequate ventilation complying with NFPA90A & NFPA90B
B 26–75 0–450 as per Qatar guidelines.
C 76–200 0–450

Interior floor finish is provided as following:

Class I or Class II minimum in exit and exit access corridors.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 176 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 17-1: List of Standards & Codes

17 UTILITY BUILDINGS FAÇADE
General Building Qatar Municipality / Civil Defense Code
INTRODUCTION Codes and Standards
American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE 7
International Building Codes: IBC
This report has been prepared as Preliminary design of the façade and building maintenance strategies for
American Standard: ASTM
the Utility buildings of the Gewan Island Development project. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association: AAMA
British and European Standards: BS and BS EN
This report is focused on the Utility buildings and is comprised of façade studies that analyse the design
Centre for Windows and Cladding Technology: CWCT
intent and inform further developments in terms of system choice, materiality, performance,
Glazing ASTM E1300: “Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in
Buildings”
Constructability and maintainability. These inquiries begin with an understanding of the related site and
GANA: “GANA Glazing Manual” by Glass Association of North America
its context in relation to the Client aspirations and architectural intent.
Aluminum ADM: “Aluminum Design Manual 2005”
Steelwork AISC-ASD: ”Specification for Structural Steel Building - Allowable Stress Design and
This foundation provides a clear list of items to be studied, results to be achieved, and a roadmap for future
Plastic Design,” Ninth Edition, June 1, 1989, by American Institute of Steel
development. Construction.
AISC-LRFD: ”Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
An initial building maintenance strategy has been provided indicating several options for Utility buildings Buildings,” Thirteenth Edition, 2005, by American Institute of Steel Construction.
of various size and shape. Stone ASTM C 1242 “Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Dimension
Stone Anchoring Systems”
No specific strategy has been selected at this stage as further guidance is required from the Client on ASTM C 568 “Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone”
preference from a cost and operational view. ASTM C 615 “Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone”
Welding AWS D1.2M-2003: ”Structural Welding Code - Steel,” by American Welding Society.
DESIGN CRITERIA

Standards, Codes and Regulatory Bodies Wind Loads ASCE 7-05: ”Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures” 2005, by
American Society of Civil Engineers
Standards and codes compliance criteria are outlined in this documentation and will be finalized in the
Seismic Loads UBC 97: ”Uniform Building Code” 1997, Chapter 1610 Earthquake Loads Division IV
Façade Specification.

The most appropriate of the following standards shall be used for the required application Coatings PVDF
Aluminum Extrusion Coating Performance AAMA 2605-05
Powder Coating
Aluminum Extrusion Coating Performance,
Interior Surface AAMA 2604-05, Exterior AAMA 2605-05

Local Regulations

This project is located at a site under the jurisdiction of Qatar Municipality. All Qatar Municipality
Building Regulations shall be complied with. If not agreed otherwise or in the event of conflict or
discrepancy the most stringent regulation, standard or guideline must be taken into account. The latest
practicing code prevails.

Site Conditions

Site exposure Arid desert

Pollution rating Medium, with frequent dust storms

UV exposure Very high

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 177 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Design Life

The following design life requirements are generally recommended:

Building structure 50 years

Aluminum/GFRC Paneling 25 years

Stone cladding 25 years

Stainless steel 25 years

Façade frame material finishes 30 years

Double glazed units 25 years

Single glazing 25 years

Façade gaskets, seals, sealants etc. 25 years

Warranty Duration

The following industry standard warranties are recommended. Extended warranties are possible, but
would result in an increased procurement cost.

General system warranty 10 years

Double glazed units 10 years

Aluminum coatings – PVDF 10 years

Stone cladding 10 years

GFRC/GRP/Others Coating 10 years

(Warranties to allow for monthly cleaning)

Stainless steel 10 years

Steel coatings 5 years to first maintenance

Gaskets and seals 10 years

Acoustic Design Criteria

No acoustic design criteria have been established at this stage; however, an initial assessment indicates
that the façade systems will need to take into account the fact that most of utility buildings are near a
residential development.

Coatings 15 years

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 178 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

BUILDING ENVELOPE DESIGN

Façade Materials

Figure 17.1: Wall Sections of Curtain Wall & CMU Cavity Wall
Figure 17.2: 3D Views of Electrical Substation -A & B

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 179 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 17.3: 3D Views of Electrical Substation -C & CCTV Building

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 180 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 17.4: 3D View of Vacuum Solid Waste Building

Figure 17.5: Wall Sections with Stone Cladding & ACP Cladding

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 181 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNIT BRIEF Auxiliary Tools, Maximum Working Height 15m

Auxiliary Tools, Maximum Working Height 10m Tucker Telescopic Poles

Heavy Duty Professional Ladder Dual hose with soap dispenser Water fed Pole: Constructed of anodized aluminum tubing. Extend to
desired height below 15m. Connect to a DI* water source. Pole includes a 300mm gooseneck with a
 Ultra-heavy duty -profiled ladder is suitable for very intensive professional use. 300mm double trim monofilament brush, soap dispenser, 1 lb. of Tucker soap tablets, and the Tucker Pole
 The unique light-weight I-profile simplifies the handling of the ladder. Tool. Garden hose female connection on hose.
 Black powder coated finish looks attractive yet keeps the unit clean.
 Repels dirt and keeps users hands warm.
 Top rollers prevent damage to building façade.
 Spreading lock prevents unexpected closure of the ladder.
 Max Load of 150kg.

Table 17-2: Details of Heavy Duty Professional Ladder

No.of Steps Max Height(mm) Closed Height (mm) Weight (Kg)

3x10 6900 2800 24

3x12 8000 3350 28
3x14 9350 3900 34

Figure 17.7: Details of Tucker Telescopic Pole

Figure 17.6: Details of Heavy Duty Professional Ladder

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 182 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

GENERAL REFERENCE REGULATIONS, STANDARDS AND GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS (LATEST EDITION

18 ACOUSTICS FOR UTILITIES BUILDINGS TO BE ADOPTED)

This report summarizes criteria and recommendations pertaining to acoustical design for Utility buildings 1 The Executive Order (By-Law) for the Environmental Protection Law and its Annexes,
of Gewan Island Development project. 2005.
The aim of this section is to:
2 GSAS Typologies: GSAS Design Guidelines v.2.0, 2013.
- Outline Acoustics, Noise and Vibration criteria applicable to this project; GSAS Guidelines make reference to other standards and guidelines and are considered in our design
approach
- Outline required acoustic performances for walls, floors, doors facades, roof elements and finishes
in all occupied and technical spaces; 3 BS 8233:1999 Sound Insulation and Noise Reduction for Buildings - Code of Practice. Document
updated on 2014.
The required Acoustic, Noise and Vibration performances outlined within this report, form part of our Where specifications are unclear or missing, we adopt international codes and standards as listed
design drawings and tender documentation. Commissioning tests should be undertaken to ensure that the below:
levels outlined within this report are achieved. a) BS 4142: Method for rating industrial noise affecting mixed residential and industrial
areas;
This section of the report is arranged as follows:
b) 2015 ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Applications, Section 48: Sound and Vibration
1. Reference regulations, standards and guidance documents Control;
c) World Health Organization (WHO): Guidelines for Community Noise;
2. Sound Isolation d) BS 6472: Evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings Part 1: Vibration
sources other than blasting.
a) Acoustical separation (STC and IIC)
4 On-site testing
i. Walls The testing is to be carried out in accordance with the following standards:
ii. Floors a) BS EN ISO 16283-1:2014 Acoustics - Field measurement of sound insulation in buildings
iii. Doors and of building elements. Part 1: Airborne sound insulation.
b) BS EN ISO 16283-2:2015 Acoustics - Field measurement of sound insulation in buildings
b) Room Acoustics
and of building elements. Part 2: Impact sound insulation.
i. Reverberation Time (RT) c) BS EN ISO 3382-2:2008 Acoustics – Measurement of room acoustic parameters. Part 2:
ii. Recommendations for Interior Finishes Reverberation time in ordinary rooms.
5 Laboratory testing
3. External Sound Insulation The testing is to be carried out in accordance with the following standards:
a) BS EN ISO 10140-2:2010 Acoustics - Laboratory measurement of sound insulation of
i. Facades
building elements Part 2: Measurement of airborne sound insulation.
b) BS EN ISO 140-18 Acoustics - Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of
4. HVAC/MEP Noise Control building elements. Laboratory measurement of sound generated by rainfall on building
elements.
i. Background Noise Criteria (NC)
6 General
Acoustic rating values shall be calculated in accordance with:
6. Acoustic Detailing a) BS EN ISO 717-1:2013 Acoustics – Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of
building elements Part 1: Airborne sound insulation.
i. General b) BS EN ISO 717-1:2013 Acoustics – Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of
building elements Part 2: Impact sound insulation.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 183 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

SOUND ISOLATION The above construction types are typical only and other wall build ups would be acceptable as long as the
outlined STC are achieved.
Acoustical Separation (STC and IIC)
It is essential that all walls are taken from slab to ceiling in order to achieve the sound insulation of the
Walls: wall.

Internal sound insulation should be designed so as to provide a suitable level of acoustic privacy and The construction’s performance should be validated and laboratory test certificated attained.
comfort between occupied areas, and between noisy areas and occupied areas.

The following types of typical walls are defined actually in order to develop other types of walls in the
further phases. Table 18-3: Table Below Indicates the STC that Should be Adopted Between Different Adjacent
Areas:
The airborne sound insulation figures given in this specification for separating walls represent those
measured under laboratory test condition, than an in situ performance requirement to allow for site Vacuum Solid waste Station
Room Room STC
tolerances and variances in workmanship. Control Room All adjacencies 55
The accepted variation between laboratory figures and in situ measurement is maximum 5 db. CCTV
Room Room STC
Table 18-1: Block Wall Types CCTV Control Room CCTV Equipment Room 55
Wall performance Hollow Block Solid Block CCTV Control Room Ooredoo Room 55
(Rw) (1400 kg/m³) mm (2000 kg/m³)mm
45 100 80
50 150 100 Floors:
55 200 150 The floor of the exhauster room above the control room should be floating floor, and achieve an STC 55
60 - 200 and an IIC 70
65 100 + 50 void + 100 100 + 50 void + 100
Doors:

All the walls should be plastered with minimum 15mm from both sides. Doors in sound-isolating partitions should provide sufficient sound isolation performance so that the
partition sound isolation is not compromised.
Table 18-2: Gypsum Types
Table 18-4: STC of the Doors should be as Indicated in the Table Below:
Rw Insulation Width Height (mm) Number of Mass of Boards
(mm) layers Kg/m2 Walls Doors
45 80mm Rockwool 125 4000 1 * 12.5mm each 8.8 45 28
(60kg/m3) side 50 30
55 35
50 80mm Rockwool (60 125 4000 1 * 12.5mm each 11.9 60 40
kg/m3) side 65 45
“Special treatment” Special treatment
55 50mm Rockwool (60 150 4000 2 each side 11.9
kg/m3) (12.5mm)

60 50mm Rockwool (60 150 4000 2 each side 14.3 Room Acoustics
kg/m3) (15mm)
Reverberation Time (Rt):
65 50mm Rockwool (60 150 4000 2 each side 14.3
kg/m3) (Staggered (15mm)
Reverberation time (RT) is defined as the amount of time that it takes for sound to decay by 60 decibels,
Studs) in a given space.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 184 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Reverberation time is dependent upon the volume of a room and the amount of surface area of sound
absorptive material that is present within the room. Vacuum Solid waste Station- Mechanical / technical rooms (Highly noisy ≥ 85 dB)
Processing Area
Excessive reverberation time can also result in a buildup of overall sound energy, creating a very harsh
Location Material Percentage NRC
and cacophonous environment, especially in large occupied spaces.
Ceiling Absorbent material 100% 0.75
Sound absorptive materials provide some benefit in terms of reducing sound transfer between adjacent Walls Absorbent material 100% 0.75
open areas by minimizing the reflected energy that can propagate from space to space. It is important that
open areas where private communication may take place are treated with sound absorptive material to CCTV
improve speech privacy. CCTV Control Room
Location Material Percentage NRC
Table 18-5: Reverberation Time (RT) as Indicated in the Table Below:
Ceiling Absorbent material 100% 0.85
Location RT(s)
Vacuum Solid waste Station
Control Room 1 to 1.2
EXTERNAL SOUND INSULATION

External noise egress

Location RT(s)
CCTV
Noise from external plant or generated by the development must not cause any nuisance to neighboring
CCTV Control Room 1 to 1.2 properties.

Recommendations for Interior Finishes: The QATAR Executive Order (By-Law) for the Environmental Protection Law and its Annexe
3/5th, 2005 sets community noise limits which are given in below
Target reverberation times, as well as general design direction for the acoustical interior finishes are
summarized for each space type in the following Table. Refer to table below for initial design guidelines.
The absorbing materials are recommended to be added to achieve the WHO (World Health Organization) Table 18-7: Levels of Noise for Residential & Commercial Facilities:
requirements. Area The maximum limits of noise (average 20 minutes)

Day time Night time

Table 18-6: NRC Value for Interior Finishes Indicated in the Table Below: Residential areas & public 55 45
Commercial areas 65 55
Vacuum Solid waste Station- Mechanical / technical rooms (Highly noisy ≥ 85 dB)
Control Room
Location Material Percentage NRC The project is under the two categories Residential and Commercial.
Ceiling Absorbent material 100% 0.85
Walls Absorbent material 100% 0.85 Based on the above requirements a simulation with CADNA A software will be realized in further stages.

Vacuum Solid waste Station- Mechanical / technical rooms (Highly noisy ≥ 85 dB)
Filter Room HVAC/ MEP NOISE CONTROL
Location Material Percentage NRC
Ceiling Absorbent material 100% 0.75 Background Noise Criteria (NC) :
Walls Absorbent material 100% 0.75
The background sound level within a space is described in terms of Noise Criteria (NC) level as defined
in ASHRAE Guidelines. NC describes the maximum background sound level due to the normal operation
Vacuum Solid waste Station- Mechanical / technical rooms (Highly noisy ≥ 85 dB)
of building equipment serving the different areas, typically the air distribution system. Acceptable
Exhauster Room
background noise levels shall be defined based on the intended use of a space, and then the building
Location Material Percentage NRC systems are designed such that this noise does not exceed the limits that are appropriate.
Ceiling Absorbent material 100% 0.85
Walls Absorbent material 100% 0.85

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 185 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Table 18-8: Background Sound Design Goals for Various Spaces are Recommended as Follows:
Location NC
Vacuum Solid waste Station
Control Room 50

Location NC
CCTV
CCTV Control Room 50

ACOUSTIC DETAILING

General

Service penetrations (pipe work and cable trays) will need to be well sealed to ensure that they do not
undermine the sound insulation performance of separating walls

Any mechanical ventilation ductwork should ideally only penetrate fronts to Offices or occupied areas and
should incorporate cross-talk attenuators or alternative noise strategies along partition lines.

No “back to back” fixtures or installations permitted

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 186 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19 STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR UTILITY BUILDINGS
INTRODUCTION
This structural report outlines the basic design criteria and structural systems for the utility buildings and
underground infrastructures of Al Gawan Island, Doha-Qatar.
The list of codes of Practice and Standards, loading criteria, types of construction materials, as well as a
brief description of the structural systems are included.
The structural systems assigned to the project address four elements of major importance, namely:
The design and construction of the structural works shall be based on the loads listed below.
 Safety of the building occupants and systems
 Durability of the structural elements
 Aesthetical values through the development of structural concepts in harmony with the
architectural requirements
 Rationalization and optimization of the structural design to limit construction costs.
Reinforced cast-in-situ concrete is envisaged for the majority of the structural elements namely, the
foundations, columns, reservoir walls, basement walls, floor slabs and beams, etc…
The following paragraphs describe in details the different design aspects and parameters that are
considered in the design and detailing of the project.
 ACI 350‐06, American concrete institute, Code requirements for environmental engineering
concrete structures
 ACI 224R‐01, American concrete institute, Control of cracking in concrete structures
 IBC‐12, International building code
 ASCE 7 ‐10, American Society of Civil engineers, Minimum design loads for buildings and other
structures, for gravity live loading criteria
 ASCE 7 ‐05, American Society of Civil engineers, Minimum design loads for buildings and other
structures, for lateral wind loading criteria
Design Loads
Dead loads
 Self-weight: Actual weight of 2500 Kg/m³
 Floor Finish depending on architectural finish thickness
 Partition loads: depending on floor heights, partition walls types and distribution.
 False Ceiling and electro-mechanical Installation: 50 Kg/m2
 Landscaped areas: Fill height, with a unit weight of 1800 Kg/m3.
 Outer wall façade: Loads are calculated as per the distribution and height of cladding (if any) as
dictated by architectural details based on the unit weights specified in (ASCE 7‐10 table C3‐2).

The infrastructure package includes the following main components:

Live loads
 Electrical Substations Live loads shall be in accordance with QCS 2014 and ASCE 7-10 as well as the actual equipment weight
 Vacuum solid waste station in each utility structure.
 CCTV building
 HEX building (underground structure) Wind loads
 Water and firefighting reservoir and pumping station (underground structure)
 Irrigation reservoir and pumping station (underground structure) Wind loads shall be according to QCS 2014- Section 01, Part 01, clause 1.5.2 and ASCE 7‐05, with the
 Sewage pumping stations (underground structure) with their respective Electrical kiosks below criteria:
 LPG plant
 Landscape features  Wind speed for 3 sec. gust is equal to 85 mph (38 m/sec)
 External works utility structures (manholes, chambers, etc…)  Occupancy Category II (ASCE 7‐05, Table 1‐1)
 Exposure type = D (ASCE 7‐05, clause 6.5.6)
DESIGN CRITERIA  Importance factor = 1.0 (ASCE 7‐05, clause 6.5.5, Table 6‐1)

Codes of Practice and Standards

The structural design and detailing is based on the use of the local Qatar Construction Standards QCS
2014 complemented by the international standards, mainly the international American Standards.

The following international codes of practice, standards, design handbooks, and specifications shall be
used:

 QCS 2014, Qatar Construction Specifications

 ACI 318‐14, American concrete institute, Building code requirements for structural concrete Figure 19.1: Extract from QCS 2014 - Wind Speed
 ACI 315‐08, American concrete institute, Details and detailing of concrete reinforcement

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 187 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Seismic Loads Earth Pressure and Ground Water Pressure

Seismic loads shall be according to QCS 2014 and ASCE 7-10. The seismic analysis is based on 475 years Retaining structures are designed to resist earth pressures and lateral forces imposed by surcharge loading.
return period, leading to spectral accelerations Ss and S1 as indicated in the below table: Moreover, retaining structures shall be designed to resist lateral hydrostatic pressure loads. Foundation
system, shall also be designed to resist hydrostatic uplift forces / pressures.
Table 19-1: Seismic Spectral Accelerations Based on QCS 2014
The design ground water level is at +2.55 QNHD.
Peak Ground Acceleration 0.2 second Spectral 1 second Spectral
(PGA) Acceleration (g) - Ss Acceleration (g) – S1 Load Combinations

475 year 2475 year 475 year 2475 year 475 year 2475 year Load combinations using strength design or load and resistance factor design will be based on ASCE 7-
05, ASCE 7-10 and IBC-12, which are relevant to ACI 318M-14, clause 5.3.1.
0.045 0.10 0.090 0.147 0.045 0.065
Load combinations are as follows:
Based on the above and the buildings’ functions, the below coefficients are used:
 1.4 (D + F)
 Site class = C – as per Geotechnical recommendations  1.2 ( D + F) + 1.6 (L + H) + 0.5 Lr
 Site Coefficient, Fa = 1.2 (ASCE 7-10, Table 11.4-1)  1.2 ( D + F) + 1.6 Lr + 1.6 H + (L or 0.8W)
 Site Coefficient, Fv = 1.7 (ASCE 7-10, Table 11.4-2)  1.2 ( D + F) + 1.6 W + L + 1.6 H + 0.5 Lr
 SDS = 0.072 (ASCE 7‐10, Equation 11.4‐3 and 11.4-1)  1.2 ( D + F) + 1.0 E + L + 1.6 H
 SD1 = 0.051 (ASCE 7‐10, Equation 11.4‐4 and 11.4-2)  0.9 D + 1.6 W + 1.6 H
 Seismic force resisting system (ASCE 7‐10, Table 12.2-1)  0.9 D + 1.0E + 1.6 H
o Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames
o Response Modification coefficient, R = 3 As per ASCE7‐10 C2.3.5, the following load combinations are considered for temperature analysis:
o Over strength factor, Ω0 = 3  1.2 D + 1.2T + 0.5 L
o Deflection amplification factor, Cd = 2.5  1.2D+1.6L+1.0T
 Importance Factor, I = 1.0 (ASCE 7-10, Clause 11.5.1 and Table 1.5-2)
 Risk category I or II based on table 1.5-1 (ASCE 7-10) Load combinations using allowable design for serviceability check and foundation stresses will be based
 Time period parameters, Ct = 0.016 (ASCE 7-10, Clause 12.8.2 and Table 12.8-2, concrete moment on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10 as applicable and as follows:
resisting frames)  D+F
 D+H+F+L
Temperature Loads  D + H + F + Lr
 D + H + F + 0.75 L + 0.75Lr
As per QCS 2014, Section 01, Part 01, clause 1.5.2, a seasonal temperature variation of 25 °C is adopted  D+H+F+W
on roofs and exposed floor slabs.  D + H + F + 0.7 E
 D + H + F + 0.75 W + 0.75 L + 0.75 Lr
 D + H + F + 0.75 ( 0.7 E) + 0.75 L
 0.6 D + W + H
 0.6 (D+F)+ 0.7E + H

Figure 19.2: Extract from QCS 2014 – Temperatures

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 188 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Structural Materials Reinforcement

Reinforced Concrete Reinforcing steel bars shall be of grade B500B, conforming to BS 4449, deformed high tensile steel bars
having a minimum yield strength of Fy = 500 MPa. Reinforcing steel bars shall also conform to QCS 2014
The test results of the seawater samples reveal very high levels of chlorides in the tested samples and high requirements.
sulphate concentrations. The exposure is classified in accordance with Part 5 Section 6 of QCS 2014, BS
8500-1 standard and the “Concrete Society Guide to the Design of Concrete Structures in the Arabian Performance criteria
Peninsula”, as follows:
 QCS 2014: X5/S2 Exposure Allowable Deflection
 BS 8500-1: XS3/DC3 (DS-4/AC-4) Exposure
The concrete slabs and beams are designed to respect the following deflection criteria that are based on
 Concrete Society Guide: “Extreme/S3” Exposure
ACI 318-14, table 24.2.2:
From durability perspective, the required minimum concrete compressive strength class shall be C40/50.
Table 19-3: Maximum Permissible Calculated Deflections
Correspondingly, the adopted reinforced concrete grades are presented in the following table.

Table 19-2: Concrete Compressive Strength

Concrete Grade Concrete Cylinder Concrete Cube
Structural Element QCS 2014 Compressive Strength Compressive Strength
MPa MPa
Substructural concrete elements C50 40 50
in contact with soil
Superstructural concrete elements C50 40 50 Crack Width
Blinding and plain concrete C35 28 35
The serviceability checking for cracking shall be based on ACI 350 “Code requirements for environmental
Cement engineering concrete structures” for the concrete elements of the infrastructure package. Due to the highly
corrosive environment, the crack will be checked for a severe exposure.
The results of the chemical tests on soils and groundwater dictate the measures to adopt in order to protect
the concrete and reinforcement from the very high levels of chlorides and sulphate concentrations. The Waterproofing
adopted cement types will be as follows:
Due to soil aggressiveness and design ground water level, full tanking is required to all concrete elements
 For concrete elements in contact with soil and for external/exposed superstructure concrete in contact with soil or water. The waterproofing membrane will follow the requirements of section 05-
elements: part 14.3 of QCS 2014 with a membrane thickness of 1.5mm.
- Use of Triple Blend Cement: Moderately Sulphate Resisting Cement conforming to ASTM Structures Working Life
C150 Type II or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I 42.5N, with C3A content ranging from 5% to 8%.
Silica fume (5% to 10% of cementitious weight in combination with either Fly ash (25% to 35% Based on QCS 2014, Section 01-Part -01, the buildings/structures that are part of the infrastructure package
of cementitious weight) or GGBS (50% to 60% of cementitious weight) shall be added to the shall be part of category 4 as shown in the extract below.
Concrete mix.
Table 19-4: Extract from QCS 2014 - 1.5.2-12
 For superstructure concrete elements:
Design Working Indicative Design Examples
- Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type I or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I Life Category Working Life ( years)
42.5N. Cementitious additives such as Fly ash or GGBS, in combination with silica fume, may 1 10 Temporary structures
be necessary to be added to the concrete mix to achieve the specified strength and permeability 2 10 to 25 Replaceable structural parts, eg. Gantry girders, bearings
test requirements and/or to meet the heat of hydration requirements for massive/thick concrete
elements. 3 15 to 30 Storage and similar structures
4 50 to 75 Building structures and other common structures
 For blinding and unreinforced concrete:
- Sulphate resisting cement to ASTM C150 TYPE V or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I 5 120 Civil engineering structures like bridges, tunnel etc.
42.5N/SR3 (C3A content lower than 3%)

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 189 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Drift and Displacement Limits is carried out to account for the effect of the uplift forces, control the total stability of the structure and
design for the strength and serviceability of the uplift loadings.
19.2.4.5.1 Seismic Story Drift
Based on the respective level of each underground utility, the related uplift water pressure is evaluated
The allowable seismic story drift is based on the ASCE 7-10 requirements as shown in below table. For with respect to the design ground water level of +2.55 QNHD. Accordingly, proper structural elements
risk categories I or II and the applicable structure description, the allowable drift for the project’s utility dimensions, mainly the foundations thicknesses, are chosen to ensure the general stability of the structure
buildings is 0.02 hsx against uplift.

Table 19-5: Extract from ASCE 7-10 - Allowable Story Drift Gravity and Lateral Load Stability Systems

All utility buildings are G+1 except for the vacuum solid waste station which is G+2. Based on their
architectural layouts, lateral loads resisting system shall consist of moment resisting frames. For
functionality reasons, the Vacuum solid station is required to have concrete walls as façade instead of
blockwork. The lateral force resisting system shall be analyzed and dimensioned to meet the requirements
of strength and serviceability. The system shall be subjected to gravity loads such as superimposed dead
loads and live loads as well as lateral loads due to earthquake and wind.

The underground walls thickness will be dictated by their clear height, ground water level and
soil/surcharge pressure. Design is based on ultimate flexure and shear capacities along with serviceability
criteria concerning crack limitations.

Floor Slabs and Beams

19.2.4.5.2 Wind Displacement For the majority of the utility buildings, the suspended slabs consist of solid flat slabs with peripheral
beams. For the vacuum solid waste station, the slabs will consist of solid flat slabs with peripheral beams
The load combination for checking short-term effect is: and internal drop panels and beams framing large openings. Drop panels are used to cater for punching
loads, to redistribute the slab moments, help control the slabs deflection and ensure easier routing for
(D + 0.5L + 0.7W) as per ASCE 7‐05 Chapter C Appendix C: electromechanical pipes.

 Sway Limit: H/500 (H = Height of Building)
 Inter‐Story Drift Limit: h/500 (h = Story height)
Structural Systems
The proposed structural systems are selected to facilitate and accelerate the construction works as well as
reaching optimized economical results. The structural design concept shall be based on functional,
economical and efficient systems. The structural system shall respect the specific Client requirement,
architectural intent and any other requirement related to utilities and services.
Foundation system
The type of foundation system is selected based on the subsurface conditions, the targeted foundation
levels, the level of ground water and the anticipated design loads.
For the utility buildings that are mostly G+1, the shallow foundation system mainly consisting of strip
footing is adopted to limit the resulting settlement within allowable limits. The foundations are then
checked against strength and serviceability criteria.
The top slab of underground structures/reservoirs are typically carrying fill having thickness varying from
1.2 to 1.5 meters to act as landscaping base or roads subbase. They are carrying as well truck or carpark
loading.
Structural Analysis and Modeling
The analysis and design of the various concrete structural elements will be carried out using 3D and 2D
finite elements softwares.
The horizontal elements such as slabs, beams and foundations will be modelled using SAFE whereas the
vertical elements such as columns and walls will be modelled using ETABS to cater for the effect of the
lateral forces of wind and earthquake.
The underground walls and top slabs of buried structures shall be modeled and analyzed using SAP
software.
In addition to the use of finite elements softwares, the design is complemented by several in-house
validated design excel spreadsheets.

Concerning all underground utilities such as buried reservoirs and HEX buildings, raft foundations are 2D and 3D Models
adopted to cater for the uplift of the design ground water level and to ensure that the bearing pressures and
displacements fall within tolerable limits. The foundations of such buried structures are in many cases Below are some examples of 2D and 3D models carried out for the various structures and buildings of this
subjected to uplift forces due to the presence of ground water. Non-linear analysis using SAFE software package.

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 190 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19.2.5.5.1 HEX Building

Figure 19.4: SAP Model of HEX Building

Figure 19.3: Revit Model for HEX Building

Figure 19.5: 2D SAFE Foundation Model of HEX Building

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 191 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19.2.5.5.2 Underground Sewage Pumping Stations with Adjacent Kiosk 19.2.5.5.3 Underground Water and Firefighting Reservoir

Figure 19.8: Revit Model for Water and Firefighting Reservoir

Figure 19.6: Revit Model for Sewage Pumping Station 1

Figure 19.9: SAP Model for the Water and Firefighting Reservoir

Figure 19.7: SAP Model of Sewage Pumping Station 1

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 192 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 19.10: Service Bearing Pressures Contours for Water and Firefighting Reservoir
Figure 19.12: Foundation Model for Irrigation Tank
19.2.5.5.4 Underground Irrigation Reservoir

Figure 19.11: Revit Model for Irrigation Reservoir

Figure 19.13: Service Bearing Stresses Contours for Irrigation Tank

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 193 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19.2.5.5.5 Electrical Substations

Figure 19.16: SAFE Model for Substation A Roof Slab

Figure 19.14: Revit Model for Substation A

Figure 19.17: SAFE Foundations Model for Substation A

Figure 19.15: 3D ETABS Model for Substation A

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 194 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19.2.5.5.6 Vacuum solid waste station

Figure 19.19: SAFE Model for Vacuum Solid Waste Station Foundations

Figure 19.18: Revit Model for Vacuum Solid Waste Station

Figure 19.20: Service Bearing Stresses Contours for Vacuum Solid Waste Station

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 195 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

19.2.5.5.7 CCTV Building

Figure 19.23: 2D SAFE Model for CCTV Building Roof Slab

Figure 19.21: Revit Model for CCTV Building

Figure 19.24: SAFE Model for CCTV Building Foundations

Figure 19.22: 3D ETABS Model for CCTV Building

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 196 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Figure 19.25: Service Bearing Stresses Contours for Vacuum Solid Waste Station

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 197 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX A: GEOLOGICAL CROSS SECTIONS

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 198 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 199 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 200 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 201 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 202 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 203 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 204 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 205 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 206 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 207 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX B: LIQUEFACTION ANALYSIS RESULTS

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 208 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 209 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 210 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 211 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 212 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 213 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX C: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF WATER SUPPLY SYSETM

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 214 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

MODEL LAYOUT

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 215 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

LOADING DATA:
Number of Unit
Label Unit Demand Demand (m³/day)
Demands
Number of Unit
Label Unit Demand Demand (m³/day) J-41 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7
Demands
J-41 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-1 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-42 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7
J-1 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-42 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-11 Villas 17 11.9 J-43 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7
J-11 Villas 16 11.2 J-43 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-12 Villas 17 11.9 J-64 Villas 17 11.9
J-12 Villas 16 11.2 J-65 Villas 16 11.2
J-13 Villas 17 11.9 J-66 Villas 16 11.2
J-13 Villas 16 11.2 J-67 Villas 16 11.2
J-14 Villas 17 11.9 J-68 Villas 16 11.2
J-14 Villas 16 11.2 J-69 Villas 16 11.2
J-15 Villas 17 11.9 J-70 Villas 16 11.2
J-15 Villas 16 11.2 J-71 Villas 16 11.2
J-16 Villas 16 11.2 J-72 Villas 16 11.2
J-17 Villas 16 11.2 J-73 Villas 16 11.2
J-18 Villas 16 11.2 J-73 club house 163 3.26
J-19 Villas 16 11.2 J-73 Mosque 88 1.76
J-20 Villas 16 11.2 J-74 Villas 16 11.2
J-21 Villas 16 11.2 J-74 club house 163 3.26
J-22 Villas 16 11.2 J-74 Mosque 88 1.76
J-23 Villas 16 11.2 J-76 Villas 18 12.6
J-23 Mosque 88 1.76 J-26 Mixed use apartment 144 50.4
J-23 club house 162 3.24 J-26 Villas 60 42
J-24 Villas 16 11.2 J-26 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-24 club house 163 3.26 J-75 Mixed use apartment 144 50.4
J-24 Mosque 87 1.74 J-75 Villas 60 42
J-29 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-75 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-29 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-27 Mixed use apartment 144 50.4
J-35 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-27 Villas 60 42
J-35 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-27 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-36 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-28 Mixed use apartment 144 50.4
J-36 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-28 Villas 60 42
J-37 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-28 Mixed use retail 674 5.39
J-37 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-8 Villas 50 35
J-38 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-7 Villas 50 35
J-38 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-6 Villas 50 35
J-39 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-5 Villas 50 35
J-39 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-2 Villas 50 35
J-40 Mixed use apartment 142 49.7 J-84 Villas 75 52.5
J-40 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-25 Mixed use apartment 144 50.4
J-25 Villas 60 42

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 216 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Number of Unit Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars)

Label Unit Demand Demand (m³/day)
Demands
J-16 3.48 3.12
J-25 Mixed use retail 674 5.39 J-17 3.64 3.105
J-32 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-18 3.82 3.087
J-33 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-19 3.97 3.074
J-34 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-20 4.17 3.054
J-46 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-21 4.36 3.036
J-47 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-22 4.54 3.018
J-48 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-23 4.6 3.013
J-49 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-24 4.4 3.033
J-50 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-25 4.57 3.017
J-26 4.76 3
J-51 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-27 4.71 3.008
J-52 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-28 4.5 3.032
J-53 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-29 4.09 3.077
J-54 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-30 4.17 3.071
J-56 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-31 3.92 3.101
J-57 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-32 3.75 3.12
J-58 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-33 3.83 3.117
J-59 Golf Course 5 0.25
J-34 4.2 3.084
J-60 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-35 4.46 3.028
J-61 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-36 4.5 3.025
J-62 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-37 4.64 3.012
J-63 Golf Course 5 0.25 J-38 4.76 3.001
J-39 4.9 2.99
J-40 4.8 3.002
NODE REPORT: J-41 4.6 3.024
J-42 4.4 3.046
J-43 4.3 3.059
Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars)
J-44 3.91 3.101
BRJ-9 7.29 2.745 J-45 3.73 3.12
BRJ-10 8.39 2.638 J-46 3.42 3.153
J-1 4.3 3.043 J-47 3.8 3.12
J-2 4.15 3.05 J-48 4.02 3.103
J-3 3.4 3.128 J-49 4.21 3.088
J-4 4.3 3.043 J-50 4.42 3.072
J-5 3.68 3.096 J-51 4.59 3.059
J-6 3.9 3.075 J-52 4.71 3.05
J-7 3.85 3.081 J-53 4.77 3.046
J-8 4.24 3.043 J-54 4.62 3.064
J-11 3.9 3.078 J-55 3.81 3.146
J-12 3.8 3.088 J-56 3.68 3.156
J-13 3.73 3.095 J-57 3.41 3.18
J-14 3.64 3.105 J-58 3.4 3.179
J-15 3.5 3.118 J-59 3.8 3.137

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 217 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars) Start Stop Diameter Hazen- Headloss Gradient
Label Material
Node Node (mm) Williams C (m/km)
J-60 4.01 3.114
J-61 4.21 3.092 P-41 J-4 J-24 200 DI 130 0.086
J-62 4.64 3.048 P-42 J-24 J-23 200 DI 130 0.077
J-63 4.52 3.056 P-44 J-25 J-4 200 DI 130 0.083
J-64 3.45 3.124 P-46 J-26 J-25 200 DI 130 0.144
J-65 3.54 3.115 P-50 J-28 J-27 200 DI 130 0.413
J-66 3.67 3.102 P-52 J-29 J-28 200 DI 130 0.53
J-67 3.76 3.094 P-54 J-30 J-29 200 DI 130 0.602
J-68 3.91 3.079 P-56 J-31 J-30 200 DI 130 0.602
J-69 4.06 3.064 P-58 J-32 J-31 200 DI 130 0.602
J-70 4.2 3.051
P-60 J-33 J-32 200 DI 130 0.602
J-71 4.36 3.036
P-62 J-34 J-33 200 DI 130 0.603
J-72 4.5 3.022
P-63 J-1 J-35 200 DI 130 0.005
J-73 4.5 3.023
P-64 J-35 J-4 200 DI 130 0
J-74 4.4 3.033
P-65 J-1 J-36 200 DI 130 0.176
J-75 4.9 2.987
P-67 J-36 J-37 200 DI 130 0.221
J-76 4.57 3.016
P-69 J-37 J-38 200 DI 130 0.27
J-84 4.35 3.03
P-71 J-38 J-39 200 DI 130 0.323
J-85 3.75 3.09
J-86 3.41 3.122 P-73 J-39 J-40 200 DI 130 0.381
J-87 4.2 3.046 P-75 J-40 J-41 200 DI 130 0.443
P-77 J-41 J-42 200 DI 130 0.51
PIPE REPORT: P-79 J-42 J-43 200 DI 130 0.581
P-81 J-43 J-44 200 DI 130 0.656
Start Stop Diameter Hazen- Headloss Gradient P-83 J-44 J-45 200 DI 130 0.656
Label Material P-85 J-45 J-46 200 DI 130 0.656
Node Node (mm) Williams C (m/km)
P-87 J-46 J-47 200 DI 130 0.656
P-3 J-2 J-5 200 DI 130 0.009
P-89 J-47 J-48 200 DI 130 0.656
P-7 J-6 J-7 200 DI 130 0.028
P-91 J-48 J-49 200 DI 130 0.657
P-9 J-7 J-8 200 DI 130 0.04
P-93 J-49 J-50 200 DI 130 0.657
P-11 J-8 BRJ-9 200 DI 130 0.055
P-95 J-50 J-51 200 DI 130 0.657
P-13 BRJ-9 BRJ-10 200 DI 130 0.055
P-97 J-51 J-52 200 DI 130 0.658
P-15 BRJ-10 J-11 200 DI 130 0.055
P-99 J-52 J-53 200 DI 130 0.658
P-17 J-11 J-12 200 DI 130 0.066
P-101 J-53 J-54 200 DI 130 0.658
P-19 J-12 J-13 200 DI 130 0.078
P-103 J-54 J-55 200 DI 130 0.659
P-21 J-13 J-14 200 DI 130 0.09
P-105 J-55 J-56 200 DI 130 0.606
P-23 J-14 J-15 200 DI 130 0.103
P-107 J-56 J-57 200 DI 130 0.605
P-28 J-17 J-16 200 DI 130 0.039
P-109 J-57 J-58 200 DI 130 0.605
P-30 J-18 J-17 200 DI 130 0.044
P-111 J-58 J-59 200 DI 130 0.605
P-32 J-19 J-18 200 DI 130 0.048
P-113 J-59 J-60 200 DI 130 0.604
P-34 J-20 J-19 200 DI 130 0.053
P-115 J-60 J-61 200 DI 130 0.604
P-36 J-21 J-20 200 DI 130 0.058
P-117 J-61 J-62 200 DI 130 0.604
P-38 J-22 J-21 200 DI 130 0.063
P-119 J-62 J-63 200 DI 130 0.603
P-40 J-23 J-22 200 DI 130 0.069
P-120 J-63 J-34 200 DI 130 0.603

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 218 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars)

Start Stop Diameter Hazen- Headloss Gradient
Label Material J-8 3.55 2.272
Node Node (mm) Williams C (m/km)
J-11 3.9 2.478
P-123 J-64 J-65 200 DI 130 0.034 J-12 3.8 2.514
P-125 J-65 J-66 200 DI 130 0.039 J-13 3.73 2.544
P-127 J-66 J-67 200 DI 130 0.043 J-14 3.63 2.578
P-129 J-67 J-68 200 DI 130 0.048 J-15 3.5 2.617
P-131 J-68 J-69 200 DI 130 0.052 J-16 3.4 2.648
P-133 J-69 J-70 200 DI 130 0.057 J-17 3.54 2.644
P-135 J-70 J-71 200 DI 130 0.063 J-18 3.72 2.639
P-137 J-71 J-72 200 DI 130 0.068 J-19 3.9 2.634
P-141 J-73 J-74 200 DI 130 0.089 J-20 4.07 2.631
P-142 J-74 J-1 200 DI 130 0.098 J-21 4.26 2.625
P-143 J-27 J-75 200 DI 130 0.309 J-22 4.44 2.621
P-144 J-75 J-26 200 DI 130 0.219 J-23 4.5 2.629
P-145 J-72 J-76 200 DI 130 0.074 J-24 4.3 2.662
P-146 J-76 J-73 200 DI 130 0.08 J-25 4.54 2.666
P-148 J-16 J-3 200 DI 130 0.035 J-26 4.8 2.666
P-149 J-3 J-64 200 DI 130 0.03 J-27 4.85 2.703
P-150 J-3 J-15 200 DI 130 0.118 J-28 4.4 2.775
P-151 R-2 J-55 200 DI 130 2.282 J-29 3.72 2.877
P-153 J-84 J-2 200 DI 130 0.004 J-30 4.24 2.84
P-156 J-5 J-86 200 DI 130 0.017 J-31 3.89 2.906
P-157 J-86 J-85 200 DI 130 0.017 J-32 3.74 2.938
P-158 J-85 J-87 200 DI 130 0.017 J-33 3.83 2.955
P-159 J-87 J-6 200 DI 130 0.017 J-34 4.16 2.943
J-35 2.72 2.826
J-36 4.49 2.672
J-37 4.5 2.683
FIRE FLOW + AVERAGE DAILY DEMAND ANALYSIS:
J-38 4.62 2.684
Two Fire events are considered along with average water demand, one at farthest point and another at J-39 4.7 2.689
highest elevated point. J-40 4.7 2.711
J-41 4.5 2.752
NODE TABLE:
J-42 4.3 2.791
Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars) J-43 4.3 2.809
BRJ-9 6.72 2.057 J-44 3.73 2.876
BRJ-10 7.34 2.062 J-45 3.82 2.892
J-1 4.2 2.681 J-46 3.29 2.962
J-2 3.7 1.751 J-47 3.9 2.929
J-3 3.3 2.65 J-48 3.37 3.01
J-4 4.2 2.681 J-49 4.31 2.948
J-5 4.18 1.826 J-50 4.52 2.961
J-6 4.3 2.031 J-51 4.53 2.981
J-7 3.9 2.157 J-52 4.81 2.974

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 219 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars) Headloss

Start Stop Diameter Hazen-
J-53 4.84 2.979 Label Material Gradient
Node Node (mm) Williams C
(m/km)
J-54 4.2 3.061
P-28 J-17 J-16 200 DI 130 2.14
J-55 4.29 3.077
P-30 J-18 J-17 200 DI 130 2.167
J-56 3.79 3.108
P-32 J-19 J-18 200 DI 130 2.194
J-57 3.51 3.123
P-34 J-20 J-19 200 DI 130 2.222
J-58 3.45 3.115
P-36 J-21 J-20 200 DI 130 2.249
J-59 3.91 3.047
P-38 J-22 J-21 200 DI 130 2.277
J-60 4.11 3.016
P-40 J-23 J-22 200 DI 130 2.305
J-61 3.76 3.042
P-41 J-4 J-24 200 DI 130 2.386
J-62 4.74 2.932
P-42 J-24 J-23 200 DI 130 2.345
J-63 4.5 2.931
P-44 J-25 J-4 200 DI 130 2.61
J-64 3.32 2.654
P-46 J-26 J-25 200 DI 130 2.875
J-65 3.4 2.651
P-50 J-28 J-27 200 DI 130 3.738
J-66 3.52 2.651
P-52 J-29 J-28 200 DI 130 4.048
J-67 3.6 2.648
P-54 J-30 J-29 200 DI 130 3.655
J-68 3.2 2.698
P-56 J-31 J-30 200 DI 130 3.655
J-69 3.9 2.641
P-58 J-32 J-31 200 DI 130 3.655
J-70 4.1 2.633
P-60 J-33 J-32 200 DI 130 3.655
J-71 4.21 2.634
P-62 J-34 J-33 200 DI 130 3.656
J-72 4.4 2.627
P-63 J-1 J-35 200 DI 130 0.001
J-73 4.42 2.638
P-64 J-35 J-4 200 DI 130 0.009
J-74 4.3 2.662
P-65 J-1 J-36 200 DI 130 2.587
J-75 4.79 2.683
P-67 J-36 J-37 200 DI 130 2.734
J-76 4.42 2.631
P-69 J-37 J-38 200 DI 130 2.884
J-84 4.35 1.591
P-71 J-38 J-39 200 DI 130 3.039
J-85 5.39 1.82
P-73 J-39 J-40 200 DI 130 3.197
J-86 4.27 1.895
P-75 J-40 J-41 200 DI 130 3.358
J-87 5.6 1.841
P-77 J-41 J-42 200 DI 130 3.524
PIPE TABLE: P-79 J-42 J-43 200 DI 130 3.693
P-81 J-43 J-44 200 DI 130 3.866
Headloss P-83 J-44 J-45 200 DI 130 4.454
Start Stop Diameter Hazen-
Label Material Gradient P-85 J-45 J-46 200 DI 130 4.454
Node Node (mm) Williams C
(m/km)
P-87 J-46 J-47 200 DI 130 4.455
P-1 J-29 J-44 200 DI 130 0.036
P-89 J-47 J-48 200 DI 130 4.455
P-3 J-2 J-5 200 DI 130 6.631
P-91 J-48 J-49 200 DI 130 4.456
P-7 J-6 J-7 200 DI 130 6.918
P-93 J-49 J-50 200 DI 130 4.457
P-9 J-7 J-8 200 DI 130 7.064
P-95 J-50 J-51 200 DI 130 4.458
P-11 J-8 BRJ-9 200 DI 130 7.211
P-97 J-51 J-52 200 DI 130 4.459
P-13 BRJ-9 BRJ-10 200 DI 130 7.211
P-99 J-52 J-53 200 DI 130 4.46
P-15 BRJ-10 J-11 200 DI 130 7.211
P-101 J-53 J-54 200 DI 130 4.46
P-17 J-11 J-12 200 DI 130 7.309
P-103 J-54 J-55 200 DI 130 4.461
P-19 J-12 J-13 200 DI 130 7.407
P-105 J-55 J-56 200 DI 130 3.663
P-21 J-13 J-14 200 DI 130 7.506
P-107 J-56 J-57 200 DI 130 3.662
P-23 J-14 J-15 200 DI 130 7.606

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 220 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Headloss
Start Stop Diameter Hazen-
Label Material Gradient
Node Node (mm) Williams C
(m/km)
P-109 J-57 J-58 200 DI 130 3.662
P-111 J-58 J-59 200 DI 130 3.661
P-113 J-59 J-60 200 DI 130 3.66
P-115 J-60 J-61 200 DI 130 3.659
P-117 J-61 J-62 200 DI 130 3.659
P-119 J-62 J-63 200 DI 130 3.658
P-120 J-63 J-34 200 DI 130 3.657
P-123 J-64 J-65 200 DI 130 2.185
P-125 J-65 J-66 200 DI 130 2.213
P-127 J-66 J-67 200 DI 130 2.24
P-129 J-67 J-68 200 DI 130 2.268
P-131 J-68 J-69 200 DI 130 2.296
P-133 J-69 J-70 200 DI 130 2.324
P-135 J-70 J-71 200 DI 130 2.352
P-137 J-71 J-72 200 DI 130 2.38
P-141 J-73 J-74 200 DI 130 2.483
P-142 J-74 J-1 200 DI 130 2.525
P-143 J-27 J-75 200 DI 130 3.438
P-144 J-75 J-26 200 DI 130 3.151
P-145 J-72 J-76 200 DI 130 2.409
P-146 J-76 J-73 200 DI 130 2.441
P-148 J-16 J-3 200 DI 130 2.113
P-149 J-3 J-64 200 DI 130 2.156
P-150 J-3 J-15 200 DI 130 7.706
P-151 R-2 J-55 200 DI 130 14.632
P-153 J-84 J-2 200 DI 130 6.49
P-156 J-5 J-86 200 DI 130 6.774
P-157 J-86 J-85 200 DI 130 6.774
P-158 J-85 J-87 200 DI 130 6.774
P-159 J-87 J-6 200 DI 130 6.774

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 221 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX D: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF WASTEWATER SYSETM

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 222 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

MODEL LAYOUT

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 223 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

CONDUIT REPORT
Depth
Inver Inver (Average
Length Slope
Start Stop t t Diamete Velocit End) /
Label (Scaled (Calculate
Node Node (Start (Stop r (mm) y (m/s) Rise
) (m) d) (%)
Depth ) (m) ) (m) (Maximu
Inver Inver (Average m) (%)
Length Slope
Start Stop t t Diamete Velocit End) /
Label (Scaled (Calculate CO-41 MH-3.1.1 MH-3.1 1.33 1.11 200 43.2 0.5 0.62 33.4
Node Node (Start (Stop r (mm) y (m/s) Rise
) (m) d) (%) CO-
) (m) ) (m) (Maximu
m) (%) 125 MH-3.1.2 MH-3.1.1 1.6 1.48 200 50.8 0.224 0.6 31
CO-
CO-47 MH-1.1 O-1 1.25 1.18 200 11.1 0.67 0.61 25.6 124 MH-3.1.4 MH-3.1.2 2.02 1.81 200 41.1 0.5 0.47 20.4
CO-49 MH-1.2 MH-1.1 1.73 1.31 200 83.7 0.5 0.5 22.4 CO-
CO-56 MH-1.3 MH-1.2 2.15 1.73 200 83.4 0.5 0.5 23.2 123 MH-3.1.5 MH-3.1.4 2.2 2.02 200 35.1 0.5 0.47 21.1
CO-
CO-53 MH-1.4 MH-1.3 2.54 2.15 200 78.9 0.5 0.43 20.6 122 MH-3.1.6 MH-3.1.5 2.38 2.2 200 36.2 0.5 0.44 20
CO-62 MH-1.5 MH-1.4 2.8 2.54 200 51.9 0.5 0.43 18 CO-
CO- 121 MH-3.1.7 MH-3.1.6 2.51 2.38 200 26 0.5 0.44 18.8
144 MH-1.1.1 MH-1.1 2.5 2.38 200 24.6 0.5 0.43 13.6 CO-
CO-11 MH-3.1 O-3 0.43 0.37 200 11.7 0.5 0.82 64.4 120 MH-3.1.8 MH-3.1.7 2.67 2.51 200 33.3 0.5 0.36 16.2
CO-23 MH-3.2 MH-3.1 0.66 0.43 200 45 0.5 0.76 61.4 CO-
CO-26 MH-3.3 MH-3.2 0.91 0.66 200 50.3 0.5 0.75 52.9 119 MH-3.1.9 MH-3.1.8 2.87 2.67 200 40 0.5 0.36 13.7
CO- MH-
139 MH-3.4 MH-3.3 1.12 0.91 200 42.8 0.5 0.74 51.6 CO-60 3.1.2.1 MH-3.1.2 1.84 1.6 200 49.7 0.5 0.52 25.2
CO- CO- MH- MH-
138 MH-3.5 MH-3.4 1.26 1.12 200 28.5 0.5 0.74 51 118 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.1 2.01 1.84 200 33.6 0.5 0.41 18.2
CO- MH- MH-
CO-24 MH-3.6 MH-3.5 1.32 1.26 200 11 0.5 0.74 50.4 117 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.2 2.15 2.01 200 28.6 0.5 0.41 17.1
CO-28 MH-3.7 MH-3.6 1.36 1.32 200 9.2 0.5 0.74 49.8 CO- MH- MH-
CO-27 MH-3.8 MH-3.7 1.44 1.36 200 14.9 0.5 0.74 49.8 116 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.3 2.29 2.15 200 27.1 0.5 0.39 16.3
CO-29 MH-3.9 MH-3.8 1.85 1.64 200 42.5 0.5 0.7 43 CO- MH- MH-
CO- 115 3.1.2.5 3.1.2.4 2.47 2.29 200 36 0.5 0.39 15.6
108 MH-3.10 MH-3.9 2 1.85 200 28.9 0.5 0.68 43.4 MH- MH-
CO- CO-69 3.1.2.6 3.1.2.5 2.66 2.47 200 38.3 0.5 0.34 13.9
107 MH-3.11 MH-3.10 2.15 2 200 29.8 0.5 0.68 42.1 MH- MH-
CO- CO-74 3.1.2.7 3.1.2.6 2.89 2.66 200 45.2 0.5 0.24 9.7
110 MH-3.12 MH-3.11 2.32 2.15 200 35.2 0.5 0.66 40.7 CO-36 MH-2.1 O-2 1.29 1.21 200 16.4 0.5 0.65 36.6
CO- CO-40 MH-2.2 MH-2.1 1.86 1.6 200 53 0.5 0.62 33.5
109 MH-3.13 MH-3.12 2.45 2.32 200 25.8 0.5 0.66 39.4 CO-37 MH-2.3 MH-2.2 2.13 1.86 200 53.9 0.5 0.62 34.7
CO-52 MH-3.8.1 MH-3.8 1.5 1.44 200 13 0.5 0.45 35.1 CO-43 MH-2.4 MH-2.3 2.46 2.13 200 64.4 0.5 0.58 32.9
CO-51 MH-3.8.2 MH-3.8.1 1.57 1.5 200 12.9 0.5 0.45 20.1 CO-33 MH-2.5 MH-2.4 2.87 2.46 200 61.3 0.67 0.65 30.2
CO- CO-
114 MH-3.8.3 MH-3.8.2 1.74 1.57 200 34.3 0.5 0.41 18.4 143 MH-2.1.1 MH-2.1 2.04 1.96 200 15.2 0.5 0.43 13.6
CO- CO-
113 MH-3.8.4 MH-3.8.3 1.97 1.74 200 45.3 0.5 0.41 17.1 101 MH-4.1 O-4 1.12 1.1 400 8.9 0.2 0.91 48.8
CO- CO-
112 MH-3.8.5 MH-3.8.4 2.17 1.97 200 41 0.5 0.37 15.5 136 MH-4.1 MH-4.2 1.14 1.21 400 35 0.2 0.79 52
CO- CO-
111 MH-3.8.6 MH-3.8.5 2.32 2.17 200 29.5 0.5 0.37 14 137 MH-4.2 MH-4.3 1.21 1.3 400 44.3 0.2 0.79 57.8
CO-
141 MH-3.8.7 MH-3.8.6 2.6 2.32 200 56.3 0.5 0.3 12 CO-76 MH-4.3 MH-4.3.1 2.46 2.71 200 51.2 0.5 0.75 49
CO- CO-20 MH-4.3.1 MH-4.3.2 2.71 2.97 200 51.7 0.5 0.2 28.4
140 MH-3.8.8 MH-3.8.7 2.77 2.6 200 34 0.5 0.24 8.7

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 224 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Depth Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m)

Inver Inver (Average
Length Slope
Start Stop t t Diamete Velocit End) / MH-2.5 4.27 2.87
Label (Scaled (Calculate
Node Node (Start (Stop r (mm) y (m/s) Rise MH-3.1 3.9 0.43
) (m) d) (%)
) (m) ) (m) (Maximu
m) (%) MH-3.1.1 4.02 1.33
MH-3.1.2 4.19 1.6
CO-
MH-3.1.2.1 4.22 1.84
135 MH-4.4 MH-4.3 1.5 1.4 300 35.4 0.3 0.85 65.3
CO- MH-3.1.2.2 4.33 2.01
134 MH-4.5 MH-4.4 1.61 1.5 300 35 0.3 0.85 74.4 MH-3.1.2.3 4.43 2.15
CO- MH-3.1.2.4 4.5 2.29
133 MH-4.6 MH-4.5 1.72 1.61 300 35.4 0.3 0.85 74.4 MH-3.1.2.5 4.54 2.47
CO-
MH-3.1.2.6 4.42 2.66
132 MH-4.7 MH-4.6 1.82 1.72 300 35.8 0.3 0.85 73.9
CO- MH-3.1.2.7 4.29 2.89
131 MH-4.8 MH-4.7 1.9 1.82 300 24 0.3 0.8 68.5 MH-3.1.4 4.29 2.02
CO- MH-3.1.5 4.41 2.2
130 MH-4.9 MH-4.8 2.01 1.9 300 39.5 0.3 0.8 61.1 MH-3.1.6 4.5 2.38
CO-
MH-3.1.7 4.49 2.51
129 MH-4.10 MH-4.9 2.14 2.01 300 42 0.3 0.8 58.9
CO- MH-3.1.8 4.39 2.67
128 MH-4.11 MH-4.10 2.25 2.14 300 37.6 0.3 0.8 58.9 MH-3.1.9 4.27 2.87
CO-99 MH-4.11 MH-4.12 2.25 2.37 300 39.7 0.3 0.79 58.4 MH-3.10 3.57 2
CO- MH-3.11 3.67 2.15
100 MH-4.12 MH-4.13 2.37 2.46 300 30.4 0.3 0.71 51.1 MH-3.12 3.77 2.32
CO-65 MH-4.13 MH-4.14 2.46 2.6 300 44.3 0.3 0.7 43.4 MH-3.13 3.85 2.45
CO-67 MH-4.14 MH-4.15 2.6 2.72 300 40.1 0.3 0.69 42.1 MH-3.2 3.75 0.66
CO-
MH-3.3 3.61 0.91
142 MH-4.1.1 MH-4.1 2.47 2.29 200 35.3 0.5 0.41 13
MH-3.4 3.51 1.12
MH-3.5 3.39 1.26
MH-3.6 3.35 1.32
MH-3.7 3.33 1.36
MH-3.8 3.36 1.44
MANHOLE REPORT:
MH-3.8.1 3.4 1.5
MH-3.8.2 3.44 1.57
Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m) MH-3.8.3 3.55 1.74
MH-1.1 3.85 1.25 MH-3.8.4 3.68 1.97
MH-1.1.1 3.9 2.5 MH-3.8.5 3.8 2.17
MH-1.2 3.98 1.73 MH-3.8.6 3.88 2.32
MH-1.3 4.25 2.15 MH-3.8.7 4.06 2.6
MH-1.4 4.48 2.54 MH-3.8.8 4.17 2.77
MH-1.5 4.5 2.8 MH-3.9 3.49 1.85
MH-2.1 3.48 1.29 MH-4.1 4.04 1.12
MH-2.1.1 3.44 2.04 MH-4.1.1 3.87 2.47
MH-2.2 3.64 1.86 MH-4.10 4.75 2.14
MH-2.3 3.84 2.13 MH-4.11 4.66 2.25
MH-2.4 4.04 2.46 MH-4.12 4.52 2.37

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 225 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m)

MH-4.13 4.45 2.46

MH-4.14 4.3 2.6
MH-4.15 4.22 2.72
MH-4.2 4.08 1.21
MH-4.3 4.21 1.3
MH-4.3.1 4.49 2.71
MH-4.3.2 4.37 2.97
MH-4.4 4.26 1.5
MH-4.5 4.36 1.61
MH-4.6 4.46 1.72
MH-4.7 4.58 1.82
MH-4.8 4.65 1.9
MH-4.9 4.78 2.01

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 226 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX E: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF STORM DRAINAGE SYSETM

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 227 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

MODEL LAYOUT

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 228 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

CATCHMENT REPORT Runoff

Flow (Total Out)
Label Area (ha) Outflow Element Coefficient
(L/s)
Runoff (Rational)
Flow (Total Out)
Label Area (ha) Outflow Element Coefficient CM-48 0.15 MH-2-2.1 23.6 0.90
(L/s)
(Rational)
CM-49 0.21 MH-2-2.2 33.0 0.90
CM-1 0.05 MH-4-1.6 7.7 0.90 CM-50 0.16 MH-1-2.6 24.2 0.90
CM-1 0.11 MH-4-10 17.6 0.90 CM-51 0.15 MH-1-2.4 23.9 0.90
CM-2 0.08 MH-4-1.5 11.9 0.90 CM-52 0.10 MH-1-2.3 15.2 0.90
CM-2 0.03 MH-4-1.7 4.3 0.90 CM-53 0.19 MH-1-2.2 29.3 0.90
CM-3 0.09 MH-4-1.2 13.2 0.90 CM-54 0.20 MH-1-2.1 31.3 0.90
CM-3 0.06 MH-4-1.8 9.1 0.90 CM-55 0.12 MH-1-2 18.6 0.90
CM-4 0.03 MH-4-1.1 4.6 0.90 CM-56 0.04 MH-1-3.3 5.5 0.90
CM-5 0.03 MH-4-1 4.9 0.90 CM-57 0.06 MH-1-3.2 9.3 0.90
CM-6 0.03 MH-4-1 9.4 0.90 CM-58 0.15 MH-1-3.1 22.9 0.90
CM-7 0.03 MH-4-1 14.1 0.90 CM-59 0.20 MH-1-3 30.4 0.90
CM-8 0.04 MH-4-2 6.0 0.90 CM-60 0.13 MH-1-5 20.7 0.90
CM-9 0.06 MH-4-4 8.9 0.90 CM-61 0.25 MH-1-6 39.1 0.90
CM-10 0.05 MH-4-5 7.5 0.90 CM-62 0.29 MH-1-7 45.9 0.90
CM-11 0.03 MH-4-6 4.3 0.90 CM-63 0.11 MH-1-8 16.5 0.90
CM-12 0.05 MH-4-7 8.1 0.90 CM-64 0.39 MH-1-9 60.4 0.90
CM-13 0.07 MH-4-9 10.6 0.90 CM-65 0.26 MH-2-5.3 40.1 0.90
CM-14 0.07 MH-5-5 11.3 0.90 CM-66 0.13 MH-2-5.2 19.9 0.90
CM-15 0.09 MH-5-4 13.8 0.90 CM-67 0.06 MH-2-5.1 8.5 0.90
CM-16 0.09 MH-5-3 13.5 0.90 CM-68 0.03 MH-2-5 17.4 0.90
CM-17 0.10 MH-5-2 15.4 0.90 CM-69 0.03 MH-1-8 20.8 0.90
CM-18 0.09 MH-5-1.1 14.3 0.90 CM-70 0.03 MH-1-2.3 19.5 0.90
CM-19 0.06 MH-5-1.2 9.5 0.90 CM-72 0.16 MH-1-7 59.6 0.50
CM-20 0.10 MH-5-1.3 16.2 0.90 CM-73 0.16 MH-1-2.2 43.0 0.50
CM-21 0.07 MH-5-1.4 10.4 0.90 CM-74 0.18 MH-1-6 55.0 0.50
CM-32 0.31 MH-3-1.7 47.6 0.90 CM-75 0.16 MH-1-2.1 44.8 0.50
CM-33 0.08 MH-3-1.5 12.7 0.90 CM-76 0.16 MH-1-8 34.7 0.50
CM-34 0.06 MH-3-1.4 9.0 0.90 CM-77 0.17 MH-1-2.4 38.9 0.50
CM-35 0.10 MH-3-1.3 16.2 0.90 CM-78 0.18 MH-1-10 15.8 0.50
CM-36 0.06 MH-3-1.2 9.8 0.90 CM-79 0.16 MH-1-2.5 13.8 0.50
CM-37 0.06 MH-3-1.1 8.8 0.90 CM-80 0.18 MH-2-5.2 46.5 0.85
CM-38 0.06 MH-3-1 9.6 0.90 CM-81 0.19 MH-2-2.2 61.0 0.85
CM-39 0.03 MH-3-2 4.7 0.90 CM-82 0.06 MH-2-4 12.7 0.85
CM-40 0.03 MH-3-3 4.1 0.90 CM-83 0.05 MH-2-5 24.7 0.85
CM-41 0.02 MH-3-4 3.4 0.90 CM-84 0.08 MH-2-5.1 19.5 0.85
CM-42 0.04 MH-3-5 5.5 0.90 CM-85 0.07 MH-2-3 19.6 0.85
CM-43 0.08 MH-3-6 11.8 0.90 CM-86 0.07 MH-2-2.1 33.7 0.85
CM-44 0.15 MH-3-7 22.6 0.90 CM-87 0.61 MH-4-1.2 97.5 0.80
CM-45 0.08 MH-2-5 12.6 0.90 CM-88 0.33 MH-4-4 55.1 0.80
CM-46 0.03 MH-2-4 4.2 0.90 CM-89 0.91 MH-4-8 125.9 0.80
CM-47 0.06 MH-2-3 9.7 0.90 CM-90 0.63 MH-5-5 98.1 0.80

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 229 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Runoff Runoff
Flow (Total Out) Flow (Total Out)
Label Area (ha) Outflow Element Coefficient Label Area (ha) Outflow Element Coefficient
(L/s) (L/s)
(Rational) (Rational)
CM-91 0.80 MH-5-3 123.7 0.80 CM-
0.13 MH-2-5 45.4 0.95
CM-92 0.85 MH-5-1.1 132.1 0.80 160
CM-
CM-93 0.46 MH-5-1.3 80.4 0.80 0.09 MH-5-1.4 24.0 0.90
161
CM-94 1.00 MH-3-1.6 138.2 0.80 CM-
CM-95 0.70 MH-3-1.3 113.0 0.80 0.88 MH-3-8 145.5 0.95
162
CM-96 0.76 MH-3-1.1 113.5 0.80 CM-
0.18 MH-5-1.7 73.5 0.95
CM-97 0.72 MH-3-6 111.2 0.80 163
CM-
CM-98 0.19 MH-5-1.3 106.3 0.80 0.13 CB-16 31.1 0.95
164
CM- CM-
0.72 MH-2-4 131.9 0.95 0.46 MH-2-9 84.2 0.95
128 165
CM- CM-
0.21 CB-4 34.2 0.95 0.50 MH-2-7 136.4 0.95
141 166
CM- CM-
0.07 MH-2-3 30.9 0.95 0.42 CB-1 69.1 0.95
142 167
CM- CM-
0.07 CB-3 11.1 0.95 0.55 CB-3 100.8 0.95
143 168
CM-
0.07 CB-2 11.7 0.95
144
CM-
0.03 CB-18 5.4 0.95
145
CM- CONDUIT REPORT
0.15 CB-17 23.9 0.95
146
CM- Depth
0.06 CB-16 9.1 0.95 Invert Invert
147 Length Diameter/ Start Stop Slope Velocity (Average
Label (Start) (Stop)
CM- (m) size (mm) Node Node % (m/s) End) /
0.05 CB-15 8.9 0.95 (m) (m)
148 Rise (%)
CM- CO-
0.04 CB-14 6.7 0.95 41.1 400x550 CB-1 CB-2 4.31 4.18 0.30 0.87 38.00
149 78
CM- CO-
0.03 CB-13 5.4 0.95 43.2 400x550 CB-2 CB-3 4.18 4.03 0.36 0.97 54.90
150 79
CM- CO-
0.03 MH-3-7 28.2 0.95 86.7 400x550 CB-3 CB-4 4.03 3.77 0.30 1.13 68.70
151 80
CM- CO-
0.17 MH-5-1.5 27.6 0.95 34.9 400x550 CB-17 CB-16 3.93 3.75 0.50 0.76 23.00
152 81
CM- CO-
0.18 MH-5-1.6 28.7 0.95 34.2 400x550 CB-16 CB-15 3.75 3.65 0.30 0.80 30.80
153 82
CM- CO-
0.27 MH-5-1.7 44.7 0.95 27.0 400x550 CB-15 CB-14 3.65 3.56 0.32 0.86 32.80
154 83
CM- CO-
0.08 MH-5-1.8 13.6 0.95 18.8 400x550 CB-14 CB-13 3.56 3.51 0.30 0.85 34.80
155 84
CM- CO-
0.05 MH-2-9 8.9 0.95 29.4 400x550 CB-13 MH-3-7 3.51 3.42 0.30 0.87 35.80
156 85
CM- CO-
0.19 MH-2-8 31.9 0.95 63.8 400x550 CB-18 CB-17 4.29 4.09 0.30 0.36 6.10
157 86
CM- CO-
0.33 MH-2-7 55.0 0.95 49.5 400x550 CB-4 MH-2-2 3.77 3.56 0.42 1.32 63.30
158 88
CM- MH-5- MH-5-
0.08 MH-2-6 12.8 0.95 CO-1 61.1 400 2.14 1.84 0.50 1.16 228.20
159 1.4 1.3

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 230 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Depth Depth
Invert Invert Invert Invert
Length Diameter/ Start Stop Slope Velocity (Average Length Diameter/ Start Stop Slope Velocity (Average
Label (Start) (Stop) Label (Start) (Stop)
(m) size (mm) Node Node % (m/s) End) / (m) size (mm) Node Node % (m/s) End) /
(m) (m) (m) (m)
Rise (%) Rise (%)
MH-5- MH-5- CO-
CO-7 54.9 500 1.74 1.67 0.12 1.17 189.30 53.1 500 MH-2-5 MH-2-4 2.06 2.00 0.10 1.92 137.30
1.3 1.2 49
MH-5- MH-5- CO-
CO-8 42.4 500 1.67 1.62 0.12 1.19 164.30 52.2 500 MH-2-4 MH-2-3 2.00 1.95 0.10 2.48 98.90
1.2 1.1 50
CO- CO- MH-2- MH-2-
63.3 400 MH-5-3 MH-5-2 2.23 1.92 0.50 1.79 198.80 35.0 300 2.78 2.61 0.50 1.21 84.60
14 51 5.2 5.1
CO- CO- MH-2- MH-2-
50.0 400 MH-5-3 MH-5-4 2.29 2.54 -0.50 0.88 223.50 42.3 300 2.99 2.78 0.50 1.01 60.40
19 52 5.3 5.2
CO- CO-
43.8 300 MH-5-4 MH-5-5 2.64 2.94 -0.70 1.39 270.50 75.0 300 MH-1-9 MH-1-8 2.66 2.29 0.50 0.94 335.40
22 53
CO- MH-4- MH-4- CO-
29.0 300 1.56 1.41 0.50 1.59 212.90 76.2 300 MH-1-8 MH-1-7 2.29 1.91 0.50 1.30 287.10
25 1.2 1.1 54
CO- MH-4- CO-
32.1 300 MH-4-1 1.41 1.25 0.50 1.63 165.60 73.1 400 MH-1-7 MH-1-6 1.81 1.44 0.50 1.10 207.00
27 1.1 55
CO- CO-
24.8 400 MH-4-2 MH-4-1 2.06 1.93 0.50 1.53 94.70 72.6 400 MH-1-6 MH-1-5 1.44 1.08 0.50 1.41 192.40
29 56
CO- CO-
23.7 400 MH-4-2 MH-4-3 2.06 2.17 -0.50 1.50 119.60 28.3 500 MH-1-3 MH-1-2 0.82 0.78 0.12 1.21 129.80
31 57
CO- CO- MH-1- MH-1-
21.7 400 MH-4-3 MH-4-4 2.17 2.28 -0.50 1.51 138.30 49.6 300 2.32 2.04 0.55 0.60 24.80
33 58 3.3 3.2
CO- CO- MH-1- MH-1-
24.7 400 MH-4-4 MH-4-5 2.28 2.41 -0.50 1.16 147.00 62.7 300 2.04 1.73 0.50 0.76 40.50
34 59 3.2 3.1
CO- CO- MH-1-
17.7 300 MH-4-5 MH-4-6 2.51 2.59 -0.50 1.98 209.60 55.8 300 MH-1-3 1.73 1.45 0.50 0.97 48.80
35 60 3.1
CO- CO- MH-3- MH-3-
16.9 300 MH-4-6 MH-4-7 2.59 2.68 -0.50 1.94 299.70 39.9 500 2.16 2.11 0.12 1.47 211.70
36 61 1.3 1.2
CO- CO- MH-3- MH-3-
18.5 300 MH-4-8 MH-4-7 2.77 2.68 0.50 1.86 383.90 44.7 500 2.02 1.97 0.12 1.49 188.90
37 62 1.2 1.1
CO- CO- MH-3-
49.2 300 MH-4-9 MH-4-8 3.02 2.77 0.50 0.37 390.30 40.6 500 MH-3-1 1.97 1.92 0.12 1.96 125.90
38 63 1.1
CO- MH-3- MH-3- CO-
50.8 400 2.70 2.45 0.50 1.42 280.20 42.9 500 MH-3-2 MH-3-1 1.94 1.89 0.12 1.54 103.70
39 1.6 1.5 64
CO- MH-3- MH-3- CO-
30.5 500 2.35 2.31 0.12 0.95 228.30 21.6 500 MH-3-3 MH-3-2 1.97 1.94 0.12 1.53 143.00
40 1.5 1.4 65
CO- MH-3- MH-3- CO-
48.7 500 2.29 2.23 0.12 0.98 222.40 16.9 500 MH-3-4 MH-3-3 1.99 1.97 0.12 1.53 162.80
41 1.4 1.3 66
CO- MH-2- CO-
54.6 300 MH-2-3 2.41 2.68 -0.50 1.29 118.40 17.8 500 MH-3-5 MH-3-4 2.01 1.99 0.12 1.52 180.30
42 2.1 67
CO- MH-2- MH-2- CO-
58.1 300 2.68 2.97 -0.50 0.86 148.60 22.9 500 MH-3-6 MH-3-5 2.03 2.01 0.12 1.51 200.60
43 2.1 2.2 68
CO- MH-1- MH-1- CO-
71.1 300 2.65 2.29 0.50 0.50 350.40 46.7 400 MH-3-7 MH-3-6 2.37 2.13 0.50 1.66 269.40
44 2.5 2.4 69
CO- MH-1- MH-1- CO-
40.5 300 2.29 2.09 0.50 0.93 396.40 86.5 400 MH-3-8 MH-3-7 2.80 2.37 0.50 1.16 297.60
45 2.4 2.3 70
CO- MH-1- MH-1- CO- MH-5-
85.5 300 2.09 1.66 0.50 1.14 372.20 37.4 500 MH-5-1 1.53 1.58 -0.12 1.71 137.30
46 2.3 2.2 71 1.1
CO- MH-1- MH-1- CO-
82.1 300 1.66 1.25 0.50 1.59 229.60 27.7 400 MH-5-2 MH-5-1 1.92 1.78 0.50 1.86 116.50
47 2.2 2.1 72
CO- MH-1- CO-
41.2 400 MH-1-2 1.15 0.88 0.65 1.15 118.90 9.1 500 MH-5-1 O-5 1.43 1.42 0.10 2.72 113.10
48 2.1 73

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 231 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Depth Depth
Invert Invert Invert Invert
Length Diameter/ Start Stop Slope Velocity (Average Length Diameter/ Start Stop Slope Velocity (Average
Label (Start) (Stop) Label (Start) (Stop)
(m) size (mm) Node Node % (m/s) End) / (m) size (mm) Node Node % (m/s) End) /
(m) (m) (m) (m)
Rise (%) Rise (%)
CO- CO- MH-2- MH-2-
11.4 400 MH-4-1 O-4 1.15 1.09 0.50 2.49 110.10 32.3 300 2.78 3.12 -1.04 0.45 36.80
74 20 5.2 5.2.1
CO- CO- MH-5- MH-5-
20.4 400 MH-1-5 MH-1-4 1.08 0.98 0.50 1.50 164.20 39.3 400 2.64 2.84 -0.50 0.67 165.70
75 11 1.6 1.7
CO- CO- MH-5- MH-5-
11.6 400 MH-1-4 MH-1-3 0.98 0.92 0.50 1.49 151.50 54.4 400 2.37 2.64 -0.50 0.86 198.20
76 21 1.5 1.6
CO- MH-2- CO-
39.0 300 MH-2-5 2.61 2.41 0.50 1.46 115.30 48.0 400 MH-2-7 MH-2-8 2.60 2.84 -0.50 0.88 328.90
77 5.1 26
CO- CO-
7.5 500 MH-3-1 O-3 1.37 1.30 1.00 3.32 112.80 55.5 400 MH-2-8 MH-2-9 2.84 3.12 -0.50 0.67 292.60
87 28
CO-
7.1 600 MH-2-3 MH-2-2 1.85 1.84 0.10 2.09 68.50
89 MANHOLE REPORT
CO- MH-1- MH-1-
44.2 300 2.87 2.65 0.50 0.34 274.80
90 2.6 2.5
CO- Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m)
53.6 300 MH-1-10 MH-1-9 2.93 2.66 0.50 0.22 289.40
91
MH-5-1.4 4.12 2.14
CO- MH-3- MH-3-
47.4 300 2.80 3.04 -0.50 0.67 339.90 MH-5-1.3 3.94 1.74
92 1.6 1.7
MH-5- MH-5- MH-5-1.2 3.77 1.67
CO-4 44.9 400 2.14 2.37 -0.50 1.02 220.70
1.4 1.5 MH-5-1.1 3.65 1.58
CO- MH-5- MH-5- MH-5-2 3.52 1.92
55.9 300 2.94 3.22 -0.50 0.75 120.60
17 1.7 1.8
MH-5-3 3.89 2.23
CO-
51.4 400 MH-2-5 MH-2-6 2.16 2.41 -0.50 1.93 215.30 MH-5-4 4.19 2.54
23
CO- MH-5-5 4.44 2.94
37.5 400 MH-2-6 MH-2-7 2.41 2.60 -0.50 1.86 306.20
24 MH-4-1.5 4.35 1.95
CO- MH-4-1.2 4.01 1.56
44.1 600 MH-1-2 MH-1-1 0.68 0.64 0.10 1.37 107.40
30
MH-4-1.1 3.95 1.41
CO-
5.0 600 MH-1-1 O-1 0.64 0.64 0.10 1.35 95.30 MH-4-1 3.61 1.15
32
CO-2 46.0 600 MH-2-2 MH-2-1 1.25 1.20 0.10 2.75 101.00 MH-4-2 3.72 2.06
CO-5 5.5 600 MH-2-1 O-2 1.20 1.19 0.10 2.72 77.90 MH-4-3 4.02 2.17
MH-4- MH-4- MH-4-4 3.98 2.28
CO-9 15.1 300 1.95 2.02 -0.50 0.84 110.30
1.5 1.6 MH-4-5 4.13 2.41
CO- MH-4- MH-4- MH-4-6 4.24 2.59
16.1 300 2.02 2.10 -0.50 0.74 85.40
12 1.6 1.7
MH-4-7 4.34 2.68
CO- MH-4- MH-4-
37.4 300 2.10 2.29 -0.50 0.67 48.40 MH-4-8 4.42 2.77
15 1.7 1.8
CO-3 35.3 300 MH-4-9 MH-4-10 3.02 3.19 -0.50 0.25 327.70 MH-4-9 4.52 3.02
MH-4- MH-4- MH-3-1.6 4.45 2.70
CO-6 22.7 300 1.95 1.83 0.50 0.44 138.30
1.5 1.4 MH-3-1.5 4.17 2.35
CO- MH-4- MH-4- MH-3-1.4 4.07 2.29
47.9 300 3.00 2.68 0.67 0.31 5.60
10 1.4.1 1.4
MH-3-1.3 3.93 2.16
CO- MH-4- MH-4-
35.8 300 1.83 1.65 0.50 0.44 180.20 MH-2-3 4.15 1.85
13 1.4 1.3
CO- MH-4- MH-4- MH-2-2.1 4.31 2.68
19.4 300 1.65 1.56 0.50 0.42 219.90
16 1.3 1.2 MH-2-2.2 4.47 2.97
CO- MH-4- MH-4- MH-1-2.5 4.24 2.65
47.6 300 2.81 2.56 0.53 0.29 5.80
18 1.3.1 1.3

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 232 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m) Label Elevation (Ground) (m) Elevation (Invert) (m)

MH-1-2.4 4.02 2.29 MH-1-1 3.00 0.64

MH-1-2.3 3.90 2.09 MH-2-1 3.00 1.20
MH-1-2.2 3.65 1.66 MH-4-1.6 4.25 2.02
MH-1-2.1 3.39 1.15 MH-4-1.7 4.09 2.10
MH-1-2 3.00 0.68 MH-4-1.8 3.79 2.29
MH-2-5 4.15 2.06 MH-4-10 5.65 3.19
MH-2-4 4.35 2.00 MH-4-1.4.1 4.50 3.00
MH-2-5.1 4.27 2.61 MH-4-1.4 4.18 1.83
MH-2-5.2 4.37 2.78 MH-4-1.3.1 4.31 2.81
MH-2-5.3 4.49 2.99 MH-4-1.3 4.06 1.65
MH-1-9 4.27 2.66 MH-2-5.2.1 4.62 3.12
MH-1-8 4.04 2.29 CB-14 4.21 3.56
MH-1-7 3.82 1.81 CB-13 4.39 3.51
MH-1-6 3.60 1.44 CB-16 4.40 3.75
MH-1-5 3.42 1.08 CB-4 4.45 3.77
MH-1-3 3.30 0.82 CB-15 4.53 3.65
MH-1-3.3 3.82 2.32 CB-3 4.68 4.03
MH-1-3.2 3.68 2.04 CB-17 4.74 3.93
MH-1-3.1 3.48 1.73 CB-2 4.84 4.18
MH-3-1.2 3.81 2.02 CB-18 4.94 4.29
MH-3-1.1 3.67 1.97 CB-1 4.96 4.31
MH-3-1 3.66 1.37
MH-3-2 4.32 1.94
MH-3-3 4.35 1.97
MH-3-4 4.37 1.99
MH-3-5 4.40 2.01
MH-3-6 4.42 2.03
MH-3-7 4.32 2.37
MH-3-8 4.40 2.80
MH-5-1 3.53 1.43
MH-1-4 3.33 0.98
MH-2-2 4.21 1.25
MH-1-2.6 4.37 2.87
MH-1-10 4.43 2.93
MH-3-1.7 4.54 3.04
MH-5-1.5 4.25 2.37
MH-5-1.6 4.41 2.64
MH-5-1.7 4.55 2.84
MH-5-1.8 4.72 3.22
MH-2-6 4.29 2.41
MH-2-7 4.41 2.60
MH-2-8 4.55 2.84
MH-2-9 4.72 3.12

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 233 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX F: HYDRALUIC CALCULATION OF IRRIGATION SYSETM

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 234 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

IRRIGATION MODEL LAYOUT

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 235 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

PIPE REPORT: Head loss

Diameter
Label Start Node Stop Node Gradient Hazen-Williams C
(mm)
Head loss (m/km)
Diameter
Label Start Node Stop Node Gradient Hazen-Williams C P-41 J-2 J-4 141 0.021 130
(mm)
(m/km) P-42 J-34 J-39 96.8 8.669 130
P-1 R-1 J-1 141 5.01 130 P-43 J-39 J-40 96.8 8.669 130
P-2 J-1 J-3 141 2.292 130 P-44 J-40 J-41 96.8 8.669 130
P-3 J-3 J-5 141 0.48 130 P-45 J-41 J-42 96.8 8.669 130
P-4 J-5 J-6 141 0.48 130 P-46 J-42 J-43 96.8 8.669 130
P-5 J-6 J-7 141 0.48 130 P-47 J-43 J-44 96.8 8.669 130
P-6 J-7 J-8 141 0.48 130 P-48 J-44 J-45 96.8 8.669 130
P-7 J-9 J-10 141 0.328 130 P-49 J-45 J-46 96.8 8.669 130
P-8 J-10 J-11 141 0.328 130 P-50 J-46 J-47 96.8 8.669 130
P-9 J-11 J-12 141 0.328 130 P-51 J-47 J-48 96.8 8.669 130
P-10 J-12 J-13 141 0.328 130 P-52 J-48 J-49 96.8 8.669 130
P-11 J-13 J-14 141 0.328 130 P-53 J-49 J-50 96.8 8.669 130
P-12 J-14 J-15 141 0.328 130 P-54 J-50 J-51 96.8 8.669 130
P-13 J-15 J-16 141 0.328 130 P-55 J-51 J-52 96.8 8.669 130
P-14 J-16 J-17 141 0.445 130 P-56 J-52 J-53 96.8 8.669 130
P-15 J-17 J-18 141 0.445 130
P-16 J-18 J-19 141 0.445 130
P-17 J-19 J-20 141 0.445 130
P-18 J-20 J-21 141 0.445 130 NODE REPORT:
P-19 J-21 J-22 141 0.445 130
Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars)
P-20 J-23 J-24 141 0.299 130
J-1 4.51 4.55
P-21 J-24 J-25 141 0.299 130
J-2 4.07 4.55
P-22 J-25 J-26 141 0.299 130
J-3 4.33 4.55
P-23 J-26 J-27 141 0.299 130
J-4 4.32 4.53
P-24 J-27 J-28 141 0.299 130
J-5 4.64 4.51
P-25 J-28 J-29 141 0.16 130
J-6 4.94 4.48
P-26 J-29 J-30 141 0.16 130
J-7 4.71 4.5
P-27 J-30 J-31 141 0.16 130
J-8 4.42 4.52
P-28 J-31 J-32 141 0.16 130
J-9 4.17 4.54
P-29 J-32 J-33 141 0.16 130
J-10 3.87 4.57
P-30 J-33 J-34 141 0.16 130
J-11 3.96 4.55
P-31 J-34 J-35 141 0.696 130
J-12 4.54 4.49
P-32 J-35 J-36 141 0.696 130
J-13 4.48 4.5
P-33 J-36 J-37 141 0.696 130
J-14 3.72 4.57
P-34 J-37 J-38 141 0.696 130
J-15 3.59 4.58
P-35 J-38 J-1 141 0.696 130
J-16 4.63 4.47
P-36 J-3 J-28 141 0.81 130
J-17 4.82 4.46
P-37 J-22 J-2 141 0.445 130
J-18 4.54 4.49
P-38 J-2 J-23 141 0.299 130
J-19 4.31 4.52
P-39 J-8 J-4 141 0.48 130
J-20 4.02 4.55
P-40 J-4 J-9 141 0.328 130
J-21 3.76 4.58

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 236 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars) Label Elevation (m) Pressure (bars)
J-22 3.77 4.58 J-45 4.02 4.03
J-23 4.48 4.51 J-46 4 3.95
J-24 4.75 4.49 J-47 4.25 3.85
J-25 5.02 4.47 J-48 4.49 3.74
J-26 4.72 4.5 J-49 4.19 3.69
J-27 4.42 4.53 J-50 3.97 3.65
J-28 4.36 4.54 J-51 4.09 3.57
J-29 4.59 4.51 J-52 4.37 3.46
J-30 4.42 4.53 J-53 4.65 3.32
J-31 4.13 4.56
J-32 3.84 4.58
J-33 3.55 4.61
J-34 3.5 4.61
J-35 3.7 4.6
J-36 3.99 4.58
J-37 4.29 4.55
J-38 4.59 4.53
J-39 3.82 4.51
J-40 3.96 4.42
J-41 6.47 4.1
J-42 8.98 3.78
J-43 4.55 4.13
J-44 4.27 4.08

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 237 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

APPENDIX G: CHILLED WATER NETWORK HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS RESULTS

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 238 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 239 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 240 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 241 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 242 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 243 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 244 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 245 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 246 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Chilled Water Primary Network FCV Results Table of Diversified and Full Cooling Loads PRIMARY NETWORK : PIPE TABLE

PRIMARY NETWORK : FCV TABLE Pipe Label Diameter (mm) Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
Plot Diameter Peak Flow P-502 590.54 2.23 76.79
Diversified Flow
(Valve) Setting
Setting (Initial)
(mm) (Initial) P-503 590.54 2.23 76.78
(L/s)
(L/s)
P-504 590.54 2.23 76.79
Central 3-4-5-Outdoor Climate
600 610 763
Spine Control P-505 641.34 2.93 116
7-6-Outdoor Climate P-506 488.94 1.8 64.17
Promenade 450 303 379
Control
P-507 691.94 3.33 133.98
Furnished
Apartment S01 200 40 50 P-508 691.94 3.33 133.99
Building
P-513 488.94 1.58 50.67
Tertiary
Network - 500 297 371 P-516 488.94 1.58 50.67
Connection
P-517 691.94 3.33 133.99
TOTAL 1251 1564
P-520 691.94 3.33 133.99

P-523 691.94 3.33 133.99

Chilled Water Primary Network Pipe Results Table of Diversified Cooling Loads
P-524 691.94 3.33 133.99
PRIMARY NETWORK : PIPE TABLE P-527 691.94 3.33 133.99

Pipe Label Diameter (mm) Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) P-528 691.94 3.33 133.99

P-4 488.94 1.58 50.67 P-532 202.74 1.25 91.74

P-7 691.94 3.33 133.99 P-533 202.74 1.25 91.74

P-11 691.94 3.33 133.99 P-534 202.74 1.25 91.74

P-405 438.14 2.01 89.91

P-406 438.14 2.01 89.91

P-409 438.14 2.01 89.91

P-493 488.94 1.8 64.17

P-494 488.94 1.8 64.17

P-500 488.94 1.8 64.17

P-501 641.34 2.93 116

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 247 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Chilled Water Tertiary Network FCV Results Table of Diversified and Full Cooling Loads Plot Diameter Diversified Peak Flow Setting
(Valve) (mm) Flow Setting (Initial) (L/s)
Plot Diameter Diversified Peak Flow Setting (Initial) (L/s)
(Valve) (mm) Flow Setting (Initial) (L/s)
(Initial) (L/s) W25 100 8.00 8.88

W01 75 5.68 6.31 W26 100 8.02 8.91

W02 75 5.77 6.41 B01 100 6.18 6.87

W03 75 5.85 6.50 B02 75 5.86 6.51

W04 75 5.97 6.63 B03 75 5.52 6.13

W05 75 5.98 6.64 B04 75 5.39 5.99

W06 75 5.66 6.28 B05 75 5.39 5.99

W07 75 5.17 5.75 B06 75 5.39 5.99

W08 75 5.16 5.73 B07 75 5.39 5.99

W09 75 5.13 5.70 B08 75 5.39 5.99

W10 75 5.11 5.67 B09 75 5.39 5.99

Beach Front Villas

Water Front Villas

W11 75 5.08 5.65 B10 75 5.39 5.99

W12 75 5.09 5.65 B11 75 5.39 5.99

W13 75 5.08 5.65 B12 75 5.39 5.99

W14 75 5.08 5.64 B13 75 5.39 5.99

W15 75 5.10 5.67 B14 75 5.39 5.99

W16 75 5.11 5.68 B15 75 5.39 5.99

W17 75 5.11 5.68 B16 75 5.39 5.99

W18 75 5.42 6.02 B17 75 5.39 5.99

W19 75 5.43 6.04 B18 75 5.39 5.99

W20 75 5.13 5.70 B19 75 5.39 5.99

W21 100 8.52 9.46 B20 75 5.39 5.99

W22 100 8.20 9.12 B21 75 5.39 5.99

Villas in
W23 100 7.99 8.88
Plot 2 2-A 65 2.40 2.67

W24 100 7.97 8.85 2-B 65 2.48 2.75

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 248 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

Plot Diameter Diversified Peak Flow Setting

Chilled Water Tertiary Network Pipe Results Table of Diversified Cooling Loads
(Valve) (mm) Flow Setting (Initial) (L/s)
(Initial) (L/s) TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

2-C 65 2.56 2.84

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm)
2-D 65 2.40 2.67
P-16 77.92 1.19 255.78
2-E 65 2.40 2.67
P-25 102.26 0.75 79.56
2-F 65 2.40 2.67
P-29 254.56 2.65 281.64
2-G 65 2.40 2.67
P-33 254.56 2.65 282.32
2-H 65 2.40 2.67
P-41 77.92 1.21 263.34
2-I 65 2.40 2.67
P-42 77.92 1.21 263.35
2-J 65 2.40 2.67
P-45 77.92 1.21 263.34
2-K 65 2.40 2.67
P-46 154.08 0.93 72.67
2-L 65 2.40 2.67
P-47 102.26 1.39 249.27
2-M 65 2.40 2.67
P-48 77.92 1.23 270.14
2-N 65 2.40 2.67
P-49 77.92 1.23 270.15
2-O 65 2.40 2.67
P-50 102.26 1.39 249.27
2-P 65 2.40 2.67
P-51 154.08 0.93 72.68
2-Q 65 2.50 2.78
P-52 77.92 1.23 270.14
2-R 65 2.49 2.77
P-53 77.92 1.25 280.5
2-S 65 2.52 2.79
P-54 77.92 1.25 280.5
2-T 65 2.63 2.93
P-55 77.92 1.25 280.5
Mosque 8 75 4.04 4.49
P-56 254.56 2.53 258.96
Club
9 100 10.74 11.93
House
P-58 77.92 1.25 281.37
TOTAL 334 371
P-59 77.92 1.25 281.37

P-61 254.56 2.53 259.61

P-62 77.92 1.25 281.37

P-65 77.92 1.19 254.12

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 249 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-66 77.92 1.19 254.12 P-103 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-69 77.92 1.19 254.12 P-105 254.56 1.69 122.52

P-70 254.56 2.09 181.78 P-106 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-72 77.92 1.08 214.89 P-107 254.56 1.58 109

P-73 77.92 1.08 214.89 P-109 77.92 1.07 208.77

P-75 254.56 2.09 182.33 P-110 77.92 1.07 208.77

P-76 77.92 1.08 214.89 P-111 77.92 1.07 208.77

P-77 254.56 1.99 165.75 P-113 254.56 1.59 109.44

P-79 77.92 1.08 214.12 P-114 254.56 1.48 96.6

P-81 77.92 1.08 214.11 P-116 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-83 254.56 1.99 166.28 P-117 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-85 77.92 1.08 214.12 P-119 254.56 1.49 97.02

P-86 254.56 1.89 150.42 P-120 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-88 77.92 1.08 211.82 P-121 254.56 1.38 84.92

P-89 77.92 1.08 211.82 P-123 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-91 254.56 1.89 150.93 P-124 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-92 77.92 1.08 211.82 P-126 254.56 1.39 85.31

P-93 254.56 1.78 135.87 P-127 77.92 1.07 208.01

P-95 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-128 254.56 1.28 73.93

P-96 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-130 77.92 1.07 209.53

P-98 254.56 1.79 136.36 P-131 77.92 1.07 209.53

P-99 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-133 254.56 1.29 74.3

P-100 254.56 1.68 122.06 P-134 77.92 1.07 209.53

P-102 77.92 1.07 208.01 P-135 254.56 1.18 63.61

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 250 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-137 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-168 202.74 1.22 87.66

P-138 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-169 77.92 1.08 211.82

P-140 254.56 1.19 63.95 P-172 77.92 1.23 271

P-141 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-173 77.92 1.23 271

P-142 202.74 1.71 163.61 P-176 77.92 1.23 271

P-144 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-177 202.74 2.18 256.7

P-145 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-179 77.92 1.16 242.6

P-147 202.74 1.71 164.57 P-180 77.92 1.16 242.61

P-148 77.92 1.07 210.29 P-182 202.74 2.18 256.7

P-149 202.74 1.55 136.66 P-183 77.92 1.16 242.6

P-151 77.92 1.14 234.53 P-185 254.56 2.19 199.02

P-152 77.92 1.14 234.52 P-186 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-154 202.74 1.56 137.55 P-187 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-155 77.92 1.14 234.52 P-188 254.56 2.19 198.44

P-156 202.74 1.38 110.54 P-190 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-158 77.92 1.14 235.33 P-192 254.56 2.09 181.59

P-159 77.92 1.14 235.33 P-193 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-161 202.74 1.39 111.34 P-194 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-162 77.92 1.14 235.33 P-195 254.56 2.08 181.03

P-163 202.74 1.22 86.94 P-197 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-164 202.74 1.06 67.07 P-199 254.56 1.98 164.89

P-165 77.92 1.08 211.82 P-200 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-166 77.92 1.08 211.81 P-201 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-167 202.74 1.06 67.7 P-202 254.56 1.98 164.37

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 251 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-204 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-241 102.26 0.97 127.43

P-206 254.56 1.88 148.94 P-242 154.08 0.86 63.03

P-207 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-244 102.26 0.97 127.43

P-208 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-246 154.08 1.29 133.15

P-209 254.56 1.87 148.44 P-247 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-211 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-248 77.92 1.13 232.12

P-213 254.56 1.77 133.74 P-249 154.08 1.29 133.15

P-214 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-251 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-215 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-253 154.08 1.58 193.8

P-216 254.56 1.77 133.26 P-254 102.26 0.97 128.02

P-218 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-255 102.26 0.97 128.02

P-220 254.56 1.66 119.3 P-256 154.08 1.58 193.8

P-221 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-258 102.26 0.97 128.02

P-222 77.92 1.13 232.12 P-268 102.26 1 134.32

P-223 254.56 1.66 118.84 P-269 102.26 1 134.32

P-225 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-272 102.26 1 134.32

P-227 102.26 0.98 128.91 P-275 102.26 1.04 144.19

P-231 102.26 0.98 128.91 P-276 102.26 1.04 144.19

P-232 102.26 0.97 128.32 P-279 102.26 1.04 144.19

P-233 102.26 0.97 128.32 P-280 202.74 1.32 102.01

P-235 102.26 0.98 128.91 P-281 202.74 1.16 79.48

P-237 102.26 0.97 128.32 P-282 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-239 154.08 0.86 63.03 P-283 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-240 102.26 0.97 127.43 P-284 202.74 1.16 79.48

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 252 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-285 202.74 1.32 102.01 P-312 254.56 1.45 92.3

P-286 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-314 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-287 202.74 1.75 170.06 P-316 254.56 1.35 80.57

P-288 202.74 1.58 141.16 P-317 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-289 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-318 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-290 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-320 254.56 1.34 80.19

P-291 202.74 1.58 141.17 P-322 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-292 202.74 1.75 170.06 P-324 202.74 1.96 209.79

P-293 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-325 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-294 202.74 2.18 255.88 P-326 77.92 1.13 232.12

P-295 202.74 2.01 220.72 P-327 202.74 1.95 208.72

P-296 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-329 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-297 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-331 202.74 1.79 177.82

P-298 202.74 2.01 220.72 P-332 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-299 202.74 2.18 255.88 P-333 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-300 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-334 202.74 1.78 176.83

P-302 254.56 1.56 105.62 P-336 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-303 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-338 202.74 1.62 148.3

P-304 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-339 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-305 254.56 1.55 105.19 P-340 77.92 1.13 232.12

P-307 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-341 202.74 1.62 147.38

P-309 254.56 1.45 92.71 P-343 77.92 1.13 232.13

P-310 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-345 202.74 1.45 121.26

P-311 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-346 77.92 1.13 232.13

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 253 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-347 77.92 1.13 232.12 P-474 488.94 1.78 63.03

P-348 202.74 1.45 120.43 P-477 488.94 1.33 36.99

P-350 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-481 488.94 1.78 63.03

P-355 202.74 1.12 74.8 P-482 488.94 0.44 4.84

P-356 202.74 1.29 96.74 P-484 254.56 1.64 116.23

P-357 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-485 254.56 1.64 116.23

P-358 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-486 254.56 1.64 116.2

P-359 202.74 1.28 95.99 P-487 254.56 1.64 116.19

P-360 202.74 1.11 74.13 P-489 254.56 1.64 116.25

P-361 77.92 1.13 232.13 P-490 254.56 1.64 116.26

P-366 77.92 1.19 255.79 P-492 202.74 1.7 162.37

P-369 77.92 1.19 255.79 P-495 62.6 0.85 178.52

P-375 102.26 1.31 221.41 P-496 62.6 0.85 178.52

P-379 304.84 2.49 204.55 P-497 62.6 0.85 178.52

P-380 304.84 2.49 204.55 P-499 202.74 1.7 162.37

P-382 77.92 0.85 136.1 P-501 202.74 1.43 117.49

P-383 304.84 2.49 204.19 P-502 202.74 1.35 105.88

P-384 304.84 2.49 204.19 P-503 202.74 1.27 94.97

P-441 304.84 2.49 204.55 P-504 202.74 1.2 84.55

P-443 304.84 2.49 204.19 P-505 154.08 1.94 285.86

P-446 304.84 2.08 146.43 P-506 154.08 1.81 251.79

P-447 304.84 2.08 146.74 P-507 154.08 1.69 219.72

P-448 488.94 1.78 63.03 P-508 154.08 1.56 189.67

P-473 488.94 1.78 63.03 P-509 154.08 1.43 161.67

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 254 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-510 154.08 1.3 135.73 P-534 154.08 1.69 219.72

P-511 128.2 1.69 274.04 P-535 154.08 1.81 251.79

P-512 128.2 1.51 220.9 P-536 154.08 1.94 285.86

P-513 128.2 1.32 173.06 P-537 202.74 1.2 84.55

P-514 128.2 1.13 130.65 P-538 202.74 1.27 94.96

P-515 102.26 1.49 282.06 P-539 202.74 1.35 105.88

P-516 102.26 1.2 188.28 P-540 202.74 1.43 117.49

P-517 102.26 0.91 112.18 P-560 62.6 0.81 160.12

P-518 77.92 1.02 193.1 P-562 62.6 0.83 169.82

P-519 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-564 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-520 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-566 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-521 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-568 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-522 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-570 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-523 77.92 1.02 193.1 P-572 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-524 102.26 0.91 112.18 P-574 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-525 102.26 1.2 188.28 P-576 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-526 102.26 1.49 282.06 P-578 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-527 128.2 1.13 130.65 P-580 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-528 128.2 1.32 173.06 P-582 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-529 128.2 1.51 220.9 P-584 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-530 128.2 1.69 274.04 P-586 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-531 154.08 1.3 135.73 P-588 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-532 154.08 1.43 161.67 P-590 62.6 0.81 162.52

P-533 154.08 1.56 189.67 P-592 62.6 0.81 161.33

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 255 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m) Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)
(mm) (mm)

P-594 62.6 0.82 164.94 P-619 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-596 62.6 0.81 160.12 P-620 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-597 62.6 0.81 160.12 P-621 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-598 62.6 0.83 169.82 P-622 62.6 0.78 150.68

P-599 62.6 0.83 169.82 P-623 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-600 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-624 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-601 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-625 62.6 0.78 150.69

P-602 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-626 62.6 0.81 162.52

P-603 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-627 62.6 0.81 162.52

P-604 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-628 62.6 0.81 161.32

P-605 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-629 62.6 0.81 161.32

P-606 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-630 62.6 0.82 164.95

P-607 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-631 62.6 0.82 164.94

P-608 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-632 488.94 0.89 17.46

P-609 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-633 488.94 0.44 4.84

P-610 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-634 254.56 1.64 116.2

P-611 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-635 488.94 0.89 17.46

P-612 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-636 488.94 1.33 36.99

P-613 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-637 254.56 1.64 116.2

P-614 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-639 102.26 1.31 221.41

P-615 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-640 102.26 1.31 221.4

P-616 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-642 254.56 2.41 237.11

P-617 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-643 254.56 2.2 200.11

P-618 62.6 0.78 150.69 P-644 254.56 2.2 200.69

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 256 of 257

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works

TERTIARY NETWORK: PIPE TABLE

Pipe Label Diameter Velocity (m/s) Pressure Drop (Pa/m)

(mm)

P-645 254.56 2.41 237.74

P-647 77.92 0.85 136.09

P-648 77.92 0.85 136.1

P-650 202.74 1.88 195.88

P-651 202.74 2.01 220.66

P-652 202.74 2.01 220.66

P-653 202.74 1.88 195.88

P-658 202.74 1.7 162.37

P-659 202.74 1.51 130.19

P-660 202.74 1.51 130.19

P-661 202.74 1.7 162.37

P-666 102.26 0.75 79.56

P-669 102.26 0.75 79.56

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-RPT-PM-01 REV 0 Page 257 of 257